Air Quality Management Wastewater emits harmful toxins that affect air quality. Some researchers say the accumulation and intensity of microbiological emissions account for the highest concentrations of air quality pollutants from wastewater (Filipkowska 275).
Several researchers have made many attempts to improve air quality, mainly through the adoption of new technology. Nanotechnology is one such technology.
Many studies have explored the potential of nanotechnology to provide new solutions for improving not only the quality of the air we breathe, but also the quality of the water we drink (US Environmental Protection Agency 1).
Moreover, some studies propose nanotechnology as a reliable method for the improvement of traditional technologies for air quality management. The potential of nanotechnology to improve the quality of air and water stems from its unique characteristics that help to reduce air pollution.
Certainly, some studies propose the viability of nanotechnology to reduce harmful emissions from wastewater (US Environmental Protection Agency 1).
Theodore (110) says that nanotechnology improves air quality in two ways. The first way involves the use of catalysts, while the second way involves the use of nano-structured membranes that alter the chemical composition of harmful wastewater pollutants (into less harmful components).
The catalytic approach may also produce a chemical reaction that changes harmful molecules into harmless compositions that do not have any serious effect on air quality. Therefore, harmful vapour/gases that come from wastewater do not compromise air quality. These mechanisms show the potential of nanotechnology to improve air quality management.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Source and Typical Concentrations of Pollutants Microbiological pollution is the main type of air pollution that occurs in wastewater treatment processes. Therefore, the intensity and range of microbiological emissions detail the main source of air quality degradation. For example, Eastern Research Group (5) says wastewaters emit aerosols, which contain harmful elements that compromise air quality.
Therefore, organic-containing wastewater normally encounters the atmosphere and compromise air quality. Furthermore, Eastern Research Group (5) explains that whenever the organic-containing wastewater meets the atmosphere, the probability for volatile organic compounds (VOC) emissions to occur is high.
The wastewater emanating from industrial processes (and domestic consumption) collects in on-site wastewater treatment facilities that are exposed to the atmosphere. The exposure to the atmosphere gives way for the volatility of harmful air pollutants to the environment.
The volatility of wastewater compounds normally occurs because harmful emissions escape into the atmosphere as a way to strike equilibrium above wastewater (Eastern Research Group 5). In so doing, harmful organic chemicals pollute the air.
This pollution normally occurs in wastewater collection and treatment facilities. Nonetheless, the intensity of the pollutants normally varies, depending on many factors such as the physical properties of the pollutants and the concentration of the pollutants.
In this regard, the Eastern Research Group (5) says the temperature of the environment and the physical design of the wastewater treatment facilities have a role to play in the intensity of the pollution
Current Air Regulation and Enforcement In Canada, the role of overseeing air quality control lies with the provincial governments. However, federal laws also integrate with provincial legislations to provide a comprehensive framework for air quality control laws in the country.
We will write a custom Term Paper on Literature Review on Technology on Air Quality Management due to Waste Water specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More As will be demonstrated in subsequent sections of this report, the federal government enforces air quality regulation through the Canadian Environmental Protection Act (Health Canada 2). The government signed the Canadian Environmental Protection Act as a Federal environmental law.
The law stipulates that the protection of the environment is pivotal to the overall well-being of the country. This law helps to maintain high air quality through the adherence to national quality objectives. Through national ambient air quality objectives, it is easy for the government to enforce air regulation laws by assessing air pollutants.
Moreover, through the Canada-wide standards, under the Canadian Environmental Protection Act, it is similarly easy for the government to enforce the current air regulation standards (Health Canada 2).
Air quality management in Canada is also subject to the Canada-wide Standards that Canadian environmental ministers formulated in 1998 (Health Canada 3). Several jurisdictions within the country signed this act into law, except for Quebec.
The provinces also signed a sub-agreement with Canada-wide standards (regarding this law) because the Canada-wide Standards supported the implementation of existing legislations surrounding environmental management.
The legal framework aimed to provide a realistic outline for the realisation of health and environmental goals in the country. The Canadian government considers the Canada-wide standards for air quality management as realistic objectives in environmental management (Health Canada 2).
Recommendations for Design and Operation The sophistication of landfill design is a sure way of reducing the extent of air pollution caused by leachate and other pollutants. Rong (18) says that a good design for wastewater treatment depends on the adoption of better technology.
Eastern Research Group (7) says the development of a good landfill design depends on the success of embracing sound economic principles and societal support. Nonetheless, a good design of operation needs to factor all the important areas of treatment, at the beginning of the project, and not after the project has been completed.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Literature Review on Technology on Air Quality Management due to Waste Water by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Industrial and municipal designs for the control of leachate normally differ. Generally, landfill designs involve careful site preparation, the incorporation of a leachate collection system and a good gas collection system as well.
In city dwellings, landfills normally divide into two groups – waste landfill and sanitary landfill (Rong 18). The sanitary landfill is normally good for urban dwellings because it beautifies the environment, but it does not have any material difference with waste landfill.
Broadly, the right design for leachate and air quality control in wastewater management involves the inclusion of the following sections.
Pre-treatment of Solid waste The quality and control of solid waste normally lead to the production of air pollutants from wastewater because the higher the volume of solid waste, the higher the concentration of leachate.
Through an analysis of the generation of solid waste, it is crucial to say, “If the masses of solid wastes accumulate in the future, designers should complete planning carefully, so that the background of data is a first factor for the beginning of the landfill design” (Rong 18).
Through this design, it is important to affirm that the chemical composition of leachate connects with the pre-treatment of solid waste to provide a good backdrop for the control of leachate.
If the pre-treatment of solid waste is carefully factored into the design of a wastewater treatment plant, it is easy to see how the chemical composition of solid waste may be reduced before it flows to the landfill.
Cover System The landfill cover system forms a critical part of the design of wastewater treatment facilities. The main purpose of including the cover system is to isolate wastewater from the landfill (for the prevention of leachate generation).
Similarly, the cover system aids the growth of plants that may prevent the landfill from environmental destruction in the future. In this regard, “the cover should have lower permeability than the bottom liner to prevent surface water flow into the landfill” (Rong 19).
Three types of covers detail the cover system – daily cover, intermediate cover, and final cover (Rong 18). The daily cover involves the setup of a special layer of soil, over the landfill, usually on a daily basis. Designers use sandy soil for this purpose.
The use of sandy soil is normal, but other materials may also serve the same purpose (wood, clay, sand, and chemical forms are just a few examples of useful alternative materials) (Rong 18).
The cover thickness may be about half of a meter, to make it easier for vehicles to drive over the landfill. Marinating a daily cover system over the landfill is a viable way of ensuring that air pollution does not occur through the dispersion of harmful materials.
An intermediate cover is different from the daily cover because landfill designers normally use it when the landfill is unused. An intermediary cover involves the use of more soil to prevent harmful contaminants from the landfill to infiltrate the atmosphere.
An intermediary landfill may be about 1.2 meters and may equally involve planting vegetation if the landfill is unused for long (Rong 18). Lastly, the final cover may be about two meters thick and may look like thick vegetation. The vegetation prevents the evaporation of harmful chemicals into the atmosphere (Rong 18).
Bottom-liner System Rong (22) says that the bottom-liner system is the most important part of the landfill design because it provides the most important layer for the prevention of harmful toxins from permeating to the atmosphere.
The bottom-liner system encompasses several layers including the waste material, protective gravel cover, Geo-composite drainage layer, primary leachate collection system, Geo-composite drainage layer, primary Geo-membrane (1.5 mm), Geo-synthetic clay liner, Geo-composite drainage layer, secondary leachate collection system, secondary Geo-membrane (1.5 mm), re-compacted clay (1 meter) and the natural soil and rock (Rong 22).
The success of this landfill design affirms through a laboratory analysis, which occurred in a wastewater treatment facility in Tarastenjärvi, Finland (Rong 22). The main module of conducting the experiment was to understand the quality and characteristics of the leachate after researchers subjected it through the landfill design mentioned above.
In the laboratory test, the researchers analysed the volume of the total suspended solids and the pH of the leachate to understand their potential impact on the atmosphere. They realised that there was a significant reduction in air pollution (Rong 22).
Introduction to Problem Domain Theodore (110) believes that nanotechnology is a reliable technology for the detection and prevention of air pollution. The application of nanotechnology in air quality management thrives on the premise that nanotechnology degrades wastewater contaminants into less harmful substances that would not compromise the quality of air.
However, its application in the improvement of air quality (through wastewater pollution) is indirect, especially without a methodological approach that would suit the intended purpose of the initiative.
In other words, the success of nanotechnology in air quality management depends on finding a reliable methodological approach for the adoption of nanotechnology in air quality management.
Motivation of Work The main motivation of work for introducing nanotechnology is to improve air quality management. The adoption of nanotechnology therefore strives to reduce the intensity of pollution that permeates the environment through poor wastewater management.
Objective of Work As mentioned in earlier sections of this paper, the treatment, prevention, and management of wastewater pollutants depend on the effective adoption of nanotechnology.
The main objective of the implementation process includes the determination of how to apply nano-materials in a sustainable way (for the remediation of contaminants) and how nano-materials may minimise waste through the substitution of toxic materials with less toxic emissions.
The initial implementation process concerns the reduction of key pollutants that are important to the Canadian environmental law. In addition, the main aim of this process involves the determination of the right type of catalysts that have enhanced catalytic properties that may slow or increase a chemical reaction.
Implementation Methodology Bionics is the preferred implementation methodology for nanotechnology (in the context of this paper). This system thrives on the application of biological methods in engineering systems for optimum efficiency in air quality management (Kipper 141).
The interconnection between life forms of engineering systems provide a desirable balance for bionic technology because evolutionary pressure forms a critical striking balance of living organisms to provide desirable results in nature balance (as demonstrated by flora and sauna) (Kipper 141).
A classic example of this application is the production of non-sticky paint through the affirmation that the lotus flower provides a rough surface. Some researchers have adopted this technology in the production of non-sticky paint (Theodore 111).
Steinfeldt (189) says researchers may use the same model in the improvement of air quality management through the modification of living molecules to reduce the harmful effects of wastewater toxins in the atmosphere.
Helwegen (23) says the use of nanotechnology in the improvement of air quality management is an ongoing process that needs a localised approach to eliminate the negative toxins found in wastewater. The ongoing research process still premises on the adoption of bionics as the main methodological approach.
In detail, Helwegen (23) explains that carrying out a function (found in nature) and modifying its components for reduced environmental harm provides the best approach for the improvement of air quality management.
The adoption of bionics in computer science provides an example of a practical application of this methodology because the adoption of cybernetics (in computer science) provides a simulation of the intrigues witnessed in the analysis of human intelligence (Helwegen (23).
An artificial understanding of this model remodels the same behaviour without considering how it occurs.
As mentioned in this paper, treating nature as a workable solution for air quality management provides a reliable database for the reduction and removal of the failures that exist in air quality management.
Through this understanding, it is important to draw a strong link between the use of the bionic approach and the natural improvement of air quality management using natural means.
Rong (22) says that the construction of wetlands in wastewater areas is one form of naturally purifying the air, even when wastewater contaminants pollute the atmosphere.
Indeed, Rong (22) says that constructed wetlands provide an innovative treatment technology for controlling the spread of leachate because wetlands comprise of water, soil, and plants that may absorb harmful contaminants from the atmosphere.
The main advantage of this approach is the low cost of air quality management and the simple use of technology for achieving desirable results in the process. The main purpose of using this example to explain bionics is to show the advantage of using naturally occurring technologies to improve air quality management.
In fact, Steinfeldt (189) draws a strong link between engineering and the use of naturally occurring technologies by saying that almost all forms of engineering rely on some form of bio-mimicry. Nanotechnology works through this same approach.
Results and Discussion From rapid urbanisation and the growing population pressure, it is critical to appreciate that wastewater and other pollutants compromise environmental quality. The different research studies analysed in this report show that, air quality management mainly relies on the need to prevent and control the leachate problem.
Indeed, the control and management of leachate is not only an important issue in the control of air quality, but also the sustenance of the wider environmental management practices.
The control of landfill leachate is therefore an important addition to air quality control management because mismanaged leachate leads to compromised air quality control. The studies sampled in this paper show that proper landfill design divides into three important sections – pre-treatment of landfill solids, cover system (daily cover, intermediate cover, and final cover).
The bottom-liner system also forms an important addition to this landfill design. However, since this paper proposes the use of nanotechnology as the main technology for air quality management, it is crucial to say that the leachate treatment method should mainly rely on the biological, physical, and chemical processes.
Furthermore, to save the entire costs that would be associated with air quality management, it would be wise to integrate landfill design with suggested nanotechnology tools for maximum air quality management. Similarly, this integration may reduce the quality of leachate.
This analogy stems from the understanding that the source and typical concentrations of air quality pollutants come from aerosol-emitting wastewater. Often, this form of contamination is microbiological. When the aerosols encounter the atmosphere, contamination occurs.
Since the main form of contamination is microbiological, the adoption of nanotechnology is the best approach for mitigating this contamination because nanotechnology incorporates biological and engineered approaches for air quality management.
Certainly, through this technological framework, the adoption of bionics also surfaces as the appropriate methodological approach to improve air quality because it conceptualises the biological and engineered approaches described above (Kjolberg 269). This is the justification for the use of the above techniques.
Conclusion The main purpose of this analysis was to analyse the best technologies for improving air quality management. The literature survey above suggests the importance of understanding the landfill design, the management of leachate and the improvement of air quality, through bionics.
Bionics is therefore the main methodological approach for the incorporation of nanotechnology in air quality management. Through the adoption of this methodological approach, it would be easier to meet the threshold for environmental quality management, as outlined in the existing environmental laws.
Notably, the Canadian environmental protection act and the Canada-wide standards may be satisfied through the adoption of the above methodologies because both legislative provisions require the reduction of harmful air pollutants. Nanotechnology (through the bionics approach) helps to achieve this objective.
Works Cited Eastern Research Group. Preferred and Alternative Methods for Estimating Air Emissions from Wastewater Collection and Treatment, Morrisville, North Carolina: Eastern Research Group. 1997. Print.
Filipkowska, Zofia. “Microbiological Air Pollution in the Surroundings of the Wastewater Treatment Plant with Activated-Sludge Tanks Aerated by Horizontal Rotors.” Polish Journal of Environmental Studies 9.4 (2000): 273-280. Print.
Health Canada 2012. Regulations Related To Health And Air Quality. Web.
Helwegen, Wim. Nanotechnology Commercialization for Managers and Scientists, New York: CRC Press, 2012. Print.
Kipper, Greg. Augmented Reality: An Emerging Technologies Guide to AR, Sydney: Elsevier, 2012. Print.
Kjolberg, Kamilla. Nano Meets Macro: Social Perspectives on Nanoscale Sciences and Technologies, New York: Pan Stanford Publishing, 2010. Print.
Rong, Li. Management of Landfill Leachate, Tampere, Finland: TAMK University, 2009. Print.
Steinfeldt, Michael. Nanotechnologies, Hazards, and Resource Efficiency: A Three- tiered Approach to Assessing the Implications of Nanotechnology and Influencing Its Development, New York: Springer, 2007. Print.
Theodore, Louis. Nanotechnology: Environmental Implications and Solutions, London: John Wiley
Book Critique: “Little Princes: One Man’s Promise to Bring Home the Lost Children of Nepal” by Conor Grennan Essay (Critical Writing) online essay help: online essay help
The poor conditions in which a lot of children from developing countries live can provoke many problems in relation to the children’s health and growth. The negative physical and social environments influence children directly because of their impossibility to resist adverse impacts and different diseases.
In his book Little Princes: One Man’s Promise to Bring Home the Lost Children of Nepal, Conor Grennan discusses the living conditions of the children in Nepal, referring to the situation in the orphanage known as the Little Princes Children’s Home.
Children were brought to the orphanage in spite of the fact that they had families. Thus, the children’s parents intended to protect their children from poverty and civil war by sending them to the orphanage.
Grennan writes the book to reveal the aspects of the poor children’s life in the orphanage in Nepal which is influenced by the risky situation of the civil war in the country, poverty, absence of the parental love, malnutrition, psychological pressure, and unavailability of medical services.
Providing the description of the volunteering experience in the Little Princes Children’s Home, Grennan refers to a lot of examples which are associated with the individuals of children in order to personalize the global problem of the children’s ill state in many developing countries of the world (Grennan, 2010).
It is possible to refer to the global organizations’ tasks to concentrate on the child survival and development in relation to the developing countries. From this point, the book written by Grennan can be discussed as the evidence to illustrate the real situation in the world regarding the children’s physical and emotional development.
Global health is the complex notion which also includes the concept of the child health. In spite of the fact the book does not discuss the heath questions directly, the author refers to the problems of the child health while describing the physical and psychological state of many children living in the orphanage.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The health of children can depend on the social situation within the country (Skolnik, 2012, p. 209-211). Thus, the civil war in Nepal creates conditions for the progress of poverty within the state. As a result, those children who are brought to the Little Princes Children’s Home also suffer from the consequences of the instable social situation.
According to Grennan, child’s malnutrition is typical for Nepal that is why children in the orphanage have poor health and weak immune system (Grennan, 2010).
Moreover, the situation with the medical services in Nepal is also problematic, and a lot of people, including children, have no opportunities to receive the necessary medical treatment. Thus, it is important to analyze Grennan’s book in the context of the global health problems.
The problems which are associated with poverty and resulting in malnutrition, child mortality, lack of the medical services, and negative physical and social environments are typical for children from the Little Princes Children’s Home, and these issues are also correlated with the global health problems (Skolnik, 2012, p. 50-52).
From this point, the book contributes to the understanding of the aspects of global health basing on the concrete examples of children from the orphanage in Nepal.
Grennan’s book is important to demonstrate the real significance of the global health issue related to the child survival and development with references to the concrete territory and concrete problems. It is possible to overcome the global health issues only depending on the idea of the global partnership for the development (Skolnik, 2012).
Grennan’s description of the children’s state can be discussed as the evidence to support the idea of the complex actions in order to cope with a lot of global health problems. Furthermore, the book provides significant evidences to claim the importance of the psychological comfort and parental love for children.
We will write a custom Critical Writing on Book Critique: “Little Princes: One Man’s Promise to Bring Home the Lost Children of Nepal” by Conor Grennan specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Thus, there are several factors which can contribute to the improvement of the children’s health. These factors are the availability of food, access to the clean water, medical care, and parental care.
Grennan’s book conveys an important message that healthy and happy children should grow in their families. It is a controversial task to speak about the better conditions for children who were taken from their own families and brought to the orphanage.
Little Princes: One Man’s Promise to Bring Home the Lost Children of Nepal written by Conor Grennan is also important to re-think the problem of the global heath from the point of ethics and human rights.
All the humans are equal in their right to live in the appropriate conditions and receive the necessary medical treatment (Skolnik, 2012, p. 71-75). Describing the lives of children who are deprived of the basic conditions, the author draws the audience’s attention to the social problem.
Grennan’s book is a significant illustration of the life typical for the developing countries using the example of the orphanage in Nepal.
Although the book is not connected with the problem of the child health directly, the descriptions and discussions presented in the book are important to develop the issue of the child survival and development as one of the global health problems.
References Grennan, C. (2010). Little princes: One man’s promise to bring home the lost children of Nepal. New York, NY: HarperCollins.
Skolnik, R. (2012). Global health 101. Sudbury, MA: Jones
going to watch The Perceiving Brain (see Course Material for the link), a panel discussion with several experts in the neuroscience of vision, in which they introduce the visual system. Please answer the following questions, which check your comprehension of the talk. https://charlierose.com/collections/3/clip/14569 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=y_l4kQ5wjiw essay help
At the beginning of the discussion, Eric Kandel says that visual perception does not work as a camera works. This is discussed throughout the talk. What is meant by this? In 2-what ways is vision not like how a camera works? According to Tony Movshon, the eye itself is very similar to a camera. In what ways? The seminal work of Hubel and Wiesel is discussed. What did Hubel and Wiesel do? Why did they do this work? What did they discover? What is a receptive field? What stimulus do photoreceptors in the retina respond to? What stimulus do cells in the early visual cortex respond to? What does Eric Kandel mean by hierarchical processing in the visual system? How does the work of Hubel and Wiesel demonstrate this principle? What do the researchers mean when they talk about localization of function in the visual system? Nancy Kanwisher discusses the evidence for this. What is the evidence that she presents? Pawan Sinha talks about the work he has done with blind children in India, named Project Prakash. What was the work his team did and why was it important in teaching us about how the visual system works? In other words, what did they discover about how newly sighted children see the world? Do they see the world in the same way as those with normal vision? Ted Adelson talks about how the brain is doing detective work on the incoming sensory signals and he uses a stimulus (the dalmatian dog) to illustrate this. Explain what he means when he says the brain is doing detective work. Why is the image on the retina ambiguous? What is the brain doing with that incoming ambiguous information? Pawan Sinha talks about “the programs for learning vision” in the context of his work with Project Prakash. Can these programs be activated later in life after infancy? What is the evidence for this that he presents? The researchers discuss the problem of creating computers that have vision. What are the problems? How does our visual system compare to the visual system of current computers with recognizing faces? Towards the end of the discussion, the researchers talk about how much of our visual system is genetically determined. Is everything determined genetically? What evidence is there for neural plasticity, or the brain changing due to experience and not to genetics?
Buddha’s Sermon: Down the Middle Way in Search for the Ultimate Truth Essay college admissions essay help: college admissions essay help
Many people look for the truth during their entire life, yet ultimately fail, because they set the wrong course for their search (Wright, 1997). They suppose that truth comes as bliss. However, they soon realize that they are wrong.
The truth is in suffering.
Passing through suffering is an integral part of becoming a true Buddhist; however, suffering itself is not enough. It is not the pain that helps reveal the truth, but the wisdom that comes with the ability to fight the pain.
The truth is in suffering and finding the way to deal with this suffering.
Only when facing a painful dilemma, one can look into one’s mind and face the problems that (s)he has been running away from for too long. Moreover, finding the answer to these questions through enduring pain is the way to cognize the truth.
The truth is the revelation that comes as a result of suffering.
Those who want to seek the answers to their questions must start with learning the answers to the questions to one’s own self. Only when learning one’s true nature and understanding one’s real purpose, one can develop further on and reveal the links between the objective reality and the postulates of Buddhism.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The key problem of Buddhism nowadays is the doubt among its members, and the attempts to seek the solution to their problems outside Buddhism.
Thus, Buddhist knowledge and postulates get mixed with the influences of other religions and philosophies. Thus, one gets even further away from true knowledge than one used to be when starting one’s Path.
The truth is in defining and cognizing one’s self.
Buddhism is not the answer to one’s problems, nor is Buddhism the key to the problems solution. Providing the means to learn about the links between the elements of the world and allowing to understand how a human being factors into these relationships, Buddhism offers the Path that leads to learning the truth.
However, on the way to the ultimate truth, one has to pass Four Noble Truths. As it has been mentioned, Buddhism does not help escape suffering – on the contrary, it helps one merge with suffering and understand its essence. Only facing one’s deepest fears, one can become absolutely free and ready to absorb the ultimate truth.
Therefore, cognizing dukkha (suffering) is not enough (Fowler, 1999). One has to learn its origin, which will lead to figuring out how to put a stop to it; then, the path that leads to the cessation of the suffering will be revealed, which, in its turn, will lead to the ultimate truth.
The truth is the revelation that comes after the Four Noble Truths have been cognized.
We will write a custom Essay on Buddha’s Sermon: Down the Middle Way in Search for the Ultimate Truth specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Many Buddhist followers nowadays are confused about the necessity to suffer in order to cognize the truth. They try to cut the road to enlightenment short. However, only passing the four dukkhas, one can become the enlightened one.
The truth is a revelation and the enlightenment.
Reaching for the truth is what a person’s life must be devoted to. Once the truth has been discovered, one is able to become the Enlightened One and cognize the mystery of life.
Seeking truth is the only reasonable purpose in life; though very few manage to learn the truth, its search should be the guiding principle, for living without truth means wandering in darkness.
Reference List Fowler, M. (1999). Buddhism: Beliefs and practices. Sussex, UK: Sussex Academic Press.
Wright, C. (1997). Buddhism for today. Oxford, UK: Oxford University Press.
The disconnect between tradition and contemporary practice in yoga Proposal essay help site:edu
The practice of yoga dates back to ancient Indian philosophy. It uses a system of mind and body control to achieve liberation from the vices associated with the weakness of the human body and mind. Traditionally, yoga practices were meant to unite the human body with the divine.
The postures involved in yoga (asana) were a means to achieving this higher spirituality. In the late 19th century, yoga was introduced to the western world where it quickly took the form of physical exercises.
Modern yoga emphasized the use of yoga postures to achieve better health as opposed to traditional practice that emphasized achievement of a higher spirituality using the body and mind.
The purpose of this thesis is to point out the disconnect that exists between traditional yoga and contemporary practice. While traditional yoga is aimed at achieving spirituality, contemporary practice emphasizes yoga as a means of physical fitness.
In traditional meaning, yoga was seen as a disciplined way to achieve a goal. In simpler terms, it is spiritual training. To maintain the discipline, the body and mind had to be coordinated and geared towards achieving the kind of higher spirituality that would ultimately transform the human being from a normal chaotic state into a perfect ordered state.
In any religion, the sole purpose of spirituality is to be at peace with the inner self. Traditional yoga is the epitome of spirituality for it seeks to cease the agitation of the consciousness. To make that possible, one goes through a rigorous regimen of physical and mental endurance whose ultimate goal is to free the mind from the vices of humanity.
In this sense yoga becomes theistic. The spirituality of yoga is concerned with the human condition and how to manage the flaws of humanity. One trains to be in full awareness of these flaws and learns how to sustain their spiritual reality throughout any situation.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More By going through the regimen of yoga, one learns how to discipline their inner awareness until such a point that they attain liberation to that place of perfection within the self.
Contemporary yoga came into existence during the late 19th century, with greater emphasis on the physical postures of yoga. Consequently, modern yoga has come to be associated with physical fitness. Modernists perpetrate yoga as a physical system with a spiritual component.
It therefore means that the contemporary school of thought holds in high esteem, the physical aspect of yoga as a means to achieving satisfaction that is deemed spiritual.
In order to understand how the traditional practice of yoga is linked to spirituality whilst the contemporary practice is a mere physical act, a look into some academic sources will help shed the light by outlining the meaning and purpose of yoga from a traditional point of view and from a contemporary point of view.
Anderson, Sandra, and S.Rolf. Yoga:Mastering the basics, Washington: Himalayan Institute Press, 2000. Print.
Modern yoga is centered upon the physical aspects of yoga. This book offers a comprehensive and practical guide to the essential elements of yoga. In as much as the authors recognize the contribution of yoga to the transformation of the mind, body and soul, much of the book revolves around the physical aspect (asana) and going into details about the postures, breathe training, relaxation, and meditation.
This is a classic example of how modern day yoga practice has been contorted to be the achievement of spirituality through physical activity.
We will write a custom Proposal on The disconnect between tradition and contemporary practice in yoga specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Muni, Rajarshi. Yoga:The ultimate spiritual path, New York: Llewelyn wordwide, 2001. Print.
The author is an accomplished yogi who has written numerous books on the practice of traditional yoga. He describes yoga as the union of the body and mind for spiritual development.Muni traces the history of yoga to the philosophy and religion of ancient India and its decline to what is now contemporary yoga as a result of western influence.
This book opens up the mind to the fact that traditional yoga is more than slow, gentle stretching and breathing exercises. Rather, he points to the philosophy and metaphysics of the practice in seeking to harmonize the spirit, mind and body.
Muni’s approach is important in establishing the origins of yoga and the fact it has a spiritual aspect.it is also important to note that the author is aware of the use of physical exercises to describe modern day yoga.
Singleton, Mark. Yoga body:The origin of modern posture practice, Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2010. Print.
Singleton seeks to understand why the practice of asana (the physical exercises) has become the international face of yoga. Many people are misled into thinking that the physical aspect rather than the spiritual is the most important.
Despite this acknowledgement, the author makes a contradictory statement and thus reinstates the popular belief of yoga being the actual physical exercises by declaring that contemporary yoga is drawn from the more recent western influences in sporting activities.
Iyengar, Kelvin. Yoga:The path to holistic health, Maine: D.K Publishers, 2007. Print.
Not sure if you can write a paper on The disconnect between tradition and contemporary practice in yoga by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Iyengar is a world renowned yogi who shares the sentiments of contemporary yoga. Although he lauds yoga as a holistic experience that benefits the body, mind and spirit, he concentrates on the physical acts of yoga (asana) and how they can be adapted to counter the stresses of modern living.
This goes to show the extent to which modernity has influenced the true meaning of yoga to an acceptable norm of physical fitness.
Carpenter, David and W. Ian. Yoga:The Indian tradition, London: Princeton Univerity Press, 2003. Print.
Just like Muni, these authors share the same school of thought in which traditional yoga is viewed as having descended from Indian philosophy and hence religion. In this sense, yoga springs from Indian history and religion and its sole purpose is the affirmation of spirituality.
They do agree that contemporary yoga draws its mantra based on physical exercises from one of its disciplines but does not involve the spirit. Traditional yoga therefore transcends the physical by incorporating all the facets of the human body and mind to attain spirituality.
In conclusion, it is evident that there is a lack of connection between traditional and contemporary yoga practices. Traditional yoga is religious in nature and its main purpose is the attainment of spirituality within an individual.
This kind of spirituality is achieved through strict control of the body and mind therefore it is a spiritual as well as a physical and mental process. Contemporary yoga is far more widespread than traditional yoga.
Its use as a physical fitness or health guideline is far removed from spirituality and hence religion.it seeks to ensure the well-being of the physical body without involving the spirit. It would be safe to make an assumption that the goals of the two disciplines are far removed from each other.
Works Cited Anderson, Sandra, and S.Rolf. Yoga:Mastering the basics, Washington: Himalayan Institute Press, 2000. Print.
Carpenter, David and W. Ian. Yoga:The Indian tradition, London: Princeton Univerity Press, 2003. Print.
Iyengar, Kelvin. Yoga:The path to holistic health, Maine: D.K Publishers, 2007. Print.
Muni, Rajarshi. Yoga:The ultimate spiritual path, New York: Llewelyn wordwide, 2001. Print.
Singleton, Mark. Yoga body:The origin of modern posture practice, Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2010. Print.
Sustainability in Canada and the impact of Coca-Cola Company on environmental protection Essay college application essay help
The environment today is facing several problems some of which include pollution, destruction, and deterioration just to mention a few. Thus, issues of the environment have attracted a lot of concern from all levels of governance in the world.
It is because of this that companies are encouraged to practice corporate social responsibility and sustainability. Through corporate social responsibility, companies are able to get back to the society that they work in by improving the quality of life through social and economic development (Sun 63).
Sustainability on the other hand looks at protecting the environment for the future generation. This paper is an in-depth analysis of sustainability in Canada and the impact of the Coca-Cola Company on environmental protection.
The issue of environmental sustainability is one of the Millennium Goals because of its global concern. Canada is no exception in trying to achieve environmental sustainability. In environmental sustainability, people take care of the environment by making sure that they put to the environment only what it can endure (Blackburn 103).
Thus, the issue of environmental sustainability incorporates all stakeholders including the government. The Canadian government has in the recent past advocated for the ‘go green’ campaign. In this, the government requires that companies and the people in the society use substances that are environmental friendly.
For instance, the use of polythene and plastic substances has been banned in Canada. The Canadian citizens are also advised to watch on their retail shopping and ensure that they are buying environmental friendly products.
In addition to this, the Canadian government has established the Canadian Environmental Sustainability Indicators (CESI), which is responsible for measuring the progress of sustainability development in the country.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The Coca-Cola Company is one of the oldest existing companies having been established in 1944. Despite getting competitors like Pepsi and Schweppes, Coca-Cola has managed to penetrate the market and distribute its products to over 200 nations globally.
In addition to the existing soft drink products, Coca-Cola has invented products such as caffeine-free Coca-Cola, diet coke, and Coca-Cola vanilla among others. From the aforementioned brands of Coca-Cola products, it is clear that the company is working towards protecting the environment in various ways.
For example, diet coke is a product made using natural sugars thus less harmful to the health of human beings. The caffeine-free product is also user friendly because it lacks caffeine, which is a mild drug. Other than this, Coca-Cola has been protecting the environment by putting measures that prevent environmental pollution.
In fact, Coca-Cola was among the first companies to attain ISO certifications as well as carry out its operations under the HACCP rules. This has played a major role in environmental protection because the food safety rules in HACCP and ISO are geared towards environmental sustainability among other measures (Blackburn 242).
Just like other food companies, Coca-Cola has put in place proper ways of disposal of wastes so that they do not pollute the environment.
Nevertheless, one of the biggest challenges that Coca-Cola faces in environmental protection is that of their packaging materials. For a long time, the soft drinks have been packaged in glass, plastic, and tin materials, which have proved to be polluting the environment (Sun 87).
Getting an alternative for the plastic bottles is s hurdle for Coca-Cola since their products are carbonated thus packaged under high pressure thus glass and plastics are the most suitable packages. However, recycling of the plastic and glass bottles has worked as one way of protecting the environment.
We will write a custom Essay on Sustainability in Canada and the impact of Coca-Cola Company on environmental protection specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Works Cited Blackburn, Wilson. The Sustainability Handbook. London: Earthscan, 2007. Print.
Sun, William. How to Govern Corporations So They Serve the Public Good: A Theory of Corporate Governance Emergence. New York: Edwin Mellen, 2010. Print.
Development of Cardiopulmonary Resuscitation Essay online essay help: online essay help
Introduction Cardio-pulmonary resuscitation, abbreviated as CPR, is a very vital life saving procedure practiced worldwide. It is arguably the best (most effective) way of sustaining the life of victims of cardiac arrest so that they can live long enough for treatment to arrive (Wik, Steen, and Bircher, 1994).
Such treatments are usually in the form of intravenous cardiac drugs or defibrillation (Brindley, Markland, and Kutsogiannis, 2002). This procedure began as early as the 18th century and several developments have occurred since then. Today, new methods have been developed to ensure more efficiency and effectiveness.
Early History of Resuscitation Ancient references to resuscitation
Freilich (1964) argued that the concept of resuscitation is not as modern as some may think. He argues that mouth-to-mouth resuscitation started during the biblical times. He claims that one of such a case is recorded in the book of Kings (1 Kings 17:21) (p. 383). This may be seen where Elijah stretched himself on top of the victim while crying out to God.
From this exercise, the child was resuscitated. Another example in the bible where a similar practice as mouth-to-mouth resuscitation is used is whereby Elisha stretched himself on the child and put his mouth on his mouth (2 Kings 4:34).
The skin of the child started to get warm again and he sneezed and opened his eyes. This is very similar to the practices of the 18th century where the victims of drowning were kept warm and the mouth-to-mouth procedure conducted to resuscitate them.
In the book of Exodus, the midwife (Puah) was recorded to have resuscitated a newborn (Exodus 1:15-17). She revived the baby with her own breath (Avramidis, 2012, p. 21). This procedure is similar to what is now known as the external air ventilation (EAV) procedure.
The theory of Pneuma was present in 700 BC. This was whereby it was believed that the Pneuma could not be released when one was drowning. This was particularly because the airway had been blocked. Therefore, the victim had to be rescued in order to free it (Avramidis, 2012, p. 22).
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Other attempts and techniques of resuscitation were recorded around 200-500 AD and it was referred to as the human EAV. The heat resuscitation technique was introduced in 1000 AD. 530 years later, the bellows resuscitation was suggested. Vesalius method was introduced in 1555 AD.
The fumigation resuscitation method and mouth-to-mouth technique were also practiced in 1711 AD and 1744 AD respectively. Evidence of the use of defibrillation was present as early as 1775 AD.
Other methods employed during the period between 1700 and 2000 AD include the trotting horse resuscitation method, endotracheal intubation, Dalrymple resuscitation, Van Howard resuscitation, Emerson resuscitation, among other (Avramidis, 2012, pp. 24-28).
Development of resuscitation The 18th century
Among the earliest attempts of resuscitation were seen in the 18th century. Amsterdam was the first city to promote these attempts. This city is located in an area characterised with several canals. This makes the city’s residents vulnerable to drowning. During this time, however, death from cardiac disease was not common.
Due to the many deaths due to drowning in Amsterdam, several enlightened individuals decide to form the Society for Recovery of Drowned Persons (Freilich, 1964). This became the first organized society to respond to this issue.
This initiative was very successful since it managed to save several lives. Individuals had started following the recommendations made by the members of the society (Freilich, 1964).
One of the recommendations made by the members included the warming of the victims. They also recommended that the water swallowed or aspirated by the victim should be removed. This was to be achieved by placing the feet at a position higher than the head. Application of pressure to the abdomen was also to be done manually.
We will write a custom Essay on Development of Cardiopulmonary Resuscitation specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The mouth-to-mouth technique was also introduced during this period. This was done by respiring into the victim’s mouth or nostrils. This could be done after a handkerchief or cloth was placed over the area of respiration.
This was in order to make the operation less indelicate. The techniques described above are still in use today. Another recommendation made during this period included tickling the victim’s throat.
Tobacco smoke was also used to stimulate the victim. This was done through oral or rectal fumigation. Bloodletting was also used. Some of these techniques are no longer in use since they are not in line with modern science. Therefore, they have been replaced with modern techniques (Boyle et al., 2002).
The initiatives of this first society brought hope since it proved that resuscitation was possible. Soon, various other rescue societies were developed within the European countries. The popularity of these procedures was even seen in Germany. In this country, an ordinance was passed.
This led to the reading of notices in churches in order to provide information about the proper ways of attending to drowning or strangled victims.
A similar rescue society was initiated in London and it was referred to as the Royal Humane Society. These societies have greatly shaped the current practices in health care, which includes the founding of emergency medical services (Cary, 1918).
The 20th century
During this period, more developments were noted in Japan. In the early 1990s, Japan introduced such practices in books such as the Judo and the Jujutsu. They were referred to as Kutasu or Kappo. For many years, several more techniques were proposed by various individuals.
One of the techniques that were suggested was the back pressure-arm lift technique. This technique was successful in several occasions when it came to the saving of drowning victims. This was so because it helped to initiate respiration. The immediate danger faced by drowning victims is the inability to breath.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Development of Cardiopulmonary Resuscitation by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The victim might survive underwater for between five to ten minutes since the heart would still be beating. However, this technique was not applicable for victims of cardiac arrest. Circuldesation of the blood was required for such victims and yet the technique did nothing to facilitate circulation (Casner, Anderson, and Isaacs, 2005).
Most recent developments and rationale Some of the new developments in Cardio-pulmonary resuscitation include the active compression-depression resuscitation and abdominal compression (Milander et al., 1995). These are done in between chest compressions. The active compression-decompression resuscitation has been reported to improve circulation from the heart.
Chest compression has also been done using a pneumatic vest. The interposed abdominal counter-pulsation is another proposed but not fully implemented procedure. This procedure requires two or more individuals.
One of the individuals compresses the chest with the other compresses the victim’s abdomen. This procedure was proposed in order to improve pressure, which is required for improved circulation of blood.
The pneumatic vest is also a recent development in cardiopulmonary resuscitation. It covers the chest area of the victim and compresses it. It is meant to increase the pressure within the chest region as compression is done externally. This vest has been used to save many lives over the years.
Another recent development is the automated external defibrillator (ADE) (Kramer-Johansen, Myklebust, and Wik, 2006). The victims are attached to this machine. This is whereby their heart rhythm is checked. The machine has the ability to pass electric current (shock) in the victim’s body.
The two pads from the equipment are placed on different positions of the victim’s chest in order to shock him or her (Berg et al., 1994). This method is also effective for cardiac arrest victims. Some of these victims have heart rhythms referred to as ventricular fibrillation.
The only way to bring normalcy to such a heartbeat is through electrocution. Due to its efficiency and success in saving lives, it has become part of the CPR chain of survival (Grace and Chadbourn, 1969).
Possible future developments One of the future developments in cardiopulmonary resuscitation is the use of hypothermia. This technology dates back to Hippocrates (Cary, 1918). This procedure would make it possible for procedures to be done on a living heart after it has been stopped. This is also done on a blood free environment.
In the past, some scientists have been able to perform surgeries on patients without circulation for over an hour. Despite the efficiency of this procedure, it was stopped due to some of the limitations such as the possibility of infection of the heart. There was also limited and inconsistent research on the procedure.
Future developments should also find a way of improving neurological recovery after resuscitation. Several deaths have been associated with brain damage (neurologic injury) due to insufficient cerebral oxygen flow during the procedure (Baubin et al., 1999).
Conclusion Cardio-pulmonary resuscitation has been described as a lifesaver when it comes to victims of cardiac arrest (Perkins et al., 2004). This procedure was practiced (though in other forms) several centuries ago. Some of the practices, such as the mouth-to-mouth technique are still in use today.
However, some have been done away with as newer technologies arrive. The future of Cardio-pulmonary resuscitation is still big as greater innovations are yet to be introduced. With this, more lives will be saved as unnecessary deaths are avoided.
References Avramidis, S 2012, ‘Facts, legends and myths on the evolution of resuscitation’, International Aquatic History Symposium and Film Festival, pp. 21-31.
Baubin, M, Rabl, W, Pfieffer, K, Benzer, A
What Are Human Rights? Essay essay help online free
One of the most peculiar aspects of a post-industrial living is that, as of today, just about every socially prominent politician in the West considers itself an ‘expert on human rights’ and refers the concept of human rights, as such that represents an objective truth-value.
Partially, this can be explained by the fact that the classical definitions of human rights suggest the concept’s perceptual and implicational universality, which in turn implies that one’s endowment with a particular ‘human right’ should not be substantiated rationally, but rather ‘felt’ emotionally.
As Cranston (1973, p. 36) pointed out, “A human right by definition is a universal moral right… something of which no one may be deprived without a grave affront to justice, something which is owing to every human being simply because he is human”.
In fact, the belief that all humans are equally entitled to certain rights, within the society, served as a discursive foundation for the introduction of the 1948 Universal Declaration of Human Rights (UDHR) by the U.N., according to which, “All human beings are born free and equal in dignity and rights.
They are endowed with reason and conscience and should act towards one another in a spirit of brotherhood” (UDHR 1948, Article 1).
Nevertheless, even though that nowadays the concept of ‘human rights’ is being commonly discussed, as such that applies to all people, regardless of what happened to be the specifics of their ethno-cultural affiliation and their varying ability to act as the agents of progress, this is far from being the actual case.
After all, it is not only that throughout the course of history, the concept of human rights has been referred to, as such that applies to only certain groups of individuals, but that the objective socio-political realities create dialectical prerequisites for this concept to be used by Western countries to justify their continual geopolitical domination in the world.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More This is exactly the reason why, as of today, we usually get to hear of people’s ‘human rights’ being abused, within the context of how Western countries (particularly the U.S.) go about rationalizing their decisions to resort to a military intervention, as the mean of ‘defending democracy’ in the de facto sovereign states.
Therefore, there is nothing too surprising about the fact that, even though that the universality of people’s ‘human rights’ has been officially declared by the international community members, as far back as in 1948, there is very little uniformity to how this concept is being applied in practice.
The reason for this is apparent – whereas, there is indeed a good rationale in thinking that the idea of ‘human rights’ does appeal to people on an unconscious level, not all of these people can be regarded humans, in the societal sense of this word. Let us explore the validity of this statement at length.
When it comes to elaborating on what should be considered a discursively legitimate definition of ‘human rights’, it is important to understand that the concept in question cannot be referred to in terms of a ‘thing in itself’.
That is, at first people evolved to the point of being able to recognize their basic humanity, and only then they realized themselves being in a position to coin the term ‘human rights’.
What does make one human? It is the same that allowed the representatives of Homo Sapiens species to attain an undisputed dominance in their environmental niche, which now accounts for the whole planet Earth – their ability to operate with highly abstract subject matters (intellect).
Being endowed with intellect, people are able to act as the agents of civilization/progress, which in turn allows them to create societies and to ensure these societies’ effective functioning. Thus, in order for just about anyone to be considered eligible of taking a practical advantage of ‘human rights, he or she must be able to prove its humanness socially.
We will write a custom Essay on What Are Human Rights? specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More In its turn, this would require the concerned individual to attest his or her endowment with, “1. Capacity to reason; 2. capacity to act for normative reasons, including moral reasons; 3. capacity to act autonomously; 4. capacity to engage in complex social relationships” (Bernat 2008, p. 8).
In other words, it is specifically the individuals capable of pushing forward a socio-cultural progress, which may be considered human, in the full sense of this word.
Hence, the first discursive provision to how I think the concept of ‘human rights’ should be defined – the notion of a ‘right’ derives out of the notion of a ‘power’, rather out of the notion of a ‘morality/ethics’. This is why it is wrong to believe that one can simply be assigned with certain rights, without qualifying to possess these rights, in the first place.
Rights are not given but taken (Pagden 2003). This is the reason why it is methodologically fallacious to assume that animals or unborn human fetuses can have ‘rights’ – it is not only the above-mentioned may have no understanding, as to what the concept of a ‘right’ stands for, but they would never be able to defend any of their hypothetical ‘rights’, even in theory.
The second provision is that the notion of a ‘right’ must be discussed in conjunction with the notion of an intellectual advancement. After all, it is specifically people’s ability to indulge in abstract philosophizing, which allowed them to coin up the term ‘humanity’, in the first place.
This once again suggests that it is conceptually inappropriate advocating the universality of human rights, without taking into consideration the qualitative psychological characteristics of those individuals, to which the concept of ‘human rights’ supposedly applies.
The third provision is that, contrary to what nowadays is being commonly assumed, the earlier mentioned concept (in its contemporary sounding) did not come about because of the humanity’s ways having been turned thoroughly ethical/moral.
Rather, it emerged because the concept’s advocates, which overwhelmingly consist of Westerners (Whites), came to realize that, on order for them to be able to continue exploiting the world’s natural and human resources, they need to have a legally legitimate excuse to meddle in the internal affairs of non-Western countries.
Not sure if you can write a paper on What Are Human Rights? by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More In other words, the objective laws of history naturally predetermined the concept of ‘human rights’ to serve realist rather than constructivist purposes.
What has been said earlier allows us to formulate a discursively sound definition of human rights. Human rights are the legally enforced civil liberties, to which the members of most evolutionary advanced societies happened to be entitled by the very fact that, due to their socio-economic and technological advancement, they can enjoy the luxury of not having to participate in the tribal ‘war of everybody against everybody’, as the mean of ensuring their physical survival.
This definition, of course, implies that there is indeed a good reason in limiting the ‘universality’ of humans rights to encompass only those, which due to the genetically predetermined specifics of their ‘mental wiring’, are able to comprehend the concept, in general, and its discursive implications, in particular.
Qualifying people for the entitlement to human rights will not represent much of a challenge. Since one’s ability to function as the society’s productive member (and consequently, the extent of his or her ‘humanness’) reflects the concerned person’s rate of IQ, it will be logical to assume that it is only the individuals with the IQ rate higher than 70, to which the concept of ‘human rights’ applies.
Given the fact that, as sociologists are being well aware of, in some world’s countries the average rate of citizens’ IQ is measured to be as low as 50 (Lynn
Improving Service Quality Essay a level english language essay help: a level english language essay help
Introduction The quality of services that employees offer in a restaurant is as important as the meals served. According to Shaikh and Khan (2011, p. 343), the restaurant industry is continuously evolving and growing more complicated. They argued that a restaurant must include ‘service associated features to satisfy the complementary needs of its customers’ (343).
They further noted that satisfaction of customers is taking a new trend of being associated with quality of service. Customers are increasingly becoming conscious of their surrounding when in restaurants. According to Markovic, Raspor and Segaric (2010, p. 181), restaurants have continuously been pushed to offer excellent dining experiences to their customers.
These experiences constitute the tangibles as well as the intangibles. The intangibles are of a particular concern as their improvement requires considerable attention unlike the tangibles. It has been noted that the intangibles have a great effect on the financial viability of a restaurant on a long term basis.
Due to the stiff competition in the restaurant industry, offering of quality services therefore is not an option but a way of being competitive. In regard to the above briefing, this report examines the tools that can be used in improving the level of service quality of a nation-wide restaurant chain.
Two instruments are discussed and it is shown how they will be instrumental in improving the quality of service of the nation-wide restaurant chain.
Improving Quality of Service In order to improve the quality of services given, it is prudent that the reference points of various stakeholders involved are known. In the context of this report, the main stakeholders in reference to quality of service offered are the staff and the customers.
It will be mandatory to be aware of what the customers expect and then make the correct adjustment to fulfil their expectations otherwise improvements cannot be effectively made if the deficit areas are not known. The instrument which best does this is the DINESERV instrument.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More It has been noted that when customers are satisfied as per their expectations, they become frequent customers. Such satisfied customers also refer other customers, mostly friends and family members, to the business (Wu
Market research: tablets Research Paper college essay help online: college essay help online
Introduction Definition of terms
This is the process of making known the values of a service or product to its potential customers through the different platforms available. Marketing is supposed to meet the wants and needs of customers through coming up with long term business interaction and exchange processes.
This practice may be viewed as an organizational obligation and a set of procedures of creating and communicating the specific values of a product or service to its designated consumer. It also incorporates the maintenance of a standing consumer-producer relationship in a manner that profits both the organization and its respective shareholders.
This process involves the use of quite a number of channels including the media, (news papers, electronic magazines, electronic media like televisions and radios and articles), internet, brochures, mailings and phone calls amongst many others.
The management of a company has the obligation to communicate the existence of the product or service produced therein to prospective clients. Effective marketing of goods and services involves the use of channels that has the capacity to reach the most number of targeted clients.
In addition to that, the cost-effectiveness of the channels is also a factor to consider while choosing the mode of communication. The internet is thought to be the most cost effective mode of marketing. This is because it requires limited resources to reach a considerable number of prospective clients as compared to the rest of the channels.
The social media come in handy here. Marketing may also be defined as a science that involves selecting target markets by use of critical analysis of the markets, understanding consumer trends as well as using market segmentation.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Demand and supply
These are terms use in microeconomics to refer to an economic model of the determination of products’ and services’ prices in a particular market.
They are based on the principle that the price of a good or service in a competitive market will not be constant until it reaches a point where the amount of the goods or services demanded by customers is equal to the amount of the goods or services provided by producers or suppliers (at current price).
This always results to some sort of economic equilibrium where the prices of goods tally with their quantity in a specific market. There are four laws that govern supply and demand. They include:-
When demand is increased and supply left at a constant, a shortage comes about hence a relatively high equilibrium price.
When demand is decreased and supply left at a constant, a surplus comes about hence a relatively low equilibrium price.
When demand is left at a constant and supply increased, a surplus comes about hence a relatively low equilibrium price.
When demand is left at a constant and supply decreased, a shortage comes about hence a relatively high equilibrium price.
A tablet computer, also referred to as a tablet, is a device in the form of a mobile computer that has a touch-screen and is primarily controlled by use of the fingers, although sometimes supplemented by other physical buttons located on its peripherals.
This device is found in the current markets in different sizes, shapes, color, functionality and prices. Its functionality is always similar to personal digital assistants or the so called smart phones. Despite the fact that tablets are self-contained with their touch screens, they can be connected to other physical keyboards or input devices.
We will write a custom Research Paper on Market research: tablets specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Additionally, these devices can also offer foldable booklet formats capable of giving their users double touch-screens. This complexity makes them ideal for use as notebooks since they display a virtual keyboard on the display.
Even though the tablets were conceptualized in 20th century and first manufactured in its last two decades, they have only been affordable and practical during the 21st century.
Background information This research project will be based on the tablet market in Switzerland and Austria. The three tablet products selected for the purposes of this study are Apple’s iPad tablet, Microsoft’s Surface tablet and Samsung’s Galaxy tablet.
The Galaxy Tab and iPad have always dominated the tablet markets while Microsoft’s Surface tablet is only a few months old in the market though promising too. The three products have comparatively fitted in the markets with all of them registering high volumes of sales in the two markets mentioned above.
This is an indication that the products have had a warm reception in the markets by their consumers. However, the convenience they offer individually to their users and other varying factors in the markets makes the sales of the products slightly different.
This paper is meant to give a comprehensive analysis of the performance of the three suppliers in both the Swiss and Austrian markets. Factors like total sales and market sizes in terms of currency and volume of sales will play an integral part in coming up with the facts and figures for this study.
The characteristics of supply and demand for the three products in these markets are also part of the important factors that will be accorded special attention during the study.
Other important factors noted are the evolution of prices and recent trends. All these are included in the paper in a bid to come up with an all-inclusive research paper that leaves no loopholes unattended to.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Market research: tablets by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More In order to visualize the market trends of these products, the paper will evaluate the characteristics of all the products and their specific advantages and disadvantages. Additionally, the paper will give a comprehensive evaluation of the distributions channels of these products like the wholesalers, retailers, online sites and other relevant channels.
The market demographics will also not be left behind in this study. All these are done in a bid to com e up with a clear outline of the possible future marketing opportunities. Besides, the findings of this research may also be very useful in the determination of possible future changes in the brands of the products and perhaps their modes of advertisements.
Some of the approach methods that will be taken into close consideration while conducting this research are the geographical disparities between the two markets, technical disparities between the three major suppliers of the tablets and the importance of having an economically manageable research solution.
It is important to note that the study will be based on secondary research materials like the internet, data from published internet reports, newspapers, business magazines, books and government statistics amongst others.
Another important source of information on the tablet market will be the user-generated content. This will be considered for the purposes of this study due to the fact that the table market highly depends on user opinions and recommendations.
Research findings Characteristics of the products
Characteristics of Apple’s iPad tablet
All the three products have more or less the same characteristics but the paper will focus more on the distinct features. The Apple’s iPad tablet, for instance, has the SmartNote application that allows its users to quickly key in and arranger their daily data according to their own preferences.
This tablet also has a free Twitterrific application that enables its users to track, directly respond to and most importantly implement Twitter feature in their tablet.
It is also important to mention the WifiTrak application of the device. This application is important in helping users find and open public or private Wi-Fi hotspots in the vicinity. All these are just but a few characteristics.
Advantages and disadvantages of the iPad tablet
The most outstanding advantage of buying the iPad is the presence of its 1GHz Dual score. This allows its users to download applications more efficiently and fast without the need to change batteries which, as a matter of fact, continue to maintain their charge for over ten hours.
The light weight of the device compared to other similar devices in the markets is also a comparable advantage. It is also important to mention the advanced graphics of the device as well as its wide screen that brings about a good feeling while surfing the internet of watching a movie (Jacoby, 3).
On the other hand, the iPad has disadvantages as well. For instance, the device does not support the Adobe Flash Player which is very necessary for watching video clips from You Tube and other sites.
This is perhaps because of the unpleasant organizational relationship between the Apple Company and Adobe. In addition to that, Apple’s iPad is relatively expensive as compared to other tablets. For this reason, it is affordable to only a few people hence its unpopularity.
Characteristics of Microsoft’s Surface tablet
The Microsoft’s Surface is famous for its built-in kickstand. The kickstand gives a totally different experience while watching movies on the tablet or perusing through the photos. This is because the user can simply prop up the tablet by use of the kickstand.
In addition to the kickstand application, Surface tablet has enough space to cater for the varied needs of its users. It gives a variety of storage options from 32GB to an overwhelming 128GB.
Advantages and disadvantages of the Surface tablet
The Microsoft’s Surface tablet is famous for its premium feel and stylish look. It impressed quite a number of people and this alone makes it sell. The incorporation of the kickstand application into the system of this device gives it an upper hand in the markets.
Additionally, the fact that it is the most convenient tablet for Windows 8 operating system makes it more acceptable in the current markets. This is perhaps because of the fact that Windows 8 is the most recent and user-friendly operating system today.
Just like every other tablet, the Surface tablet had disadvantages too. For instance, the device is thought to have a poor selection of applications. Its display has also been viewed as very standard and offers no complexity or sophistication.
This gives it a rather sluggish graphical presentation; something that has never been appealing to teenage customers. The fact that the cameras of this device lack flashes is also limiting the number of sales of the product to the elderly and not teenagers. Its relatively heavier weight as compared to the iPad is also a setback.
Characteristics of Samsung’s Galaxy tablet
One of the most outstanding features for the Samsung’s Galaxy tablet is its ability to support an external storage of up to 64GB. This fits in the range of needs of most users. Besides, the Samsung Galaxy S2 has 1GB RAM, dual core of 1.2GHz and 8MP camera.
Another amazing application incorporated in this tablet is the new Skype application on Google android that enables users to link their gadgets through video clip calls.
Advantages and disadvantages of the Galaxy tablet
Unlike the iPad, the Samsung Galaxy tablet does not feel flimsy despite the use of plastic on its body casing. This tablet has a screen that includes a 800 x 1280 resolution hence giving the user an amazing experience when surfing the internet or even when watching movies.
The device is also incorporated with rear and front facing cameras with rear flash to take photos even in the dark. That notwithstanding, the device has an ambient light sensor, compass, gyroscope and an accelerometer.
Despite the numerous advantages of the Galaxy tablet, it has its disadvantages too. It has been proven that the Wi-Fi specifications of this product had improved but recent sources say that it has worsened lately. It now has poor detections of Wi-Fi hotspots and sometimes limited access to networks in its range.
Additionally, the device is thought to support the famous Adobe Flash player but this is not the case as expected. As many thought, the software should have come preinstalled in the system of the device.
Nonetheless, users have to install the software for themselves and surprisingly the device does not even have a desktop shortcut that links Adobe Flash player to the Android Marketplace.
Facts and figures
This is the section that will provide a comprehensive analysis of the performance of the three products (Galaxy, iPad and Surface tablets) in the two different markets (Swiss and Austrian).
It is worth noting that the research conducted and facts tabled were purely based on relative approximations at that particular moment (Jacoby, 3). This confirmation gives room for flexibility and consequently changes in the facts and figures as per this moment.
Demographics for sales of Apple’s iPad in the Swiss market
IPad tablet sales
187,367 iPad tablets sold in the last 90 days
The distribution of iPad owners in terms of gender in the Swiss market
The distribution of iPad owners in terms of age in the Swiss market
55 : 13%
45-54 : 17%
35-44 : 28%
30-34 : 15%
21-29 : 19%
Under 20 : 8%
The distribution of iPad owners in terms of income and psychographics in the Swiss market (Douez n. pag.)
The iPad owners in the Swiss market may be correctly described as assertive and extroverts. They may also be referred to as a sophisticated group considering the sales as reflected in the demographics. A key characteristic of iPad owners in this market was the income. From the statistical data of iPad owners by age, it was right to say that the age bracket that most likely registered the highest rate of employment owned the most number of iPad tablets in the market. This was the age between 35 and 44 which owned 28% of the total iPad tablets sold in the market during the time of the study.
Demographics for sales of Microsoft’s Surface in the Swiss market
Microsoft’s Surface tablet sales
199,473 Microsoft’s Surface tablets sold in the last 90 days
The distribution of Microsoft’s Surface owners in terms of gender in the Swiss market
The distribution of Microsoft’s Surface owners in terms of age in the Swiss market
55 : 15%
45-54 : 16%
30-34 : 14%
21-29 : 20%
Under 20 : 10%
The distribution of Microsoft’s Surface owners in terms of income and psychographics in the Swiss market
The same applied to the Surface owners in the Swiss market. The age bracket that owned the most number of Surface tablets in the market was 35-44.
This implied that the group of people that most likely had more money purchased more Surface tablets as compared to the others. Surface tablet owners in this market may also be described as extroverts (Wichert, and Birgid, 183).
Demographics for sales of Samsung’s Galaxy in the Swiss market
Samsung’s Galaxy tablet sales
210,374 Samsung’s Galaxy tablets sold in the last 90 days
The distribution of Samsung’s Galaxy owners in terms of gender in the Swiss market
The distribution of Samsung’s Galaxy owners in terms of age in the Swiss market
55 : 14%
45-54 : 18%
35-44 : 27%
30-34 : 12%
21-29 : 20%
Under 20 : 9%
The distribution of Samsung’s Galaxy owners in terms of income and psychographics in the Swiss market
The Samsung’s Galaxy owners in the Swiss market may be correctly described as assertive and extroverts too. They may also be referred to as a sophisticated group (just like iPad and Surface owners) considering the sales as reflected in the demographics. A key characteristic of Samsung’s Galaxy owners in this market was the income.
Form the statistical data of Samsung’s Galaxy owners by age, it was right to say that the age bracket where most likely registered the highest rate of employment owned the most number of Samsung’s Galaxy tablets in the market.
This was the age between 35 and 44 which owned 27% of the total Samsung’s Galaxy tablets sold in the market during the time of the study.
Demographics for sales of Apple’s iPad in the Austrian market
IPad tablet sales
192,574 iPad tablets sold in the last 90 days
The distribution of iPad owners in terms of gender in the Austrian market
The distribution of iPad owners in terms of age in the Austrian market
55 : 16%
45-54 : 17%
35-44 : 29%
30-34 : 16%
21-29 : 17%
Under 20 : 5%
The distribution of iPad owners in terms of income and psychographics in the Austrian market
The trend is almost the same as already explained in the previous statistics. The population or age bracket that earned the most made the highest number of purchases of the Apple’s iPad tablets in this market. This was so because they seemed to have more money as compared to those under the age of twenty whose purchase for this item was as low as 5% of the total sales during that period.
Demographics for sales of Microsoft’s Surface in the Austrian market
Microsoft’s Surface tablet sales
209,374 Microsoft’s Surface tablets sold in the last 90 days
The distribution of Microsoft’s Surface owners in terms of gender in the Austrian market
The distribution of Microsoft’s Surface owners in terms of age in the Austrian market (Werner, Werner
Technology – Security Policy, Ethics, and the Legal Environment Essay a level english language essay help
Table of Contents Abstract
Analysis of Section 18
Analysis of Section 14
Analysis of Section 6 and 7
Analysis of Section 8 and 9
Analysis of Sections 15, 10, 12 and 3
Abstract The cyber security Act of 2009 (S. 773) contains various strategies that are aimed at enhancing cyber security. However, the bill contains several contentious provisions that give the president and the secretary of commerce excessive power on matters to do with important Information Systems owned by the private sector.
These powers threaten to undermine civil liberties and possibilities of innovation (Gregory, 2009, p. 2).
In this bill, the policies relating to government systems differ from those relating to private systems in that they are more prescriptive in addressing government systems but fail to draw clear distinctions between elements of free speech and silence in private communication infrastructure.
Image of Cyber security (Spinello, 2010)
Introduction The Cyber security Act of 2009, known formally as Senate Bill 773, is best known for its radical recommendation to give the president authority to shut down parts of the Internet under cyber attack.
The Rockefeller-Snow legislation (S. 773) came at a time when cyber security threats were on the rise and needed proper strategies to counteract these threats (Spinello, 2010). However, up to date the government has not adequately addressed these threats and has failed to secure vital resources and infrastructure (Asbell, Bryer, and Lebson, 2011).
Analysis of Section 18 Sections 18(2) and 18(6) form the most contentious provisions in the bill. They give power to the president to limit or shut down internet traffic to government systems and vital information systems as well as networks owned by the private sector in case of an emergency. Section 18(2) further gives power to the president to determine what constitutes an emergency and does not specify time limits for a shut down (Kumar, 2009, p. 49).
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In section 18(6), the president has further powers to order a shut down on any vital information system belonging to the federal government even without an emergency, But by using the term national security (Singh, 2010). This has solicited mixed reactions as to how the president could abuse the term ‘National security’ to achieve political and economic interests.
Many people argue that, excessive power of the president over privately owned systems could result to negative consequences that would affect the economy and various critical infrastructures. Shutting down internet traffic, could result in loss of billions of dollars that could otherwise contribute positively to the economy (Kruger, 2010, p. 5).
Analysis of Section 14 Many people agree that sharing information could contribute immensely in adopting cyber security strategies. However, the S. 773 undermines the role of the U.S. CERT, which has a responsibility of ensuring information sharing. It also ignores the ISACSs that represent public private partnerships (Baase, 2008, p.13).
Section 14 of this bill mandates the department of commerce to ensure the sharing of vulnerability information with the private sector. This section threatens to undermine privacy laws and laws that protect trade secrets. The Bill also does not place a limit as to how much information can be accessible to the department of commerce (Baase, 2008, p.13).
Analysis of Section 6 and 7 This section gives the National Institute of Standards the mandate to specify a standard software configuration for all the public and private agencies. This body also controls the standard configuration for security settings on operating systems and software utilities.
It requires all software built by or for private agencies to comply with the standards set by it. This body also ensures compliance by software developers, vendors, and distributors (Kizza, 2010, p. 10).
The establishment of standards for software systems in both government and private agencies would increase vulnerability of these systems since vulnerability in the standardized system will end up affecting many entities and the numerous steps of testing software for compliance could slow the distribution of software designed to ensure cyber security (Kizza, 2010, p.10).
We will write a custom Essay on Technology – Security Policy, Ethics, and the Legal Environment specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Section 7.a of the bill is short on details about the licensing requirement for the public sector, other than to say it would be administered by the Secretary of Commerce. It also isn’t clear on whether it would be mandatory for cyber security professionals other than those working for the federal government.
Analysis of Section 8 and 9 These sections encourage the Internet Corporation for Assigned Names (ICANN) to promote cyber security. The ICANN manages the internet’s Domain Name System (DNS). It enables communication across the internet and ensures efficient navigation of networks (Palmer, 2010, p. 230).
ICANN plays an important role and ought to remain autonomous without any interference from the government. The S. 773 seems to send a wrong message to other governments with less respect for civil liberties.
The ICANN operates on a global platform and if the U.S interferes with its operation, then other foreign governments would definitely accuse the congress for pursuing its own self-interest. Sections 8 and 9 of this bill would contribute to international control of the ICANN.
Section 8 supports the review of the ICANN by the cyber security panel developed in the bill. These issues would raise conflict of interests’ issues among different global governments (Palmer, 2010, p.230).
Analysis of Sections 15, 10, 12 and 3 These sections promote a market-based approach to cyber security over government. Section 15 recommends a study within a period of one year for the feasibility of developing a market for cyber security risk management (Koch, 2005, p. 272). This approach would lead to increased levels of security in various industries without imposing government interference that that threaten security and liberty.
Section 10 proposes an authorization of cyber security awareness campaigns to educate the public. While section 12, authorize cyber scholarships that aim at training IT experts and security managers. This would contribute to enormous benefits to both the government and private stakeholders by ensuring a cyber security strategy that serves the interests of all.
Reference List Asbell, M. D., Bryer, L. G., and Lebson, S.J. (2011). Intellectual property strategies for 21st century corporations. Hoboken, NJ: John Wiley
Richelson’s The Wizards of Langley: Inside the CIA’s Directorate of Science and Technology. Book Review Essay essay help free: essay help free
Richelson offers an authentic account of the development and evolution of directorate of science and technology at the Central Intelligence Agency (CIA). CIA started its work in reports’ department before becoming an agency of scientific intelligence.
The agency adopted science and technology as part of clandestine surveillance in its events in 1968. Some of the most noteworthy facilities acquired by the agency included the Corona photographic reconnaissance satellite and U-2 airplane (Richelson 54).
These programs faced much criticism at first. However, the intelligence technology through use of satellites finally caught the hearts of officials in 1960 and later in 1980’s, after they realized that the programs did not leave any room for susceptibility.
Some of these officials of CIA were Allen Dulles who was the director and Eisenhower, the President. These two officials turned into firm supporters of the programs after they learnt that no gap for planned bombing prevailed as the U-2 missions revealed.
The deals of the agency went on well until it ruined Bay Pigs in 1961. This annoyed the then U.S. president John Kennedy and what followed was the firing of Bissell who was a leader in the team that directed the attack. Bissel had also played a key role in developing satellite and aerial survey mediums to keep an eye on the Soviet tactical challenge.
Following the Cuban fiasco, Wheelon became the directorate of the intelligence programs. Land and Killian nominated him when they realized that Kennedy wanted to stay far from the CIA.
Their argument was that the programs were too intricate for military managers and that it was necessary to merge science and technology in a fresh CIA directorate. Following appointment, Wheelon aided construction of a first class scientific laboratory, which executed advanced research in intelligence, medicine and military.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The agency’s scientists also came up with systems for measuring the level of activity in Soviet atomic spots as well as a method of identifying breast tumor. Other systems developed by CIA scientists included retrieval machines as well as systems for translating languages.
These scientists also created systems for identifying ghost aircrafts as well as human faces. Production of apparatus that could detect people’s faces was an excellent defense strategy in fighting terrorism.
Later, CIA experts steered the killings of Fidel Castro and Lumumba. CIA technicians made pills with poison as well as strange murder arms, which they used to assassinate the two heroes. The agency handed the pills to mafia who plotted the killing of Fidel.
CIA continued with producing drugs at science and technology directorate until when the media uncovered this deal. Later, an army man who was responsible for drug production at the agency committed suicide.
Richelson gives an account of how the agency made use of science and technology for surveillance through tradecraft. The agency created apparatus that could mask voices and alter their bodily looks.
Another scheme involved wiring a listening device to a cat so that it could record transmitted information from different areas. However, this scheme failed after a vehicle hit it hard in Paris.
As explained by Richelson, successes of science and technology directorate were extraordinary, since their technical group was very efficient. Policy makers used information from surveillance to make regulations about disarmament. The directorate ensured that all arms sold to the Soviet Union underwent scrutiny by the CIA.
We will write a custom Essay on Richelson’s The Wizards of Langley: Inside the CIA’s Directorate of Science and Technology. Book Review specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The intelligence collected by CIA assisted in winning many fights. For instance, the agency offered satellite intelligence to President Nixon and he succeeded in signing an accord pertaining arms control against the wish of the military.
The agency also led to the signing of ABM treaty after persuading critics that the Soviet-surface-air missile apparatus was different from an anti-ballistic apparatus.
Richelson depicts the CIA as a super agency. However, anyone will wonder why the agency did not foresee the collapse of the Soviet Union. The politicization that occurred during the reign of Casey and Gates addresses this query. The leaders manipulated estimations of CIA on Soviet militia power to rationalize the huge spending in U.S. defense force.
For instance, the amount that Gates claimed to have spent on defense program differed from photography results. Thus, the CA failed to consider the information collected by photography and this shows that the CIA betrayed its role as an agent between policy and intelligence.
Another thing that Richelson fails to consider is the fall of science and technology at the CIA, after the directorates of intelligence failed to realize the value of scientific unearthing. During the reign of Casey and William Colby, critics attacked the directorate leading to its fall. Richelson, however, does not mention or consider this occurrence in his work.
Severe failure followed the decline of the agency’s science and technology directorates. For instance, both Chinese embassy and Sudan experienced bombing in 1998 and 1999, respectively.
The nuclear program in India also lacked supervision. In addition, CIA directorate explains that the agency was not able to endorse the test restriction treaty and this made Clinton‘s government to lose senate endorsement.
Presently, the CIA is unable to stay advanced in the field of communication intelligence due to control by military. Terrorists have advanced systems of communications, which they use to send swift messages and this undermines the intelligence when gathering information.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Richelson’s The Wizards of Langley: Inside the CIA’s Directorate of Science and Technology. Book Review by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More This shortcoming together with the incompetency of the intelligence communities when it comes to analyzing all collected data led to the failure of CA to predict the attacks staged against America in 2001.
The fact that the senate select committee on intelligence has ignored to weigh reasons that led to the fall of science and technology directorate is quite sad. The senate select committee supervises the CIA and therefore, it should have investigated the reason behind the fall as well as the effect of this fall on the scientific side of the intelligence society.
The cases of Land, Killian and Wheelon should act as reference point to the committee on how to apply science on intelligence. Besides, the committee should scrutinize the behavior of directors who made first research to end paving way for scientific application.
In conclusion, Richelson describes various achievements of the CIA. The agency is the root of most accomplishments of intelligence technology. Some of the most noteworthy facilities acquired by the agency include the Corona photographic reconnaissance satellite and U-2 airplane.
Use of technical systems like satellites and reconnaissance aircraft has assisted in watching over arms control and this has solved many disputes among nuclear powers. CIA has also led to many scientific advances especially in the medical field. Thus, we cannot ignore the contributions of CIA to modern intelligence technology.
Works Cited Richelson, Jeffrey. The Wizards of Langley: Inside the CIA’s Directorate of Science and Technology. Boulder, MD: West view Press, 2002. Print.
Inductivist Method of Science Essay essay help
Science provides a robust means through which human beings study the nature of their universe. It is every scientist’s goal to find a solution to a particular problem. There are many conventional methods of doing this.
One of these methods is induction. In the inductivist method of science, generalizations are formed after examining certain particulars. For instance, using inductivist science, one can conclude that lions are cannibals after examining enough lions.
Inductivist science has two main aspects. The first is the mode of reasoning employed when attaining theories. The other one is the mode of reasoning used in order to obtain predictions. When attaining theories, an experiment is performed and the results are observed.
These results are then used to formulate a theory that will revolve around determining what will happen in most or all examined cases. On the other hand, predictions are obtained after analyzing several possible outcomes. In induction science, predictions are mostly based on a specific theory and hypothetical results.
A theory refers to a general law that can help in obtaining predictions. Therefore, one can use a theory to come up with new possible situations. These “situations” are in this case the predictions.
The inductivist method of science has several inherent problems. Most of these problems revolve around the method’s concepts of prediction and theory. For instance, according to the inductivist method of science, observed statements precede theories and they are independent. This means that observations are based on senses.
This premise may not be true because not everything can be seen, felt, or experienced. For instance, when two people see the same object they do not necessarily interpret this observation the same way. This is because the brain generates a perception statement and not the eyes. This implies that there are inherent differences in perception that pose a challenge to inductivism.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More There are many critics of inductivism as a scientific method. Most of these critics tend to lean on the method’s shortcomings. One of those people who have voiced their criticism of induction is Hume. His main argument is that induction depends on the assumption that nature has a stable and regular character that remains the same.
According to Hume, this reasoning is flawed because the observed “character” can change. The events surrounding global warming are a good example of Hume’s argument. His general concern is that just because something is regular now, there is no guarantee it will remain so in the future.
Apart from critics, there are those who are fully behind induction as a viable scientific method. This group would reply to Hume’s criticism by claiming that induction is a rational scientific method. The proponents of induction consider induction as the only good and available method. This is because induction is regularly used in everyday life by individuals across the world.
Opponents of Hume’s criticism argue that inductive reasoning is rational. Therefore, this coincides with Hume’s argument that it is “rational to be rational”. A good way to describe rationality is that it is “the best obvious choice”. This makes induction the rational way of doing things.
Other than philosophical criticisms of the inductivist account, there are also some descriptive ones. The most common descriptive criticism of inductivism is that inductions are supposed to be made based on facts. However, when using only induction, it is impossible to get these facts.
The other criticism is that the results of an induction are subject to variations that are in tandem with changes in the process of knowledge attainment. Therefore, one cannot attach finite results to an ever-changing society or knowledge-system.
Although the inductivist methods are often faced by a lot of criticism, there are instances where they have been effectively applied. Several popular scientists have used this method when conducting their research. In addition, the method is still used today whenever research projects are being undertaken. An example of a scientist who incorporated induction into his work is Kepler.
We will write a custom Essay on Inductivist Method of Science specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More None of Kepler’s laws depended on the usual observations and calculations. Instead, Kepler used inductive methods to formulate scientific laws. This process involved attainment of theory by gathering evidence and making calculations. The great Isaac Newton also used induction to test his theories. All Newton did was to observe the actions of nature and then theorize.
Inductivism as a scientific method is faced by many challenges. However, there are very few instances where theories can be proven beyond a shadow of doubt. All theories are formulated on the premise that they are “probably true”. This means that the shortcomings of induction do not provide a basis for dismissing this theory.
The critics of induction are of the view that concerns like the Raven paradox are enough prove that induction is not a viable scientific method. They also argue that science has to be conducted in a conclusive and privileged manner.
Just like other philosophies, inductivism attracts both proponents and opponents. Nevertheless, this method continues to be used in several scenarios of day-to-day life. The debate concerning its suitability is also set to continue to elicit varied views from scholars.
Reintegration of Women Combat Veterans Expository Essay college essay help
Table of Contents Introduction
Analysis of the Interview
Introduction Women have never enjoyed their freedoms in society due to barriers put in place by men (Oaxaca 10). Feminist theorists consider ways in which physical differences between men and women are used to show that women should be allocated inferior and degrading activities such as motherhood and secretary.
Moreover, women are subjected to stereotypes, which portray them as weak. Women are often excluded from public activities and are relegated to the private domain of the home. In society, women are ascribed feminine qualities and identities through the process of socialization.
Women grow up knowing that their existence in society depends on the decisions made by men (Manning and Robinson 74). Therefore, women live in a state of false consciousness. Feminists observe that the subjection of women to the power of men originated from the rise of private property, the family, and the state (Scott and Lyonette 28).
A number of scholars have come up with discussions giving various views as regards to the position of veteran women in the United States. In the American society, the process of reintegration of female combat veterans is very much different from that of men.
Much focus is given to the reintegration of men because it is believed that women would reintegrate automatically. This is against the rights of women because each gender should be given enough attention regarding reintegration program.
I (Valerie) intend to understand the reintegration process through gathering information from Marcia Buckley, one of the feminists working with Team Red, White, and Blue. Marcia Buckley’s views would be utilized in understanding the position of female advocates regarding female combat veterans in the American society.
Analysis of the Interview As I interviewed Marcia Buckley, she responded to twelve questions whereby I (Valerie) first asked her why she chose to work with one of the local organizations championing for the interests and welfare of women. Marcia Buckley observed that the organization, Team Red, White and Blue, has contributed a lot to the championing of women rights and freedoms.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Her friend, Mike Erwin, introduced the organization to her and her husband. Erwin had been deployed to Afghanistan variously, having served in several capacities. Erwin was an active soldier since he participated in various military activities, including Wounded Warrior Project whereby he participated by funding races.
Erwin saw that it would be productive to come up with an organization such as Team Red, White, and Blue to support combat veterans. The interviewee wanted to take part in helping soldiers in Afghanistan other than sending care packages. The second question delved into the role of Marcia Buckley in the organization and how she was paired with a veteran.
Marcia Buckley responded that she first filled an interview form, even though she had no military experience. In the third question, Marcia Buckley gave her perceptions towards the organization since she later noted that somebody of her caliber was what the organization was looking for.
Her perception was that veterans are individuals who have very many problems, including physical injuries. She even thought that veterans are amputees, with one or no limb.
Based on this, Marcia Buckley did not believe that she would be of any help to such individuals. At this moment, she thought that the role of reintegrating combat veterans was a male’s work because she suggested that her husband would have a bigger role as compared to her.
In the fourth question, I requested Marcia Buckley to state whether her perceptions changed the moment she joined Team Red, White, and Blue organization. Her answer was that things changed so much because she was even paired with me, a female combat veteran.
She was scared to learn that her partner was a veteran hence she raised some concerns and requested to be replaced since the distance between my home and her home was even larger. She was encouraged that she would get used to working with me, a female combat veteran, since I am an ordinary person just like other individuals in society.
We will write a custom Essay on Reintegration of Women Combat Veterans specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Marcia Buckley even learned that there are quite a good number of female combat veterans who might be in need of her services. In the fifth question, Marcia Buckley responded that she had so far came across only one female navy doctor who had never been deployed.
She was to serve a number of veterans who were all men since she had not yet come across a woman combat veteran who had been deployed in a foreign country to defend her country. My experience with her changed her perception since she always thought that all soldiers are men.
I was very different since I had been deployed in a number of countries and had managed to execute my duties successfully. In this regard, I needed some help since I was just like any other woman, who even had a child and I had to learn some of the ways that would help me to reintegrate into society.
Moreover, I needed help regarding the upbringing of my child. This proved to the Marcia Buckley that all human beings are just equal since I could not manage bringing up the teenager alone without the support of other societal institutions.
Marcia Buckley learned through experience that combat veterans struggle a lot in bringing up their children since they have no skills on how to nurture their families.
In the sixth question, Marcia Buckley admitted that veterans come home with invisible injuries meaning that those who lack physical injuries are not safe. She used some of the statistics from the Rand organization to claim that 26% of all veterans suffer from posttraumatic stress disorder, anxiety, and depression.
In fact, the percentage could be higher because the study was conducted four years ago. The most saddening thing is that over 400000 cases of anxiety, depression, and posttraumatic disorder are undiagnosed. In the seventh question, Marcia Buckley noted that organizations such as Team RWB play critical roles in mitigating problems facing combat veterans.
Marcia Buckley actually used the word reconnect to describe the role of these organizations because they reconnect veterans to civilian life. Marcia Buckley claimed that so many American soldiers were sent to Iraq and Afghanistan to restore peace and democracy. In some few years, they will be retiring meaning that the society should be ready to reintegrate them back to the civilian life.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Reintegration of Women Combat Veterans by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More However, Marcia Buckley lamented that Americans are not ready to undertake this crucial responsibility for people who defended them. She observed in the eighth question that her organization plays a critical role in reintegrating veteran combats, including women who have been neglected for years.
In fact, she observed that women suffer most, given the fact that they constitute a larger percentage in the modern military as compared to the previous years. Women combat veteran come home with many injuries as compared to men because of the way they are deployed.
The American government foes not give women combat veterans the care that can be equated to that given to men. Team RWB is more organized to respond to the problems affecting women as compared to large bureaucracies such as those in government.
Large veteran organizations do not believe that chemotherapies could help women get out of the problems facing them as result of injuries sustained in the war. Team RWB has conducted an extensive research to establish the real cure of stress and depression. Even though no cure has been invented, the use of exercise is always employed successfully.
The ninth question asks Marcia Buckley whether she was briefed of what to expect while executing her duties. It is obvious that she could come across injuries, behavior change, and restrictions. However, she was not briefed at all, neither was she trained on how to handle issues raised by veterans.
Marcia Buckley claimed that the role of Team RWB is to reintegrate veterans into the community hence no specific technique can be employed. In the tenth question, the veteran is tasked to give some of the worst stories she has ever heard from veterans.
Unfortunately, she did not have a worst story, even though she admitted that sometimes she is so helpless. In the eleventh question, the main question related to the time limit that a veteran is usually given to recover and reintegrate. The answer was that her organization does not set a time limit because veterans differ in their coping abilities.
The last question was challenging because she was asked to commend whether she would prefer a woman. She noted that two women would not combine perfectly to offer quality services. In this case, pairing a woman with a man would be more viable and productive.
Personal View The interviewee views oppression in society as inevitable in all male dominated societies. Since political and economic power is concentrated in the hands of men, women have little chances of excelling. Radical feminists observe that there is a substantial social differentiation between sexes (Wood 67).
Functionalist feminists agree that it is impossible to change gender roles in society without revising the social structure since the current social structure supports the activities of men in science. In this regard, the main aim of functionalist scholars is to revise the social structure in order to reflect the interests of women in sciences.
In fact, this is the main concern of the interviewee. The main concern of the radical feminists is to incorporate women into major societal activities (Williams 34). For functionalists, if change in the social structure were enhanced, social disorder would be inevitable, even in the way the society distributes services (Sullivan and Sullivan 14).
Therefore, gender equality in the field of reintegration should be approached cautiously. Conflict theorists on their part observe that no social structure is safe if it is maintained by oppressing a majority of its citizens in one area (Kristof and WuDunn 88).
For such feminists, women are to be provided with reintegration services without discrimination. In this case, women are to be allowed to come up with reintegration program. In society, women are not allowed to engage in social activities that are perceived to belong to men (Mussweiler 12).
Works Cited Kristof, Nicholas, and WuDunn, Sheryl. Half the sky: Turning Oppression into Opportunity for Women Worldwide. New York: Random House, 2009. Print.
Manning, Alan and Robinson, Helen. “Something in the Way She Moves: A Fresh Look at an Old Gap.” Oxford Economic Papers, 53.3 (2004): 169-188. Print.
Mussweiler, Timothy. Focus of Comparison as a Determinant of Assimilation versus Contrast in Social Comparison. Personality and Social Psychology Bulletin, 27.1 (2001): 38-47.
Oaxaca, Ronald. “Discrimination and the Decomposition of Wage Differentials.” Journal of Econometrics, 6.3 (2004): 5-24. Print.
Scott, Jacqueline, and Lyonette, Clare. Gender Inequalities in the 21st Century: New Barriers and Continuing Constraints. Cheltenham: Edward Elgar, 2010. Print.
Sullivan, Courtney, and Sullivan, Courtney. Click: When we knew we were feminist. New York: Seal Press, 2010. Print.
Williams, Jim. Unbending Gender: Why Family and Work Conflict and What to Do about It. New York: Oxford University Press, 2000. Print.
Wood, Robin. Sexual Politics and Narrative Film: Hollywood and Beyond. New York: Columbia University Press, 1998. Print.
Violent Media Causes Aggression in Children Essay best essay help: best essay help
The invention of televised media and video technology came with a number of challenges, especially because modern societies rely too heavily on the media for entertainment and communication. However, one of the most debated topics in this field is the possible impact of media on children and adolescents.
Since 1970s, several empirical studies have suggested that exposure to violent scenes in televised media has a high likelihood of instilling aggressive behaviour in children (Paik
Peru-Bolivia Confederation Essay essay help free
Table of Contents Introduction
Rise of Santa Cruz
Presidency of Santa Cruz
The Peru-Bolivian Confederation
Introduction Andrés de Santa Cruz was one of the key figures involved in the development of the Andean nation, though he is not acknowledged as one of the founding fathers. His contributions are noted by Perea, who makes an effort to show both the personal and national identity of Santa Cruz.
This paper examines the efforts of Santa Cruz in the realization of the Peru-Bolivia Confederation as put forward by Natalia Sobrevilla Perea in his book The Caudillo of the Andes: Andrés de Santa Cruz.
Rise of Santa Cruz Born in 1792 to a Spanish military officer and an elite mother, Santa Cruz became the only president born in Bolivia and whose work transcended the boundaries and influenced the development of the South American region.1 Santa Cruz made the decision to join the patriotic arms by entering the army of San Martin in 1821.
He served as the chief of staff where one of his duties was the provision of battle weapons for Pichincha (Ecuador). He was later promoted by Bolivar to general, and commissioned to lead an army to upper Peru. Santa Cruz triumphed in many battles including that of Zepita in 1823, which led to mariscalato.
Following this victory, he was referred to as Marshal Zepita. In 1824, he was a crucial part of the Battle of Junin in his capacity as Chief of Staff. He was later promoted to major general division, a rank of Grand Marshal of Peru.
This honor had not been reached by any other Bolivian. Santa Cruz was elected president of Peru in 1826, and he ruled till 1827, when he left the office and went to Chile as a Minister Plenipotentiary of Bolivia.2
Presidency of Santa Cruz In 1829, Santa Cruz was elected as the provisional president of Bolivia, where he served in that capacity for ten years, following his constitutional election in 1831 and subsequent re-election in 1835.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More During his presidency, Santa Cruz strengthened the army, created the universities of La Paz and Cochabamba, made Lamar port a free zone, and led the integration of Peru and Bolivia in one unit policy.
This integration, which was requested by President Orbegos of North Peru, was aimed at bringing order to the nation through a military campaign that involved a series of victorious battles in Yanacocha, Uchumayo and Socabaya.3
The Peru-Bolivian Confederation Following the triumph, Santa Cruz created the Peru-Bolivian Confederation in 1836, which served as the supreme protector. This move split Peru into two states: the North, which had its capital in Huaura, and the South, with its capital in Sichuan. Santa Cruz brought together a conference in each state: Huaura Peru in the north, in southern Peru and Bolivia in Tapacarí Sicuani (Cochabamba).
In June 1836 the three conferences adopted the confederate and granted Santa Cruz all the powers to carry out decisions. In 1936, a group of plenipotentiaries criticized the actions of Santa Cruz in the sense of having given greater dominance to the detriment of Bolivia-Peru than when he was President of Peru in 1826.4
Conclusion The confederation marked the most successful period in the republican history of Bolivia. In his second term of presidency, between 1834 and 1839, Santa Cruz placed homeland armies in the territories of Peru, Chile and Argentina.
Santa Cruz failed to return to presidency after he lost the battle of Yungay to the Chileans in 1839, after which he was delivered to Chile as a prisoner of war, and was later exiled. Santa Cruz died in 1865.5
Bibliography Perea, Natalia Sobrevilla. 2011. The Caudillo of the Andes: Andrés de Santa Cruz. New York: Cambridge University Press.
We will write a custom Essay on Peru-Bolivia Confederation specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Footnotes 1 Natalia Sobrevilla Perea. 2011. The Caudillo of the Andes: Andrés de Santa Cruz. New York: Cambridge University Press, 158.
2 Natalia Sobrevilla Perea, 160.
3 Natalia Sobrevilla Perea, 161
4 Natalia Sobrevilla Perea, 165.
5 Natalia Sobrevilla Perea, 173.
The Wizards of Langley: Inside the CIA’S Directorate of Science and Technology Book Review Essay argumentative essay help: argumentative essay help
Table of Contents Introduction
Changes that should have been made
Introduction Richelson (2002) in the book, ‘The Wizards of Langley: Inside the CIA’s Directorate of Science and Technology’ traces the Science and Technology Directorate from its inception in 1947 to post 9/11 period. The book contains an assessment of every aspect of the directorate activities including its responsibilities and the infighting arising from political wrangles and resource distribution.
Richelson places emphasis on the institution and development of the technological spy hardware, especially its advanced reconnaissance technology. The author mentions numerous innovations that have had a significant impact not just in the intelligence community, but also in the scientific community.
For instance he has mentioned the U2 spy planes used even by NASA in weather mapping and the lithium batteries used commonly in pacemakers and recognition of breast cancer.
The aim of this book review is to evaluate the author’s definitive evaluation of CIA Directorate of Science and Technology, referred to as DS
Disorders and Case Study scholarship essay help: scholarship essay help
The brain receives and responds to all stimuli of the body. Any alteration to the brain causes unusual stimuli receptions and responses. Because of that, the eating, personality, and sexual identity disorders are caused by the brain disturbances leading to abnormal communications between the brain and the respective body receptors. This paper will examine the details of the above mentioned disorders.
Sexual and Gender Identity Disorder (SGID) Sexual and Gender Identity Disorders (SGID) are disorders exhibited by individuals when they persistently and strongly desire to be the opposite sexes. SGID can be classified into two categories. 1. Children SGIDs. 2. Adult and adolescent SGIDs.
The Boys may claim that their reproductive organs are irritating. At times, they may not signify their male organs. In several occasions, they reject male toys. Such boys prefer female individuals to male colleagues (Sue, 2006).
Girls with such disorders prefer urinating while standing just as men do. They desire to possess male reproductive organs, and they dislike future growth and development of their breasts. Such girls prefer male clothing to female clothing.
In adults and adolescents, the victims desire to be handled as their opposite sexes, and they have classical emotions and responses to their cross-genders. On top of that, the victims are usually concerned with changing their sex organs (Sue, 2006).
The behavioral components can be attributed to individuals’ exposure to unusual sexual behaviors such watching pornography (Stone, 2011). Such behaviors can cause sexual abnormalities. For cognitive components, a person can be triggered sexually to an abnormal level, which would produce maladaptive processes to contain the detected abnormality.
Therefore, the unsuitable behaviors affect the maladaptive thoughts, which are needed to contain such behaviors. The concerned biological components include smoking, sicknesses, unbalanced diet, and old age (Stone, 2011).
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In this case, vulnerabilities in the endocrine system are the core causes of the SGIOs. In addition to that, unusual sexual behaviors are used as protective measures by the victims. This behavior is attributed to the poor parental care (Stone, 2011).
Eating disorders Eating disorders are mental sicknesses that cause severe alterations in an individual’s daily meal. It may begin as eating exceptionally small or seriously large quantities of food. This condition may begin slowly and develop into severe levels. It can cause serious injuries in growth, fertility, mental and social health, and death. Eating disorders impact the body shape and size (Mandal, 2013).
The cognitive components are concerned with overeating or starving (Stone, 2011). This is due to the perception that overeating may cause excessive weight. Some individuals with over-sized bodies may opt for starvation because they fear of gaining weight. Emotional components are incorporated in individuals whose responses and hopes are very high as initiated and supported by some people (Stone, 2011).
Such individuals set high targets and experience the impacts of failure (Stone, 2011). The behavioral components include extreme starving, training, vomiting, and use of laxatives. The neural connection, genetic materials, and hormonal imbalance form the biological elements of this disorder. Brain disturbance may lead to endocrine and hormonal imbalance, which would stimulate overeating or starvation (Stone, 2011).
Personality disorders Personality disorders are concerned with the convincing ways individuals think and act (Cherry, 2013). It can also mean the model of behavior that makes people different. Personality traits are made up of characteristic behaviors and thoughts. When this reasoning and characteristic behaviors become rigid and extreme, they form personality disorders.
Personality disorders are caused by the environmental and genetic impacts (Cherry, 2013). The personality components include disrupted brain make-up, minimized volume of white and grey matter, exposure of the prenatal matter, and unusual neurotransmitter (Stone, 2011).
The emotional components result from childhood abuse, which makes a person to depend on maladaptive protection methods. Therefore, child disapproval and mockery are the primary causes of this disorder. The cognitive elements indicate that childhood encounters create particular forms of thoughts, which result in this disorder.
We will write a custom Essay on Disorders and Case Study specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The behavioral elements show that personality disorders command unproductive beliefs to individuals. These beliefs are unachievable because the victim sets high targets than he, or she can manage. This abnormality is created in childhood by the thought methods and /or maladaptive behaviors. This disorder continues regardless whether or not the victim is maladaptive Stone, 2011).
The Classification of all these disorders is based on the DSM-IV codes for easy identification.
Joe’s Story-Eating disorder Biological components
Joe’s eating disorder originated from hormonal imbalance, genetic inheritance, and unusual neural connectivity. Since he suffered from anorexia, he must have had a low level of serotonin and unusual brain make-up. Joe might have experienced brain disturbances at birth, which triggered variations in endocrine and metabolic reactions to call for starvation (World –press, 2013).
The sickness hindered Joe from attaining his playing target. This triggered an anxiety and distress, which consequently triggered for an abnormal eating habit. Also, he was taking cover in eating after being abused by his friends in school (World –press, 2013).
Joe did extreme exercises to avoid weight gain.
Joe thought that overeating would make him more masculine and good-looking.
Conclusion Because of the diagnostic complexities, it is difficult to establish abnormalities. Despite that, biological and psychodynamic aspects are making it easy to define abnormalities by providing reliable evidences. The cause of sexual, personality, and eating disorders include child abuse, physical abnormalities, and genetic inheritance. These abnormalities cause a great deal of human inadequacies.
References Cherry, K. (2013). Overview of personality disorder. Web.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Disorders and Case Study by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Mandal, A. (2013). What is eating disorder? Web.
Stone, D. (2011). Psychological Musings. Web.
Sue, D. (2006). Understanding abnormal behavior. Web.
World -press. (2013). Case study: Joe’s story. Web.
Solar Energy in the UAE Research Paper custom essay help
Table of Contents Introduction
Uses of Solar Energy in Shams Power Company and Masdar Company
Advantages and Disadvantages
Introduction Solar energy refers to the radiant energy that is usually emitted by the sun. This type of energy can be harnessed through the help of a range of technologies such as solar thermal electricity, solar photovoltaic, solar heating, as well as solar architectures, among others (Delmon
Sula Vineyards Company Analysis Essay college admissions essay help: college admissions essay help
Company background Founded in 1998, the privately owned Sula Vineyards Company has penetrated the wine industry in India due to its unique value addition approach to the company’s grapes. The company has expanded over the years from the annual production capacity of 150,000 litres in 1999 to 1,600, 000 in 2007 (Lopez, Gilinsky and Shah, 2009).
Through securing good funding, the company has been in a position to develop series of wine. The company has partnered with several distributors to support its business activities. The wide market area for the Sula Vineyards may be attributed for its quick expansion and success.
Nature of external environment Threat to market entry
It is difficult for any aspiring wine manufacturing company to enter into the wine production industry in the Indian market and manage to break even easily.
In Indian and across the neighbouring countries, the Sula Vineyards’ business magnitude together with that of its main competitors are well established and would easily enjoy economies of scale to the disadvantage of a new entrant. The Sula Vineyards Company is well position to survive in the competitive market through gaining form economies of scale, competitive price tags, and strong customer base (Lopez, Gilinsky and Shah, 2009).
Threat of substitutes
The foreign and other local wine brands pose the greatest threat to Sula Vineyards’ existence and business performance. These brands have been in the wine industry for longer period and are well established than the Sula Vineyards which came into full operation in 1999.
The other foreign and local wine brands have the same products as the Sula Vineyards’. Besides, they are in a position to offer large discounts and sponsor expensive promotion campaigns unlike the relatively smaller Sula Vineyards. Therefore, the other foreign and local wine brands have the ability to offer an alternative perfect substitute to customers who may be unsatisfied with the wines offered by the Sula Vineyards Company.
Unsatisfied customers therefore have other alternatives from where they can get the wines. However, in order to remain relevant, the Sula Vineyards Company has established a unique market for its customer through tailored optometry wine products for the customers in the upper and lower economic ends of the Indian and neighbouring markets (Lopez, Gilinsky and Shah, 2009).
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Power of suppliers
The wine distributions and raw material providers in the Indian market have more power owing to the existence of many wine production companies. This leaves the distributors and suppliers with the power to dictate on proceedings in the wine industry such the fees charged for each delivery.
However, the Sula Vineyards has endeavoured to use its dynamic promotion and supply chain as a strategy for balancing the institutional forces (Lopez, Gilinsky and Shah, 2009).
Power of buyers
Reflectively, the amounts of output in terms of customer consumption of the wines depend on their purchasing power (Wright, 2007). Sula Vineyards’ performance in the Indian wine industry depends highly on the power of the private consumers and the corporate segments.
Fortunately, the Sula Vineyards Company is geared to further penetrate the market since it plans to introduce more products and better funding (Lopez, Gilinsky and Shah, 2009).
There are several wine production companies operating in the same industry with virtually all of them dealing in a variety of the wine product. For instance, the foreign brand such as Guinness provides the biggest competition to Sula Vineyards due to its big market share and expanded network standing.
In line with this, the Sula Vineyards Company will have to counter this rivalry by introducing more interesting products in its products line (Lopez, Gilinsky and Shah, 2009).
Company’s internal environment Strengths
The stable management team comprising of two directors and several employees are instrumental towards providing necessary support and production of the quality wine in the Indian market. The Sula Vineyards Company has a solid understanding of the Indian wine market because of its series of products and distribution platforms. For instance, the company has different wine products.
We will write a custom Essay on Sula Vineyards Company Analysis specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The Sauvignno Blanc, Chenin Blanc, Shiraz, Chilean Merlot, and Champagne Style Brut are some of its products that are created for the upper and lower economic ends market within and without India. The company has strong financial base which gives it a competitive advantage a head of its competitors.
The company has a strong presence in the wines production industry due to its wide network of distribution channels (Lopez, Gilinsky and Shah, 2009).
The Sula Vineyards Company has limited its market to the United India since its export strategies to China and Singapore among other countries has not been very beneficial to the company in terms of revenues. This has limited its scope of operations. Some of the products offered by the company are duplicated despite the brand names and signature.
This might cause confusion among the target clients. The company has not been in a position to monitor its growth or operation efficiency despite its long period in the Indian wine industry (Lopez, Gilinsky and Shah, 2009).
The business has an opportunity to expand since the wine production does not have limitations. The business also has the opportunity of developing more products and services for its global market and the Indian market since the demand for wine in India is higher than the annual quantity supplied by all the wine production companies.
For instance, the company may introduce a scotch or a ready to drink vodka brand. In addition, the company has the opportunity of introducing a lower alcohol content drink to target the women alcohol consumers market (Lopez, Gilinsky and Shah, 2009).
Since the business is a threat to its competitors, they might retaliate by providing the wine consuming market with similar wines at a lower price. This will hurt the revenues of the Sula Vineyards Company since it relies heavily on the revenues from the local market (Lopez, Gilinsky and Shah, 2009).
Besides, conglomerate diversification would be a threat to this company should the business decision environment conspire against its goals. For instance, changed preference for its wines is likely to affect the element of loyalty of the customers.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Sula Vineyards Company Analysis by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Strategic analysis of the Sula Vineyards Company Since most of the models of management at the Sula Vineyards Company propose a linear format in decision making, responding to the issues raised by the customers often take a longer time than is expected by the clients.
Thus, the company should change the linear approach to a more insightful customer support system. In order to be more competitive, the Sula Vineyards Company should introduce more products and offer free samples and discounts to its clients.
Within the wine production industry in the India, the business magnitude of the Sula Vineyards Company is wide and well organized into different stores and has a strong presence in most of the stores and regions across India. The company has an extensive partnership network and very many products that will support its sustainability goals (Birdsall and Johnston, 2010).
The company has stratified its target market into upper and lower economic end segments. The Sula Vineyards’ wine products are further classified into premium and ordinary in order to maximise the returns from customers from different social and economic backgrounds.
Despite the relatively crowded market, Sula Vineyards has designed and integrated reliable and efficient distribution platform to ensure that they remain the most reliable provider of wine products across the regions of Indian and its neighbouring countries.
The performance of the Sula Vineyards Company within the expansive wine production industry in India is highly dependent on the buyer-power in terms of their purchases of the wines. For instance, the numerous products and quality assurance strategies have ensured that the business is geared towards maximising its returns.
Through competitive pricing, strategic expansion, and planned diversification, the Sula Vineyards Company has managed to establish a strong market niche in India despite the rivalry. At present, the company has a very responsive customer support and well organised distribution channel for its products.
Sula Vineyards Company has a great opportunity for expansion since the market is inclined to its advantage. For instance, its innovative approach to addressing consumer quality price concerns and convenience via a well organized distribution network is an assurance for rapid expansion into new market niches.
Recommendations The Sula Vineyards Company has the opportunity of diversifying marketing beyond its current scope of operations because of its wide supply chain channel. Specifically the company has the potential of penetrating the foreign market segment such as China, Singapore and even Korea.
The company should entertain the idea of expanding its operations to all the countries in Asia since the wine production can be managed efficiently from a central point (Parente, 2006).
The company should change its approach to strategic insight in execution of strategic plans rather than the current linear approach. Besides, the company should partner with financial providers in order to secure sufficient funding that can support a five year expansion plan.
The company may also franchise its supply chain and human resource management in order to ensure efficiency in the use of factors of production and distribution channel (Roberts, 2005). Moreover, the company should introduce traditional marketing approach since the Indians are known to use products they can easily associate with their culture (Cheverton, 2004).
Sula Vineyards Company can host annual parties/events and invite target clients along with existing clients in order to enhance the company’s reputation. In terms of personal selling, Sula Vineyards Company can appoint trained sales executives to attend seminars and expos in order to approach target customers and generate business.
Wine has always been made in India. However, it has become a part of their culture and society ever since the wine glut was experienced by the Indian wine/viticulture industry. In modern day India and affluent society, there may be only two generations of significant wine drinkers.
This is largely due to the fact that the new culture of wine has only been a part of Indian diversity since westernisation (Parente, 2006). Thus, re-branding the Sula Vineyards Company’s wine products to suit the Indian drinking culture will give the company an upper hand in the Indian wine/viticulture industry.
References Birdsall, C.,
The Freedom of Speech in Social Media Essay essay help free
Table of Contents Introduction
The Main Body
Introduction The freedom of speech is one of the crucial features of the democratic society. The personal liberty cannot be achieved without the ability to express your thoughts freely. It also means the opportunity to participate in the discussions and debates. George Orwell said, “If liberty means anything at all, it means the right to tell people what they do not want to hear”.
The media is a powerful mean of social progress nowadays. It is said that social media’s worldwide audience gives individuals new rights, responsibilities, and risks. Joshua Rozenberg claimed, “A tweet is not an email, it’s a broadcast”. The aim of this essay is to present my own opinion on the expressions by Orwell and Rozenberg and to discuss the influence of media on the human rights, responsibilities, and risks.
The Main Body The social media represents the source and the mean of the information dissemination. It is difficult to imagine what the world would look like if we did not have the media. The dissemination of the true information is one of the pillars of the free society.
Nowadays, the breakthrough in this process has been achieved due to the development and implementation of the new media and information and communications technologies (ICTs) (IMS Conference on ICTs, 2008). I agree with the statement of George Orwell, who said that the liberty “means the right to tell people what they do not want to hear”.
It goes without saying that all people are different and, thus, their views on the changes occurring in the surrounding world differ. However, the social progress cannot be achieved without the conflict solving and decision making. The availability of the different opinions contributes to the arriving at the best solution. The freedom of speech implies the opportunity of the unhampered expression of the opposite views.
How can we say about the liberty and personal freedom if we are afraid of protesting and arguing? The truly democratic society is the one, which encourages the independent thinking and the expression of the opposite views.
Katharine Gelber in her article ‘Freedom of Speech and Australian Political Culture’ considers the opinions of the Australian politicians, representing both the Coalition and Opposition in the beginning of the 1990s. Gelber tries to say that the history of the freedom of speech in Australia consists of the periods of the increasing public debates on the issue of human rights and their protection.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In 1992, the wide discussions contributed to the recognition of the freedom of speech in Australia (Gelber, 2011). Although the representatives of the various political parties have different views on the concept of freedom of speech, all of them indicate to its importance for the society.
Gelber says that the majority of Australians believe that the freedom of speech exists in the Australian society (Gelber, 2011). Undoubtedly, it shows that people feel their liberty in saying what the others do not want to hear.
There is a famous expression by Joshua Rozenberg, “A tweet is not an email, it’s a broadcast”. I think that he means that if the conversation includes more than two persons, it is public and it disseminates the information rapidly. In the context of the human rights, it can be said that the ‘tweet’ or wide discussions are vital for the dissemination of the information and contribute to the freedom of speech.
I agree with the statement that the social media’s worldwide audience gives individuals new rights, responsibilities, and risks. In this respect, censorship remains one of the most significant hazards. However paradoxical it looks at the first glance, the United States of America represents the bright example of the country with the freedom of speech, on the one hand, and the cases of censorship, on the other hand.
Patrick Garry in his book An American Paradox: Censorship in a Nation of Free Speech analyses the reasons for the existence of censorship in the country proclaiming the freedom of speech as one of the highest values. Garry finds the roots for this problem in the rapid dynamism of the American society.
The author also states that “as multiculturalism replaces the older, more traditional social model of Americanized homogeneity, speech and censorship will increasingly form the ethnic and cultural battleground of this change” (Garry, 1993, p. 14).
Undoubtedly, the freedom of speech is one of the most discrepant social and political issues. People’s words depend on their minds and their emotions. However, they are not always the positive ones and sometimes people are driven by hate. The history of mankind already has a lot of examples when the speech provoked the violence. The Nazi Germany is one of such examples.
We will write a custom Essay on The Freedom of Speech in Social Media specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The emotional speech of Adolph Hitler inspired millions of people to commit the crime against humanity. That is why it should be emphasized that the freedom of speech assumes the responsibility. It is said that “our most successful approach to defending our human rights and human dignity is to begin with the principle: Choose Love, Not Hate” (Freedom of expression, no date).
Besides, it should be mentioned that the freedom of speech should not contradict the other human rights, including the intellectual property rights, the right to reputation, and others. The government intervention in the dissemination of the information should not go beyond the boundaries of the protection of the confidential information, reputation, public safety and order (Freedom of expression, no date).
The debates provoked by the promulgation of the secret information by WikiLeaks shook the public. Although there were different views on the activity of the website, it is obvious that it made the confidential information public, thus, violating the right to privacy and supporting the freedom of speech.
According to Little, “there is a difference between disclosure of information relating to private lives of individuals and that relating to governments” (2013, par. 6). The European authorities support the freedom of speech but indicate to the importance of licensing of broadcasting and the verification of the information disseminated by the media (Freedom of expression, 2007).
Connie Bennett and Rob Everett emphasize the importance of tolerance and understanding in the protection of the freedom of speech. At the same time, the authors state, “Free and open access to the universe of ideas not only enriches the lives of a country’s citizens; it protects them from the harm caused when ignorance and misinformation go unchallenged by facts” (Bennett and Everett, 2011, n.pag.).
The rapid development of the information technologies and the digital communication systems create the risks of inconsistent and false data dissemination as the role of the journalists and editors becomes vanished by the work of computers and Internet. At the same time, the modern technologies may help to overcome the bias in the information disseminated by the media.
There are a number of the social organizations aimed at protecting the freedom of speech and the activity of the journalists all over the world. In particular, Freedom House provides the support to the advocates of the human rights to defend the free media and the right to independent expression (Freedom of expression, no date).
Conclusion In order to sum up all above mentioned, it should be said that the freedom of speech is one of the main human rights. However, it remains one of the controversial social issues as well. The freedom of expression implies certain responsibilities including the respect to the privacy of other people as well as to the results of their intellectual activity.
Not sure if you can write a paper on The Freedom of Speech in Social Media by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The development of the information technologies changes the media and the communication systems. The new tendency creates both the opportunities for the facilitation of the freedom of speech and risks of the dissemination of the false information.
Annotated Bibliography Bennett, C. and Everett, R. (2011) ‘Freedom of speech requires understanding and tolerance’, The Register Guard.
The authors touch upon the problem of the freedom of speech and the government restrictions. In particular, they emphasize the importance of the free libraries providing the opportunity to become familiar with the different opinions presented in the books.
Garry, P. (1993) An American paradox: censorship in a nation of free speech. Westport, CT: Praeger.
The book uncovers the paradox of the American society: the co-existence of the freedom of speech flourished by the public and the censorship, which restricts it. The author gives his own arguments explaining this phenomenon. In particular, he indicates to the significant changes occurring in the American society.
Gelber, K. (2011) ‘Freedom of speech and Australian political Culture’, University of Queensland Law Journal, 30(1), pp. 135-144.
The article is devoted to the recognition of the freedom of speech in Australia. It also encompasses the results of the survey aimed at investigation of the opinion of the Australians on their constitutional rights including the freedom of expression. The author presents the definitions of the freedom of speech given by the Australian politicians.
Freedom of expression.
The webpage is devoted to the freedom of expression as one of the basic human rights and describes the activity of Freedom House in its protection. The major branches of the organization’s support are mentioned on the webpage. Besides, it emphasizes the role of journalists and media in the realization of the freedom of speech.
IMS Conference on ICTs and networked communications environments: opportunities and threats for press freedom and democratization (2008).
The information presented in the source is devoted to the role of the information and communication technologies in the spreading of the freedom of speech and the facilitation of the democratic process in the different countries. It represents the report on the results of the IMS Conference. The advances in the technology and their impact on the media are discussed in the source.
Little, C. (2013) ‘Democracy depends upon free media and an informed public’, Miami Herald, 16 September.
The author of the article touches upon the controversy around the freedom of speech. She presents her own opinion on the collision of the human rights, which frequently occurs in the society. She also touches upon the activity of the much-talked-of website WikiLeaks.
Reference List Bennett, C. and Everett, R. (2011) ‘Freedom of speech requires understanding and tolerance’, The Register Guard, 25 September. Available at: Questia.
Garry, P. (1993) An American paradox: censorship in a nation of free speech. Westport, CT: Praeger.
Gelber, K. (2011) ‘Freedom of speech and Australian political Culture’, University of Queensland Law Journal, 30(1), pp. 135-144.
Freedom of expression (no date). Web.
Freedom of expression: a right with responsibilities (2007). Web.
IMS Conference on ICTs and networked communications environments: opportunities and threats for press freedom and democratization (2008). Web.
Little, C. (2013) ‘Democracy depends upon free media and an informed public‘, Miami Herald. Web.
Monsanto Evil Company and Media Research Paper college essay help
Introduction Monsanto Corporation is an agricultural firm that dedicates itself to the biotech production of herbicide and GMO (Genetically Modified) products. The company produces readily dilapidated seeds and roundup herbicides with modified heredity. The company aspires to reveal seeds that endure the appliance of herbicides and resist insects by inserting inherited genes in order to alter traits.
However, the influence and power of Monsanto affects the United States and the world’s structural systems including agriculture, regulatory processes, political campaigns, as well as the industry that oversees all agricultural productions. For instance in the U.S only, a vast percentage of Monsanto genetically modified corns and soybeans seeds were sown in the fiscal 2009.
Actually, in the fiscal 2011 Monsanto remained the world’s prevalent seed corporation that applies biotechnology. It has more than 1500 patents in agricultural appliances, plants, and kernels besides leading in the agricultural patent-holding business (Irwin and Michael 5).
The outlook of agriculture has drastically changed ranging from the GMO foodstuffs consumed, herbicides, and pesticides to the other products accruing from Monsanto. In fact, Monsanto is dominant in marketplace yet several personalities disagree that the company is a life science purveyor.
Nonetheless, Monsanto supposedly craves to manufacture improved animal feeds along with high-quality food for human consumption. The firm struggles to develop a good reputation to the public given that it came about as a contentious and hazardous chemical outlet.
According to Fortunes magazine, Monsanto is the uppermost feared institution in the U.S since it urbanized to be a huge and influential life science and agricultural corporation from merely an undersized chemical outlet.
The firm creates its ambiguities owing to the close rapport it shares with the administration of the United States. In order to validate the company’s contemporary inventions, Monsanto finances public institutions in academic explorations (Vadi and Vissak 81).
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Several developing nations embrace the unrelenting Monsanto strategy that has gained excess power in the worldwide arena. Historically, a drug industry wholesaler (Francis John) in an elfin chemical outlet initiated Monsanto in the fiscal 1901. Monsanto became the Coca-Cola input supplier with its initial products that included Sugar substitute and saccharine.
These products spread out to aspirin, laxatives, and sedatives by the year 1920. The company more rapidly commenced the production of diverse products like herbicides, pesticides, fertilizers, industrialized chemicals, rubber merchandise, plastics, and synthetic fibers. This enabled the company to shift to agricultural market with the production of genetically modified seeds from chemical supplies.
This was after it amalgamated with a number of agricultural and seed corporations in the fiscal 1960 (Kishko 76). This paper generally discusses Monsanto as a corporation, the role of journalism in informing the public about its evil products and purpose as well as the shortcomings of the media in its reports concerning Monsanto.
The role of media in informing the public about Monsanto The entire world regards Monsanto Company as the utmost evil company of all times. In fact, there is need for the media to inform the public about the devilish nature of Monsanto. Journalists have refuted Monsanto due its obliteration of human race, continuous greed, dreadful technology as well as the production of harmful genetically modified products.
Media thus tries to make the public aware of what renders Monsanto as a bad company than those producing weapons, Pesticide Corporations, or pharmaceutical businesses. Moreover, the media fraternity aspires to inform the populace about the aspects that make Monsanto devilish given that it faces criticism from all over the world.
In questioning the desirable quality of a business, corporations must function keeping in mind the intellect of human decency that is elementary for righteous persons. It is anticipated that corporations should carry out their duties and act inside the precincts of dependable science, open business, and esteem human life (Finegold 267).
According to Natural News, any company should operate merely like a well-brought-up human in its day-to-day dealings. However, this wish has come to no avail as evident in Monsanto Corporation. Such a corporation always goes against the fundamental principles of virtue in their pursuit to generate income. In effect, the sustainable upcoming life of human beings is at danger due to the libel nature of corporations like Monsanto.
We will write a custom Research Paper on Monsanto Evil Company and Media specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The media has thrived to unearth everyday infringement of essential virtues that Monsanto Company practices. Through Monsanto malevolent tendencies unraveled by journalists, all individuals comprehend the reasons why the company is a threat to human life, loathsome, and evil (Irwin and Michael 6).
The media has gone an extra mile in unearthing the evil purpose and products (GMO) of Monsanto. These include Monsanto’s scientific trickery over scientific reality, environmental obliteration over its stewardship, and its artificial exploitation of nature instead of honoring it.
Further, journalists have informed the public concerning Monsanto’s control over technology rather than sharing wisdom, the company concealment over transparency, death over life, and its corporate gluttony over service to humankind (Kishko 76).
Scientific trickery of Monsanto over scientific reality The sellout science at Monsanto is more or less malevolent and frivolous. This kind of science appears as the uppermost misleading, junk and wicked science ever devised by any corporation. The genetically modified foods produced by this corporation may not be fit for consumption by humankind as revealed by media. Monsanto takes merely ninety days in testing the quality of GMO they produce for consumption.
The company rushes to conclusion rather than financing researchers to examine the genetically modified products in animals over a lengthy period. The media has brought to the public attention the milestone of cancer growth in rats that accelerated just after ninety days of investigation (Vadi and Vissak 82).
This feeding experiment cannot allow any person to trust Monsanto GMO foods albeit scientists stipulation that they are safer for use by humans.
All Monsanto monetary partners be it media factions, political groups, or researchers fall short of trustworthiness bedsides being compromised. It is true that a number of political affiliates, journalists, experts, and researchers have been paid by Monsanto Corporation to cover up its evil nature.
Nevertheless, the behavior of paying hush money to an assortment of these factions has never altered the naked reality about Monsanto as exposed by the media. Even if the corporation pays off researchers to swindle public imprudently, the media supposed that toxin in its products still remains intact (Irwin and Michael 7).
Not sure if you can write a paper on Monsanto Evil Company and Media by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Monsanto devastation of environs over stewardship The GMO herbicides produced by Monsanto obliterate the environment a great deal. The application of these roundup herbicides has reduced the extent of healthy crop production due to the altered methods of farming that destroys soils. Various farmers become enslaved and shift to the practice of chemical based agriculture once the roundup herbicides have devastated the top soil.
Monsanto chemical based farming yields inferior crop produced compared to organic farming. It is thus a catastrophe and detrimental to the environment as a whole. Thus, it is unworthy to encourage farmers to apply roundup chemicals to the million-farmland acres. Presently, several people believe in the media that Monsanto should cease to produce GMO since it destroys the world agricultural legacy through its conspiracy (Kishko 81).
Monsanto influences nature artificially instead of nobility The media has exposed that Monsanto willingly keeps on manipulating nature artificially than honoring it. The corporation takes precedence over genetic materials of vigor crops to engender insecticides by inserting toxic genes. This amounts to nature violation since Monsanto disowns the existing nature that is of great quality, genius, and attractive.
Monsanto builds up genetically mutilated kernels (terminator) rather than respecting their innate existence to generate diverse seedlings. The pitiable technology of terminator seeds does not allow natural seeds to produce many generations but rather terminates immediately after a solitary generation.
Many people embrace this kind of technology as a dreadful transgression not in favor of the entire world, human race, as well as the environment. Monsanto activities are a menace to the billions of human lives here in the universe. Fascinatingly, the behavior of Monsanto in the production of terminator seeds is comparable to the holocaust of Nazi (Vadi and Vissak 91).
Monsanto ascendancy of technology instead of sharing wisdom The media fraternity has managed to tell the public how Monsanto has dominated the technology rather than sharing the wisdom of that technology. In fact, the corporation enjoys supremacy over their GMO kernel and product by owning exclusive rights. Farmers feel punished owing to the unshared wisdom from the new fangled technology initiated by Monsanto.
The firm disguises via the use of its patents to litigate farmers who oppose the usage of genetically engineered products. The corporation goes deeper and implicates farmers for breaking into the company material goods. Given this paradigm, Monsanto’s ordinary business engagement is purely evil in nature.
The company endorses the spread of evil, disgusting, and extraordinary services that cause disorders such as colossal cancer tumor all over the world. It is not a twist of fate that black slimy cancer tumor spread with the consumption of genetically modified food. All these evil is encouraged by Monsanto and its affiliates globally ranging from subordinates to the top corporate administration (Kishko 82).
Monsanto privacy over transparency In California, Monsanto has thrived to thwart the 37th Proposition through pouring out millions to the legislatures. The bill requires that GMO foods should possess stickers. If Monsanto conquers this bill hitherto, the public will not be able to identify GMO foods. Hence, the media has exposed how Monsanto and its co-companies blindfold the people on the reality concerning the ingested food as well as GMO products.
Obviously, Monsanto has lured several companies to keep the little secret of dirty GMO by giving out lump sum money to try to trounce the significant Proposition 37. As the journalists clearly put it, Monsanto does not desire that the public distinguish what they devour founded on grounds that these GMO foods are ill intentioned (Finegold 268).
Monsanto death over life The revelation by media that Monsanto GMO products are the major cause of death is true. The genetically modified corn seeds infringe and compromise the daily existence. In all corn seeds produced by the company, poisonous chemicals are implanted within to modify them genetically.
The danger of such products was revealed in the gruesome cancer tumors present in vermin that were nourished with GE corns. Ironically, when genetically modified corns were fed to feminine mice, approximately seventy percent (70%) passed away in the hottest scientific research carried out (Finegold 267). This study directly links Monsanto’s GMO evil with cancer tumor that causes death.
The greed of Monsanto over service delivery to humankind Over a longer period, the media has asserted that Monsanto does not serve the needs of people rightfully. However, the corporation is busy designing prospects for capitalizing on proceed generation over time. After the destruction of soil via roundup herbicides, farmers are not able to revisit the organic methods of farming.
As a result, Monsanto treats growers as indentured servants who are enthralled into the reliance system and economy of Monsanto mock-ups of GE herbicides and seeds. Conversely, journalists have tried to bring to the attention of people the kind of change a corporation like Monsanto should acquire, the recommendations or revolution that can terminate such corporations, and the means of stopping evil (Vadi and Vissak 97).
The need for virtuous Corporation The media has realized that there were somewhat dreadfully trends with the U.S corporations like Monsanto. The media afterwards has alerted the public on the need to change the disparaging, extreme, and irresponsible behaviors demonstrated by these companies. Corporations lack humanity in their procedural outline of marketing, production, rationalization of logistics, and profit generation.
Monsanto with its GMO products does not recognize the reach of business, company conducts, what the corporation devastates and whom they hurt. Media groups have succeeded in relaying evil products and the purpose of Monsanto.
It has documented Monsanto’s conceivable and dreadful behavior against the survival of human. The group has researched on other companies related to Monsanto. These corporations broaden online disinformation and deceit by recruiting public relation agents in the web and social media (Kishko 87).
There is need for change as these corporations advertise poisonous drugs through factious syndrome invention and denying consumers patent rights to reasonably valued medicines. Corporations like Monsanto ought to change the convention of deceiving regulators, enticing physicians, and forging evidence frequently.
In the main, Monsanto relates to many other evil organizations that furtively experiment the contagion on inmates and use vaccines meant for kids on guinea pigs. Monsanto evil engagement in pharmaceuticals that later resulted into the production of GMO products should change drastically. Journalists have created awareness that Monsanto is just like a cancer tumor itself.
The company has trapped and killed almost all things including the lives of individuals all over the world through its GMO products. Fascism emerges once the corporations become extremely influential like in the case of the evil Monsanto (Finegold 271).
Revolution against Monsanto by the media According to Natural News and other media sources, changing the company structure would help in preventing further obliteration of the society by pharmaceutical, agricultural, or banking companies like Monsanto. This will force organizations to stop destroying humanity but rather to serve it with dignity. Therefore, media has played an important role in suggesting some of the required revolutions against this corporation.
Initially, the privileges of free speech by Monsanto should end. This aspect stops the corporation from marketing dangerous GMO products to both adults and infants. The restrictions on advertisement would ensure equal rights since the corporation neither possesses God given right nor peoples’ rights.
Bringing the propensity of revolving door to a standstill is very important (Kishko 77). The top government officials should never get re-employment opportunities in the very organizations they served earlier like Monsanto.
The Federal Reserve must change into a public sector or a bank in the States in order to end the misuse of funds. Thus, the Fed funds will not directly assist globalist banks but the public who will own it at large. The media recommends that hazardous corporations like Monsanto should be split as decided by the party that wins the insurrection.
The campaign contributions and corporate groups lobbying for politicians at Monsanto should cease. Furthermore, domination and monopoly of the corporation on medicines, genes, and kernels ought to end. The patents must belong to everybody who wishes to venture into such businesses. Lastly, the media emphasizes on striping off the commercial personhood fortification as a revolution against Monsanto (Finegold 268).
An end to evil support For an end to the evil Monsanto Corporation, consumer solution might provide the best end resolution to the predicament of malevolent GMO products. The awareness created by the media is enough to enable one to evade purchasing genetically modified products like snack, muesli, puffed rice, and the other products. The populace should also stop procuring all products related to the evil company.
These may include GMO products, aspartame, soda pop, cosmetics, and poisonous perfumes. The media information on Monsanto has helped in transforming the world to an optimistic way of living. Instead of acquiring GMO products, the media informs the public that it is more convenient and legitimate to buy macrobiotic products to help in moderating the evil company.
Media shortcomings Despite all the efforts put in by media in informing the public on the evil purposes and GMO products of Monsanto, it has other shortcomings. The media has not had good rapport with the grassroots level farmers who seem to have little knowledge and understanding of the available information. Customers’ futility has become a challenge to the creation of awareness, as most of them do not actually know all about GMO.
On the other hand, the media has failed to explain intensely the deep roots of GMO thus making it difficult for most people to make a decision on the legislation of GMO at Monsanto. In most cases, the media has not had the opportunity to curtail online deception by Monsanto Corporation.
Many websites and social network users are susceptible to deception by the company’s aspiration for fabricating good reputation with the public. Surely, what the media has done to inform the public about Monsanto outweighs what is has never done so far (Kishko 78).
Conclusions The entire world regards Monsanto Company as a supreme evil company all over the world. Through its disparaging and wide-ranging strategies, Monsanto Corporation terrorizes its way against consumer consumption, policies implemented by governments, research labs at universities, and farmers’ fields.
The stance in agriculture has drastically changed ranging from GMO foodstuff that people consume, herbicides used, pesticides applied to other products from Monsanto. The media has refuted Monsanto with the destruction of humankind, incessant greediness, awful technology, and the production of genetically modified products. The media has gone an extra mile in unearthing the evil purpose and products of Monsanto.
The governments around the globe especially the U.S administration should have power over Monsanto’s agri-business monopoly on the system of GMO food. As consumers thrive to avoid Monsanto GMO products, the entire world governing bodies ought to take appropriate steps to deal with this evil corporation.
Works Cited Finegold, David. BioIndustry Ethics, Waltham, Massachusetts: Academic Press, 2005. Print.
Irwin, Alan and M. Michael. Science, Social Theory
Concept of Merit Principle in Management Case Study college application essay help: college application essay help
Table of Contents The operation of merit system
New public administration
Merit principle refers to the act of hiring, promoting, retaining, or firing employees based on their abilities, performance, and capabilities. Most governmental and non-governmental organisations adhere to the merit principle in their employment-related decisions to ensure that they do not exhibit any form of discrimination. According to this principle, an individual’s competence and ability are the main determinants.
Depending on the type of work, merit is determined by the level of education, experience, knowledge, and skills of an applicant. The merit ideology has been the main tool used by human resource personnel in the public sector to ensure the public enjoys excellent services from a workforce that is disciplined and neutral. The merit principle operates under the structures of merit system.
In a merit system, the personnel management designs procedures and processes that make sure that the selection, retention, and promotion of in-service employees are based on merit and fitness. This is done to promote and improve the efficiency and economy of the workforce for the public good. In addition, an organisation needs to be served by not only productive, but also honest employees.
The merit system is a form of equality law that prohibits any form of favouritism and political influence. Furthermore, the rewarding and retention should be on the individual ability without regard to sex, race, age, race, colour, religion, or nationality.
The operation of merit system In any organisation, recruitment should be done openly to achieve a workforce that incorporates all segments of the society in a manner that is fair, transparent, and credible. This is an assurance that all receive equal opportunity.
The personnel management needs to ensure that the privacy and constitutional rights of the employees and applicants are not violated. The selection of workers for the advancement of their skills and knowledge should be determined solely by their relative abilities not by their affiliations. This not only encourages teamwork, but also acts as a motivational strategy.
The merit system recognises the provision of an equal pay for substantial pieces of work of equal value. However, this should be in line with the efficiency and effectiveness of each particular employee. The merit system principles require that the workforce is consistently monitored and other programmes improved so that their performances meet the required standards and plans.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Organisations that are adhered to the merit principle are continually assessed and improved. Therefore, the workforce should be utilised efficiently and effectively to enhance the growth and success of an organisation.
Human resource development is key to organisational development. Effective provision of education and training to workers enhances individual performance. Also, it has the spillover effects to the organisational performance.
Under the merit system, provision of education/training is a critical aspect of ensuring business success. To enhance public service delivery, employees need various training experiences especially when the techniques of work have been enhanced to meet the prevailing conditions.
One core value of a merit system is fairness. This implies that there should be better reward and recognition. The merit system requires that performance should be the benchmark of recognition rather than other non-merit issues. In addition, the fact that a merit system safeguards the opportunity does not imply that the accountability is compromised.
Employees are made to understand what is expected of them, and then given the opportunity to perform. Thereafter, there are periodic appraisals evaluating their performances. The merit system has several contexts in which it applies. Some of them are in formulation of official bilingual policies, employment equity, and in the practices of new public administration.
Official bilingualism This refers to the adoption of two languages as official ones to be used in all formal addresses and dealings in a state. For example, Canada has adopted both English and French as official languages to be used in all official undertakings.
In most federal institutions, it is usually a requirement that they comply with the official languages act which stipulates that every institution should create an enabling environment for work to allow bilingualism to thrive. Thus, the organisations need to provide the freedom to use either of the languages in observance of public interest.
We will write a custom Case Study on Concept of Merit Principle in Management specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The merit system principles emphasise this fact by stating that all employees and applicants need to be treated equally in all aspects of personnel administration with proper disregard to non-merit factors such as language.
Therefore, the merit system is an important method of ensuring the employees and applicants involved in the bilingual work environments are hired, appraised, and promoted on their abilities rather than language and in an open manner.
Employment equity Employment equity refers to a set of activities or a programme that an organisation designs to ensure it exhibits equality in all the aspects of human resource management such as recruitment, pay, hiring, selection, promotion, training, and retention.
An employment equity programme seeks to obtain a workforce that not only reflects all segments of the society, but also ensures that the employment systems provide a fair and equitable opportunity to develop their potentials, realize their expectations and make maximum contributions to their respective workplaces. There has been a misconception that employment equity is a direct contradiction of the merit principle.
However, this is not always the case. The employment equity normally attempts to observe that every applicant’s qualifications are recognised, and that non-merit factors such as race, religion, or gender are not. Thus, the fact is that employment equity does support and enforce the merit principle. Therefore, it should be recognised by all employers in public and private institutions.
New public administration The concept of new public administration emphasises the fact that the administration should be responsive enough to the needs of the society and confine itself to the problems that afflict the society.
New public administration advocates for the elimination of the defects in public personnel practices such as the inadequate emphasis to merit in promotion, lack of contractual employment, and the absence of incentives to boost productivity. Thus, it supports the principles of the merit system.
However, using the merit system in the new public administration has raised many controversies as various critics argue that the newest of the new public administration only works for a limited period of time. When time elapses, it no longer remains new. This implies that the merit system has to change with time.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Concept of Merit Principle in Management by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More From the foregoing discussion, it can be deduced that merit principle is an efficient and effective tool for ensuring that there is no discrimination in workplaces as far as hiring and promotion opportunities are concerned. Therefore, the authorities should ensure that all services in the public and private sectors adhere to the set merit system principles to enable the prevalence equality and equity.
Claude Monet and Impressionism Research Paper college essay help near me
Born in Paris, France, in 1840, Claude Monet is considered to be the founder of impressionist style and philosophy in painting. Throughout his career, Monet portrayed consistence and prolific application of impressionism philosophy in his paintings, which emphasized on his perceptions of nature “as it is”.
In fact, one of his early paintings, “the Impression Sunrise”, is considered the foundation of the impressionist movement. Monet believed that his work was based on scientific study of life and nature (Rewald, 2009). Therefore, most of his works were paintings of various aspects of nature, especially landscapes and real-life scenarios.
Monet’s painting “The Water Lilies” is an example of his work that portrays how Monet viewed and valued the nature. This painting indicates that the painter appreciated it and sought to present the aspect of nature as it appeared in the environment. The painting, which was done using oil on canvas style, depicts a scenery in a Pond, somewhere in France.
It shows an aesthetic scene created by light reflection by water and several water lilies on the water surface. According to analysts, Monet used his view of nature with an aim of appreciating the nature and inspiring human’s appreciation of their world.
Figure 1: Claude Monet’s Water Lillies, 1919 (Rewald, 2009)
It is most likely that Monet’s target audience was the public in general. It was probably meant to show off the beauty of pods in Paris. The color in the painting indicates how the painter used different colors to depict nature. Light reflection by water under the water lilies is a major aspect of the painting. It provides an indication that Monet wanted to impress the audience with the beauty of surrounding nature.
In fact, this 1919 painting was done during the last days of Monet’s work and life, after over seventy years of painting. During this time, Monet had already developed his impressionist idea and decided to paint landscape throughout his remaining days.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More As aforementioned, Monet’s Water Lilies painting belongs to the impressionist era. Therefore, it is worth reviewing the meaning of the19th century artistic style and philosophy. Impressionism comes from the French term Impression, which was derived from Monet’s earlier work “Impression, soleil levent” (Impression, Sunrise).
However, it is worth noting that Monet did not use this term to refer to his idea, but rather Louis Leroy, an art critic, used coined the term “Impressionism” to refer to the movement that was started by artists like Claude Monet (Rewald, 2009).
In paintings, Impressionist style has a number of unique characteristics that are worth mentioning. For instance, they have a relatively small size and a small thickness. In addition, the paintings use brush strokes to depict visible scenarios using a mixture of colors. Normally, the paintings depict use of bright colors that are appealing to the viewer’s eye, with an aim of catching people’s attention.
The composition of the impression painting, as shown in “The Water Lilies”, is relatively open. In addition, such paintings emphasize on the use of light to show various aspects of the scene. The light falls on the surface of the objects revealing the aesthetic aspect of the colors used.
Colors are also applied side-by-side, a technique that was used to ensure a good mixing of colors to create an aesthetic and vibrant surface. Monet’s work also shows how complementary colors are used to obtain dark colors, such as dark and grey tones. It is worth noting that Monet avoided black paint, but mixed complementary colors to achieve gray and dark tones.
Moreover, impressionism emphasizes on the subject matter. In this case, Monet’s work depicts nature “as it is” and the beautifulness associated with it. In addition, Impressionist style in painting emphasized on time and space. Light was used to depict the nature as it appears during the day. Most impressionist painters avoided depicting night scenes (Denvir, 2010). This is one major aspect of impressionism, which Claude Monet displayed in his Water Lilies painting.
Apart from Monet, a number of other artists took advantage of the premixed paints available in the European art during the century. For example, Berthe Morisot’s “Reading” was painted in 1873 and depicts a woman reading a book, probably the Bible, while seating on grass in a field somewhere in France. Other examples include Camille Pissaro’s “Hay Harvest at Eragny” (1901) and Renoir’s “Girl with a Hoop” (1885).
We will write a custom Research Paper on Claude Monet and Impressionism specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Figure 2: Berthe Morisot’s Reading, 1873 (Denvir, 2010).
Figure 3: Camille Pissarro’s Hay Harvest at Éragny, 1901 (Moskowitz
Home Depot Ceo Project Research Paper cheap essay help: cheap essay help
Table of Contents Corporate culture
Corporate culture The culture that guides Home Depot, Inc. encourages its employees to have the passion to serve customers with utmost value (Bianchi, 2009). Home depot has employed a strategy in which employees “live their values every day.” The values act as a guide to Home Depot, Inc.’s approximately 300,000 associates.
The associates have to work on the “orange-blooded” culture that insists on serving customers with utmost respect, passion, and total inclusion (Roush, 2009). These values are adopted within the organization, in the outside world, and into all the life aspects of the employees. Eight core values guide the home depot employees as listed below.
Excellent customer care services: Like any other business, the customers are the most important stakeholders of any business. At the Home Depot, the employees are obliged to offer their customers with excellent value and knowledge of the products and services they offer. Common customer-care services exist in every retail store; however, Home Depot, Inc.’s employees go an extra mile.
They work hard to ensure they offer incomparable value to their services. The employees advice their customers of the usage of different products to ensure they obtain maximum benefits from the products they purchase.
Building strong relationships: At the home depot, all stakeholders, customers, associates, shareholders, the suppliers, and the entire community are treated with utmost integrity. The Home Depot, Inc.’s employees ensure that they stick on nothing but the truth in their deals with the different stakeholders. This stand creates trust and thus, the relationship between The Home Depot, Inc., and its stakeholders strengthens day by day.
Social Corporate Responsibility (CSR): Apparently, the employees, customers, suppliers and all other stakeholders belong to the surrounding community. Home depot strives to ensure it gives back to the community, and thus, it strives to take care of the environment and the people in it. Home Depot contributes to social projects that help in the growth and development of the community.
The Home Depot Foundation coordinates all the community involvement procedures (The home depot foundation, 2009). A volunteer force invests their time, talent, resources, and hands-on services to meet the needs of the community.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Building a favorable business environment: The Home Depot, Inc. clearly understands that the business associates are the key people that contribute to the success of their business. Therefore, the Home Depot, Inc. ensures that all the associates feel valued. The organization ensures that all its stakeholders access the opportunities for their growth and development.
Home Depot, Inc. ensures that it leaves a reasonable profit margin for their suppliers. In case there is a conflict between the Home Depot, Inc. and its associates, the matter is handled in a professional manner, and this leads to satisfaction of all the involved business associates. Further, the organization helps all its associates to manage and save their money for the rainy days.
Some of the programs that Home Depot, Inc. offers to build financial security for their employees include the 401(k), the Employee Stock Purchase Plan (ESPP), the spending accounts, health saving accounts, the direct deposit accounts, and the credit unions.
Doing the right thing: The activities at the stores are structured in a way to ensure that Home Depot, Inc. does the right thing; accepting responsibility of all their actions. The business environment ensures there is mutual benefit for all involved stakeholders, and all the business associates seek to diversify and catch up with the evolving world.
Home Depot, Inc. values diversity as it paves the way to serve the increasing number of customers, suppliers, and all associates, and it is the only way to do the right thing. Moreover, the Home Depot, Inc. does some very extraordinary things that are just right.
Home Depot provides fulltime paid athlete jobs, where, the company only benefits during the athlete’s training for the Olympics. Interestingly, Home Depot, Inc. also offers aerobics trainings, dieting classes, and classes to help people to quit smoking.
Appreciating employees: It is noteworthy that Home Depot, Inc.’s employees invest their time, talent, and energy to the success of the company. Therefore, Home Depot, Inc. has the obligation to appreciate its employees. The company does this by giving incentives and diversified employee benefits. The Home Depot, Inc. offers all the company associates with a peaceful mind as they serve the company.
We will write a custom Research Paper on Home Depot Ceo Project specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Firstly, the health of all the company’s associates is fully insured. Unlike other companies that will restrict the medical benefits, the Home Depot, Inc. offers full medical cover, dental and vision covers for full-time associates. The company goes ahead to offer the family with the needed protection in case of illnesses, accidents that may cause disability or even death.
Generally, Home Depot, Inc. offers a life insurance, accidental death and dismemberment Insurance, indemnity insurance, critical illness protection plan, homeowners insurance and even the veterinary pet insurance.
Home depot employees are assured of full time payments during off days, vacations, holidays, personal leaves, sick leaves, and during the bereavement leaves. This insurance covers, work and life benefits enables the Home Depot, Inc.’s employees to offer the best of services without all their might without any fear.
Creating shareholder value: Like any other business, shareholders are the most important people as they finance the entire business. The best thing that a business can do is appreciate and ensure the shareholders obtain value for their investment. The company accesses every investment opportunity to ensure they invest in worthwhile opportunities.
The managers ensure that they invest all the company’s finances wisely, and thus obtain enough profits. The profits are divided wisely to serve in re-investing, servicing the daily expenses, paying employees, and giving reasonable dividends to the company shareholders.
Entrepreneurial spirit: The Home Depot, Inc. encourages all its associates to adopt and adapt creative ideas from those companies that offer similar products and services. The associates are always urged to know of the new developments that have taken place in the world.
The new ideas enhance creativity and innovation of ideas of how to serve customers for the betterment of the business. Every stakeholder at the Home Depot possesses the entrepreneurial spirit by default because of the influence of the company-working environment.
Corporate resource Home Depot, Inc. has seen its resources transform into capabilities. The various efforts in marketing, incorporation of technology, research, and development are some of the factors that have resulted in the growing capital of Home Depot, Inc. over the years. The various corporate resource strategies are discussed below.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Home Depot Ceo Project by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Marketing: Home Depot, Inc. has invested heavily in marketing. The heavy investments in advertisements have enabled the retail shop to gain a lot of popularity. It is worth noting that Home Depot, Inc. expresses expertise in the customer care services as well as the DIY consumer.
Home Depot, Inc. achieves this marketing strategy by letting the most qualified and knowledgeable employees to provide the services. These approaches, plus the highly quality products and the considerably low prices has enabled the company to obtain new customers and maintain the loyalty of the old customers.
Finance: Home Depot, Inc. has maintained a good relationship with all its shareholders who help in financing the whole project. Over the years, Home Depot, Inc. has maintained growing profit inventories, and this factor has encouraged the shareholders to freely buy shares and provide funds whenever the business needs to expand.
The finance and top management departments have worked tirelessly to ensure that they always bring worthwhile financial figures on the table. The two departments have always made the necessary adjustments in the financial figures to ensure the stock prices are attractive to the investors.
Research and development: Research plays a very great role in enabling a business to know exactly where it heads. Home Depot, Inc. has been able to identify its main competitors through research, and it has identified the way forward to deal with the competition (Bianchi, 2009). Through research, Home Depot, Inc. identified its strengths and weakness, and employed various strategies to improve on its weak areas.
Feasibility studies enable Home Depot, Inc. to identify business opportunities. The company is able to put up new stores in strategic areas to meet the demand of the customers as well as ensure it makes maximum benefits out of the new stores.
Currently, Home Depot, Inc. has grown, and it possesses more than 1,500 stores across Mexico and Canada. These developments, expansions, adoption of new technologies, and the increase of the Home Depot stores results from the efforts employed in research and development.
Logistics issues: Home Depot employs logistics to ensure that there is a strong internal network structure among the employees. Moreover, the employees are entitled to considerably high wages and benefits. The satisfied employees deliver the best services that add value to Home Depot, Inc. products and services (Bailey, 2001).
Further, home depot employs strategies that place the company at a better competitive advantage against its competitors. Home Depot has developed direct alliances with leading manufacturers. This strategy has enabled Home Depot, Inc. to obtain its products cheaply and in an efficient manner. Home Depot, Inc.’s most interesting strategy is the one that seeks to capture all classes of customers.
The company has standard format stores and small shops that are fully equipped with Villager’s Hardware brands. These stores are able to capture the customers who are interested in buying common items instead of a huge range of items.
Operation issues: Shelf stocking is an operation that takes place frequently in a busy store like Home Depot, Inc. The Home Depot has created a SPI (Service Performance Improvement) program to combat the inconveniences created by the exercise. To make the shopping experience more convenient, the employees re-stock the shelves after the store hours.
This operation helps in reducing messes in the aisle; therefore, customers are able to move freely from one shelf to another without much difficulty. To ease their operations further, Home Depot, Inc. has opened new transit facilities and import distribution centers that have played a great role in facilitating the movement of products.
The enhanced path of the distribution of Home Depot, Inc. products ensures the availability of products wherever and whenever wanted. This very important aspect enables the business to obtain trust and loyalty from the customers. Customers are always sure that they will obtain whatever they desire to purchase at any Home Depot, Inc. store at a considerably cheap price.
Another very important operation that has placed Home Depot, Inc. at a very high position above its competitors is the self-checkout system (“Dramatic change at Home Depot,” 2002).
The system allows consumer to save much time as they self-check themselves without necessarily having to wait in the queues to be served. The self-check registers have enabled the customers to have self-empowerment and some sense of self-control.
Human resource: The human resource department ensures that employees are satisfied with the positions they hold in the organization. Recruitment is done whenever a new store opens, and the existing employees are promoted depending on their experience level. Everything in the human resource department is done openly to everybody’s satisfaction.
Employees who qualify to be on the management team are highly skilled and experienced because they are chosen on merit. The board of directors comprises of very competent individuals who guide the company towards the right direction. The human resource department works exclusively to bring utmost value to its employees by giving them decent wages, investing in their training, and helping their families.
Information system: One of the greatest features that place Home Depot, Inc. at its high standards is the highly upgraded information system. Home Depot, Inc. has an Electronic Data Interchange (EDI) technology that enables the employees to serve thousands of customers within the shortest time possible.
The highly esteemed technologies in Home Depot, Inc. enable the retail store to track inventory records, keep accuracy, and prevent fraud cases. The company’s main aim is implementing the latest technology in all their stores.
Research and development have played a great role in constructing improved technological infrastructure (Bianchi, 2009). Overall, the information system at the Home Depot has condensed the company’s operations through the implantation of a digital business system.
IFAS table Home Depot, Inc. keeps a stringent analysis of its internal factors as shown in the table below.
Internal factors Weight Rating Weight score Comments Strengths Technological advances Improved logistics operations Process oriented R
Motorcycles Project Management Report college admissions essay help: college admissions essay help
Table of Contents Abstract
Ideal Project Organisation Style
Balancing Short and Long Term Needs
Resources Needed By Project Manager
Democratic Project Leadership Style
Risk Mitigation Strategies
Abstract New projects are rolled out everyday in various organisations. However, only a few projects are completed successfully. This is due to the fact that most companies fail to plan ahead and are hence unable to cope with the unforeseen challenges.
This paper will focus on the crucial elements that JJ motorcycles should address as the company moves to the production of touring class motorcycles. Among the issues that are likely to fail, this project include leadership style, risk control and lack of resources.
Introduction Every organisation comes up with new projects due to its strong desire to accomplish its goals. JJ motorcycles has been very successful in the production of low fuel consumption motors. The company has actually identified an untapped opportunity in the market, and that is why the new project has been proposed.
Projects are meant to make a positive contribution towards the achievement of company’s goals. This implies that there would be no need of introducing a new range of motorcycles if there is no benefit to be experienced at the completion of the project.
Planning is very important in project management. JJ motorcycles, in particular, has carried out thorough research to identify the target market for its new range of motorcycles. Since the project at hand entails the addition of a new inventory product in the company’s stock, it is necessary to carry out a comprehensive research to understand the needs of the market.
Ideal Project Organisation Style The most ideal type of project organisation for JJ’s project is strategic planning. This approach suits the plan because it will be completed within the next 5 years and hence it is not a short term goal. In this style of project management, the manager delegated by JJ motorcycles should assess the company’s abilities and weaknesses. It is the best way of successfully planning ahead.
The production of touring class calls for the improvement of the company’s output. This means that more manpower has to be brought on board because the current number of employees cannot cope with the sudden increase of the workload. Moreover, it is recommended for the project to be executed gradually. This approach will give JJ motorcycles ample time to measure the results obtained after the introduction of motorcycles.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Though it is stipulated that engines within the range of 500 cubic centimetres will generate approximately between $50,000 and $100,000, there is a need to validate this speculation. Besides that, it is necessary to empower the current employees on a continuous basis.
New processes might be introduced and may only be assigned to employees who have the relevant skills and experiences (Dennis 2007). It is therefore recommended that the project be implemented as a pilot one. This means that the existing line of production will be maintained.
Balancing Short and Long Term Needs In every project, there are short and long term needs. Nonetheless, JJ motorcycles must come up with a strategy of creating a balance between these needs. Short term needs may sound irrelevant, but they are very crucial. Though they may be overlooked, they are important because they keep the company afloat.
If short-term goals are not achieved within the specified time, they are very likely to impact negatively on the achievement of long term goals. Moreover, these two needs are dependent on each other. The best approach would be to prioritise these needs. Short-term needs should come first because they probably do not require a lot of input in terms of resources.
Alternatively, the company can assign priorities to these needs based on the availability of relevant resources. This implies that the company should evaluate its strengths in terms of skills and time in determining what should come the first and what should be the last.
At the moment, it is maintaining the current production of motorcycles which engine capacity does not exceed 1100 cubic centimetres. It is important to produce this line of production because it is the one that helped in building the company’s name as a reputable brand.
It will make it easier to introduce the new product into the market, due to the fact that the company already has a market share that needs to be maintained lest it is taken over by JJ’s competitors. On the other hand, long term needs should also be met partially because they hold the key to JJ’s future.
We will write a custom Report on Motorcycles Project Management specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Resources Needed By Project Manager A manager cannot oversee the execution of a project without resources. The resources vary depending on the project probably based on the tasks that need to be carried out. A budget is therefore very crucial to a project manager.
Budgeting is salient because the project manager must set some money aside to be used in purchasing the needed materials (Harold 2013). In this case, JJ motorcycles must double its current budget because the engines that have more than 1100 cubic centimetres will cost more in terms of the materials that will be used.
Though the budget allocation for this particular project has been computed based on the current cost of resources including labour and materials, it should be exceeded to a certain amount to remain relevant despite any changes in the market.
Commodity prices are subject to change, and there is therefore a risk in having a fixed budget. This outcome may bring the project to a halt because the company’s executives would have to go back to the drawing board for the sake of adjusting the project’s budget.
Even though JJ has already had equipment that is used in the manufacture of its low capacity engines, there is need to acquire additional equipment. From the look of things, the company is interested in increasing its output. For output to go up, the inputs have to be increased.
Besides that, a project cannot be executed without a workforce (Timothy 2011). These are the people who implement the tasks that are contained in the project. In other words, a project entails a series of tasks that the project manager cannot accomplish on his/her own and hence must delegate to other people. Different tasks require different skills, and the company must therefore ensure that there is sufficient labour at its disposal.
It is very important to consider the availability of effective communication channels. This argument is far fetched because the project will be executed by various teams whose activities need to be coordinated. Though the different teams have different mandates, they have a common goal towards the completion of the project.
A lapse in any team may be experienced in the entire project, and that is why, there should be reliable communication channels so that each team can express its concerns. Moreover, the new range of motorcycles will go through the testing phase.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Motorcycles Project Management by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More JJ should avail a communication terminal that customers can use to express their experiences with the new model of motorcycles. This information should be used by JJ Company to identify what they can do to improve the performance of these new motorcycles.
Democratic Project Leadership Style Leadership plays a major role in project management. Since JJ’s project is long term, the best leadership style would be democratic style. In this style of leadership, the project manager cannot make decisions without taking into account views of everyone involved in the project. Decisions made by the project manager will affect all the employees in their various workstations, and that is why they should be consulted.
This implies that everyone is allowed to give their opinion before key decisions are made. The approach is highly recommended for long term projects. This is due to the fact that there is bound to be major flaws when decisions are made without consulting the teams that will be executing the said decisions.
The benefit of this style is that it makes employees in their various teams feel appreciated and hence assume ownership of the project. Such employees do not need to be followed around because they know what is expected from them. Additionally, during brainstorming sessions, the company will get a wide array of ideas due to distinct abilities and experiences that are possessed by the company’s employees.
Risk Mitigation Strategies Risks are everywhere, and so projects are not an exemption. However, there are three strategies that JJ motorcycles can employ to minimise the occurrence of risks in its activities. The first approach entails carrying demonstrations of finished motorcycles to potential clients. Clients drawn from the company’s clients’ base can be requested to take test rides before the motorcycles are brought into the show room.
That way, the risk of dysfunctional engines will be avoided. At the end of evaluation phase, customers will report any mechanical and technical faults early enough. When risks are not mitigated, a project becomes useless due to wastage of company resources and time.
The first alternative entails teams that are involved in the project to carry out joint inspections of their tasks. Though each team has different roles, it is recommended that they evaluate all their tasks together. The reason behind this argument is that one team may overlook some faults due to the fact that the area affected was handled by another team.
For instance, the team that handled body work must carry joint inspections with the teams that worked on wheels, engine and lights to ensure that all the components function as per the specifications and design of the motorcycles. Besides that, this approach helps in enhancing the team’s harmony because they have to converge at some point.
The last alternative revolves around the testing of deliverables as they are finished. In this approach, a dedicated quality assurance team should be mandated to test each motorcycle that is ready for use. This will help in avoiding the distribution of faulty motorbikes into the market.
Conclusion Effectiveness in managing a project depends on how well the various activities are coordinated. While the project manager may have all the necessary skills and experience, JJ motorcycles must accord him/her the necessary support in terms of budget, manpower, equipment and time.
In addition to that, needs must be classified into short- and long-term. It is important to create a balance between the two categories. Since projects are prone to risks, mitigation plans must be laid out before the commencement of the project to ensure that their occurrence has been minimised.
References Dennis, L. (2007).Project Management. Burlington, VT: Gower Publishing Ltd.
Harold, R. K. (2013).Project Management: A Systems Approach to Planning. Hoboken, NJ: John Wiley
Trifles by Susan Glaspell and The Story of an Hour by Kate Chopin’s Research Paper essay help site:edu
Proposal This paper will be aimed at discussing such literary works as the play Trifles written Susan Glaspell and Kate Chopin’s short story The Story of an Hour. In particular, it is necessary to examine the views on marriage expressed by these authors. Much attention should be paid to the similarities and differences in the themes that these writers focus on.
Overall, this topic has been chosen because it plays an important role for these feminist writers who want to highlight the problems that could be faced by women living in patriarchic societies. So, this question is helpful for studying various works of Susan Glaspell and Kate Chopin.
Furthermore, this topic is important for understanding the problems that feminist movement tried to address at the beginning of the twentieth century. This is why I have decided to focus on this particular topic in this essay.
My major argument will be based primarily on the analysis of the main characters’ behavior, especially their reactions to different challenges. In particular, I will focus on the way in which these women perceive their marriage. On the whole, I will argue that Susan Glaspell and Kate Chopin demonstrate that marriage can turn some form of oppression because it deprives them of their independence or dignity.
This is the main similarity that can be identified. However, Minnie decides to use force in order to end the humiliation to which she is subjected to. In contrast, Mrs. Mallard does not want to acknowledge that her marriage is unhappy.
Moreover, she is extremely ashamed of her willingness to leave her husband. In other words, these characters do not have the same attitudes toward the social norms and expectations that are set for women. This is the thesis that I will discuss in greater detail.
Essay The attitudes toward family and gender roles have been described in various literary works that could have been created during different periods. These questions are explored by such authors Susan Glaspell and Kate Chopin.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Such works as Trifles and The Story of an Hour can be regarded as eloquent examples of feminist literature since they can throw light on the peculiarities of a patriarchal society in which women are not allowed to be autonomous and self-sufficient.
This is one of the main themes that can be singled out. Overall, one can say that these writers describe the experiences of women who are strongly dissatisfied with their marriage because they crave for personal dignity and independence that are denied to them.
These are the things that Mrs. Mallard and Minnie lack. However, these characters respond to these hardships in different ways. In particular, Minnie kills her husband because; to a great extent, it is her response to his continuous abuse. In contrast, Mrs. Mallard is not ready to acknowledge that she is glad to live without her husband. She does not want to say that marriage can turn into a disaster for a person.
Therefore, the characters described by Susan Glaspell and Kate Chopin respond to social injustice in different ways. These are the main questions that should be examined closely. On the whole, this discussion can show that marriage is described as the union in which the rights of both partners are not always equal.
First of all, Susan Glaspell and Kate Chopin throw light on the life of families in which women are forced to play certain gender roles that are imposed on them. In particular, these women are deprived of their freedom and dignity. This point can be illustrated with the help of several examples. For instance, one can look at the way in which Mrs. Mallard responds to the news about her husband’s death.
Kate Chopin describes her reaction in the following way, ‘When she abandoned herself a little whispered word escaped her slightly parted lips. She said it over and over under the breath: “free, free, free!’ (Chopin 53). This quote is important for showing that Mrs.
Mallard does not view her marriage as something valuable (Chopin 53). This is one of the aspects that can be singled out. It is possible to say that marriage is not satisfying for the main character of Susan Glaspell’s play. The author does not directly describe her experiences. However, the writer provides several eloquent details.
We will write a custom Research Paper on Trifles by Susan Glaspell and The Story of an Hour by Kate Chopin’s specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More For example, the visitors can find the body of the dead canary that was killed by Minnie’s husband (Glaspell 44). However, male investigators of the murder dismiss this evidence by arguing that “women are used to worrying about trifles” (Glaspell 38). This quote is important for showing that Minnie’s inner world is completely overlooked by men.
To a great extent, the husband’s cruelty is one of the factors that prompted her to kill him. Yet, this idea does not even occur to the police officers. Overall, family life is practically unbearable for each of these characters. This is one of the details that can be singled out.
Susan Glaspell and Kate Chopin show that marriage produced a devastating effect on the inner world of these characters. Much attention should be paid to such a theme as lack of personal fulfillment which is critical for every individual. Both characters suffer because their personal needs are continuously disregarded.
However, there are important distinctions that should be considered. First of all, Mrs. Mallard is unable to acknowledge that she wants to “live for herself” (Chopin 53). In her opinion, such a desire is “monstrous” (Chopin 53). The protagonist does not admit that she does not want to grieve for her husband’s death (Chopin 53). She believes that her inability to feel the sense of loss will be condemned by other people.
This character suffers a heart attack when she finds out her husband has not died. This is one of the aspects that can be distinguished. In contrast, Minnie is able to live without her husband. She is ready to defy the social traditions according to which women are obliged to accept the rules set by males. One can say that Mrs. Mallard is afraid of stating that she wants to end her marriage.
This is one of the distinctions that can be identified since it is important for describing the differences between these literary works. It should be borne in mind that these texts were written during different periods, and they can show how women’s values evolved. They became more willing to challenge the authority of males.
Thus, Minnie deviates from the established social tradition. Certainly, it is difficult to find an ethical justification for murder or any other forms of violence. However, this behavior is a response to suffering and injustice. This is one of the points that can be made.
Certainly, it is possible to raise some objections to the arguments that have been placed in the paper. For instance, one can mention that both authors do not speak about the relations between the main characters and their spouses. These issues are not explicitly described by the writers.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Trifles by Susan Glaspell and The Story of an Hour by Kate Chopin’s by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More In particular, the readers do not know much about the behavior of Brently Mallard whose personality is not examined by Kate Chopin. Additionally, this author does not speak about the way in which he treats his wife. This is one of the flaws that should be considered. Furthermore, Susan Glaspell does not pay much attention to the relations between Minnie and her husband John Wright.
Moreover, the author does not explicitly tell that the main character killed her spouse. This is only the assumption that cannot be fully verified. These are some of the limitations that should be considered. Yet, one can respond to these objections. For instance, it is necessary to keep in mind that as a reporter Susan Glaspell often wrote about women who were accused of murders (Ben-Zwi 141).
Moreover, in many cases, these women were victims of abuse or humiliation (Ben-Zwi 142). This story is partly based on the life of Margaret Hossack who murdered her husband because of his abuse. Therefore, one can argue that Minnie could be humiliated or abused by her husband.
Moreover, it is important to remember that Kate Chopin’s short story is also based on the real-life events (Toth 10). In particular, she wrote about women who were compelled to marry (Toth 10). Apart from that, she had to end the short story with the death of the main character, otherwise this literary work might not have been published (Toth 10; Berkove 152).
These examples indicate that at the end of the nineteenth century, women were not supposed to be independent from males. Therefore, it is quite possible to identify the connections between the feminist movement and the literary works of Kate Chopin and Susan Glaspell who want to throw light on the difficulties faced by women.
On the whole, this discussion suggests that these short stories present a critique of marriage. In both cases, the writers show that women could be dissatisfied with this form of union. Minnie and Mrs. Mallard are not willing to reject their freedom and sense of dignity. However, they are forced to do it. To a great extent, this situation can be described by the social norms that existed during the nineteenth century.
So, this is the main internal conflict that they struggle to resolve. Yet, they react to these hardships in different ways. In particular, Minnie kills her husband because in this way she attempts to retain her dignity. In contrast, Mrs. Mallard cannot openly state that she cannot live with her spouse.
This is why this character is speechless when she sees her husband. Overall, the main theme is the lack of personal fulfillment and autonomy that these women lack. However, Susan Glaspell focuses on the idea of protest against the existing social hierarchy while Kate Chopin focuses on the social norms that are aimed at subduing women. These are the main arguments that can be put forward.
Works Cited Ben-Zwi, Linda. “Murder, She Wrote”: The Genesis of Susan Glaspell’s Trifles.” Theatre Journal 44.2 (1992): 141-162. Print.
Berkove, Lawrence. “Fatal Self-Assertion in Kate Chopin’s The Story of an Hour.” American Literary Literalism 32.2 (2000): 152-158. Print.
Chopin, Kate. A Pair of Silk Stockings. New York: Courier Dover Publications, 2012. Print.
Glaspell, Susan. Plays by Susan Glaspell. New York: Cambridge University Press, 1987. Print.
Toth, Emily. Unveiling Kate Chopin. Jackson: University Press of Mississippi,1999. Print.
Hurt Hawks – Robinson Jeffers and The Fish – Elizabeth Bishop Essay custom essay help: custom essay help
Robinson Jeffers and Elizabeth Bishop were great and renowned American poets. Robinson was widely known for his narrative style of poetry with most of his poems centred on humanism. He greatly criticized human beings for being over-concerned with their own welfare at the expense of other creatures.
On the other hand, apart from poetry Bishop was also a short story writer. This explains why most of her poetic work takes a narrative style. She rarely exposed her private life and thus her poems did not have a generalized thematic concern.
The two poems are written in the same style as both Robinson and Bishop are American poets who have consequently embraced the American style of free verse poetry. Robinson’s poem is in two verses while Bishop chose to have one verse.
Furthermore, the two poems are also written in a narrative version using imaginary characters. In her single verse Bishop narrates how the persona in her poems fished out an extra-ordinarily big fish and the sequence of events that took place. Robinson also narrates the hawk’s inner life.
There is a similarity in the thematic concerns of the two poems since they both discuss the interaction between human beings and the natural world. Bishop narrates of a fisherman who is in a dilemma on whether to release the fish he has caught or to keep the same after fishing. In the same manner Robinson also tells of the relationship of the hawk and his son.
The setting in the two poems targets humanism. In “The Fish”, the persona is satisfied to let go of the fish since if he does not it will die. The hunter in the “Hurt Hawks” decides that he would rather shoot humans and leave the hawks. This clearly portrays his contempt for man and admiration for natural environment.
The two poems are different in the general structure, sentence structure, style and diction between the two poems. The poem “Hurt Hawks” is written in two verses with each part discussing a distinct and separate idea although they are later interlinked. The first part narrates the bird’s inner feelings while the second is about the relationship of the hawk with the hunter.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More On the other hand, “The Fish” is written in a single continuous narrative verse. Bishop also employs short and simple sentences unlike the author of “Hurt Hawks” who has mostly used compound and complex sentences with very few cases of simple sentences.
There is terminal rhyme in the poem “The Fish” where the last words in alternating sentences rhyme. This creates musicality in the poem thus making it easy to recite. Examples include; bought and fight, strips and roses, go and rainbow. There are no instances of rhyme in the poem “Hurt Hawks”.
Bishop has used the fish as a symbol to show man’s superiority over other living creatures while Robinson does not use the hawk as a symbol but he directly uses the hawk to attack the inhuman nature of man.
The two poems are written by poets from the same geographical inclination hence the resemblance in style. They almost seem to address similar issues in society although their thematic concerns and diction in the poems brings out the outstanding differences in the two poems.
Willy Loman, a poor role model to his two sons Biff and Happy Essay college essay help near me
In his stage play “Death of a Salesman”, Arthur Miller introduces us to the family of Willy Loman. There is greater influence of the parents to the children as is portrayed in the play. Willy Loman’s laxity has weighed heavily on the conduct of his sons, Happy and Biff. The main theme in the play is sustained in the play with the sons of Willy attaining their personality from their father.
We learn that one’s upbringing shapes their behavior, whereas one’s surrounding shapes their character. This is quite evident in the case of a parent child interaction as portrayed in the play.
Since most of the time the child will look up to their parents, their ethical and moral values will be acquired from their parents. The impact of parent’s ethical degradation, on their children in is shown clearly in the play “Death of Salesman” by Arthur Miller.
Willy Loman set a very low morality standard for his sons by his actions and therefore he was not a good role model to them. For instance, the theft committed by Biff was never considered as such by his father; on the contrary, the latter actually encouraged his son’s actions.
It could be argued that the father was acting in good faith; on a second thought, though, it becomes clear that his motivation was not to save his children from an obviously harsh penalty for a theft, but pure desire to encourage his children’s worst qualities, such as lying in order to get the appreciation of the authority – a coach, in the given case.
On another occasion, lumber was stolen from a construction site by Biff and his brother Happy. In place of rebuke, they received appreciation from their father for the wrong they did. He was proud of the large amount of lumber they stole.
By praising them, Willy blurred his sons’ vision of stealing as immoral and ethically wrong. Past studies show that what children see as warranted actions from authoritative people, primarily, parents, will later on be considered as generally acceptable by such kids as they grow up. In the case of Biff and Happy, much hope was lost due to their father’s irresponsibility and lack of will.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Apart from dishonesty as the means to get promoted in the eyes of the leader by resorting to theft and lies, Willy also approved of deceit in family relationships, which has affected the boys on a much deeper level, leaving them not only financially irresponsible, but also socially isolated.
There is no need to stress the significance of family support and the significance of trustworthy relationships with relatives; being deprived of the given elements, one is most likely to lead an unhappy life, with no one to care for and no supporting spouse to be by one’s side.
By showing his children that one can legitimately cheat on his/her spouse, Willy destroyed his children’s chance to ever become family men and have supportive spouses. Granted that at some point in their lives, Biff and Happy will forget about this example set by their father, the pattern of family relationships will be imprinted in their mind, which will inevitably lead to them repeating this pattern over and over.
The given event was not the only time when Willy mistreated his wife. For instance, Willy was married to Linda but went ahead to have another woman. He had an affair with another woman because he was not satisfied with his marriage. His poor treatment of his wife misled his sons to see it as acceptable to be dishonest. The children, in turn, viewed women as inferior objects of use.
As a result, Willy’s sons underestimated women in general. To Biff and Happy, they never knew the moral law of treating others as one would want to be treated. This was a major failure on Willy’s part for not shaping his sons on even the most fundamental principles of moral values. In the end, it all turned against him when his sons started treating him the same way he treated other people. He had no one to blame but himself.
In conclusion, the play “Death of a Salesman” points out the flaws often left unattended by parents in having a tangible influence on their children. The complacency in instilling discipline to their children has resulted in moral and ethical decay. Arthur Miller points out the need to inculcate proper moral and ethical standards in children during their upbringing. Doing so will help guard them from committing crimes.
The play also provides an important lesson on the responsibility of the parent to be strict with their children, so that as their children grow, they could be able to differentiate between moral and immoral. It is also clear that the action of the parents with will always serve as a reference point for their children once the latter step into adulthood and start building their own behavioral patterns.
We will write a custom Essay on Willy Loman, a poor role model to his two sons Biff and Happy specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Parents are undoubtedly the ultimate role models to their children; therefore, parents should strive to maintain high standards in whatever they do to create an example for their children to follow.
In the case of Willy, if he had been stern with his children and quick to rebuke them when they steal or do any other thing that was wrong, his sons would have grown to be law-abiding members of the society; it is unlikely that children will grow to be ethical if their parent is unethical.
Total War in Modern World History Term Paper best college essay help
One of the history’s seeming paradoxes is the fact that, the more humanity appears to be affiliated with the values of progress and enlightenment, the bloodier are the wars, in which the world’s most technologically and culturally advanced countries find themselves plunged into.
Nevertheless, despite the paradoxical subtleties of the phenomenon in question, the earlier mentioned state of affairs can be best referred to, as such that has been dialectically predetermined by the very laws of history.
In this paper, I will explore the validity of the above-stated at length, while promoting the idea that the very emergence of the term ‘total war’ cannot be discussed outside of the fact that, throughout the course of the 19th and 20th centuries, it was specifically the Westerners’ growing awareness of what the concept of ‘nationhood’ stands for, which began to define the qualitative dynamics on the arena of international politics.
The origins of the term ‘total war’ can be traced back to the era of the Napoleonic Wars. After all, it was namely Napoleon, who took a practical advantage of the policy of a nationwide ‘mass mobilization’, as the main principle of staffing the French army with soldiers (Broers 253). This suggestion contains a clue, as to why it proved possible for Napoleon to be able to do it, in the first place.
Ever since the time of the French Great Revolution, it became a commonplace practice among Europeans to go about constructing their sense of self-identity along the lines of what happened to be the particulars of these people’s national, rather than religious or socially-sectarian affiliation.
In its turn, this predetermined the main characteristic of the Napoleonic Wars – the fact that, during the course of hostilities, the combatants on both warring sides tended to perceive the significance of their involvement, as such that related to what these people were, in the ethno-cultural sense of this word.
It is needless to mention, of course, that this created objective preconditions for the concerned warfare to be marked with utter cruelty – one of the total war’s main features.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The reason for this is apparent – the very paradigm of war between the two or more nations presupposes that, regardless of what happened to be their age, gender or social status, the citizens from from involved countries do contribute (directly or indirectly) to the continually applied war-effort.
In its turn, this naturally makes the legitimate targets of military operations. This suggestion explains the sheer cruelty, with which the French soldiers were trying to ‘pacify’ the Spanish civilians, during the course of the so-called ‘Peninsular War’ (1807-1814).
Nevertheless, its contemporary sounding the concept of ‘total war’ has attained at the time of the WW1. After all, it is not only that this war resulted in the deaths of great many civilians, but also it has brought about the rise of a new military strategy, the advocates of which believed that the war’s actual objectives must be consistent with the notion of ‘totality’.
Eventually, this resulted in the qualitative transformation of the term ‘soldier’. Whereas, prior to the outbreak of the WW1, soldiers used to be encouraged to act in the ‘knightly’ manner, while at the front-line, from the year 1914 onwards, this effectively ceased to be the case.
The mentioned war’s ‘totality’ resulted in the creation of the situation when, regardless of what happened to be the particulars of their national affiliation, the front-line soldiers began to be progressively discussed in terms of a ‘cannon meat’ (Neilson 19).
The historical account of the WW1, provides us with the insight into what can be considered the additional indications of a particular military clash deserving to be considered a ‘total war’. These indications can be outlined as follows: a) The deployment of the airforce, as the mean of causing damage to the hostile country’s economic infrastructure and the instrument of terrifying civilians.
The validity of this suggestion can be well illustrated in regards to the bombing missions, carried out by German Zeppelins against the city of London through the years 1915-1918. b) The dramatic boost, provided to the pace of the technological progress by the ongoing hostilities. As a direct consequence of the WW1, the Western civilization has undergone nothing short of a technological revolution.
We will write a custom Term Paper on Total War in Modern World History specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More For example, before the outset of the WW1, there were only 600 internal-combustion vehicles in Britain; whereas, by the time this war ended, the country’s automotive industry has managed to manufacture 60.000 cars, which differed drastically in quality/technology from the ones produced before the war.
The reason for this is apparent – only the states (at the time of a ‘total war’) are able to invest adequately in the economy’s technologically intense sectors, while overlooking the scope of potential hazards – these hazards to not come even remotely close to the danger of the country’s territory facing the prospect of being occupied by the enemy. c)
The fact that those states that end up losing a ‘total war’, are commonly being deprived of their de facto independence.
For example, according to the Treaty of Versailles, signed in the aftermath of the WW1, Germany was required to pay an enormous monetary contribution, while forbidden to continue maintaining its military airforce and fleet, which in turn has effectively reduced this country into nothing short of a semi-independent ‘bantustan’. d)
The deployment of wartime propaganda for the purpose of dehumanizing the enemy. In the time of the WW1, it became a commonplace practice, on the part of the warring countries’ governments, to invest heavily in the production of propagandistic posters, which portrayed the enemy soldiers as murderous beasts, who were born to kill and destroy, as their only the purpose in life (Strayer 1025).
This, of course, created additional prerequisites for the WW1to end up gaining the fame of being utterly atrocious.
Nevertheless, it was namely during the course of the WW2, that the term ‘total war’ has attained its modern-day meaning. Partially, this has to do with the fact that it was in 1943 that this term was mentioned for the first time by Dr. Goebbels, when he was holding his famous ‘Sportpalace Speech’ in Berlin.
While addressing the crowd, he pointed out that, regardless of what happened to be their gender and age, all Germans are expected to actively contribute to the country’s ongoing war-effort (Overy 622).
Not sure if you can write a paper on Total War in Modern World History by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More However, the actual reason why many historians refer to the WW2, as the most illustrative example of what ‘total war’ is all about, is that during the course of this war, the actual objective of many military operations (at least on the part of the Germans) became the physical elimination of the whole nations.
For example, as it is now being known for just about anyone, Nazis strived for nothing less than ‘freeing’ world of Jews, in the physical sense of this word. Essentially the same they planned to do with the Russians – the so-called ‘Plan Ost’, designed by the SS Reichsführer Himmler, contained a number of detailed provisions, as to how the population of Russians could be reduced down to 30 million, within the matter of 10 years.
It needs to be mentioned that, in respect of conducting a particularly atrocious warfare (‘total war’), the Allies did not fall too far behind their German counterparts. The full legitimacy of this statement can be shown in relation to the Allied bombing of Dresden on February 13, 1945, during the course of which, at least 75.000 of German civilians have lost their lives in the artificially created firestorms (Beck 332).
The nuclear bombing of Hiroshima and Nagasaki by the US, stands out as yet another illustrative example – even though that there was no any immediate military necessity to proceed with this bombing, President Truman nevertheless did choose in favor of it.
This provides us with the clue, as to the probably the most crucial sign that a particular war may indeed be discussed in terms of the ‘total’ one – the warring parties’ preoccupation with trying to kill as many ‘enemy’ civilians, as possible.
Within the context of a ‘total war’, the considerations of morality have no place, whatsoever, because this type of war is being fought exactly for the purpose of ‘freeing’ the most attractive environmental niches on the planet, which in turn can only be achieved by the mean of elimination these niches’ former occupants physically – pure and simple.
In light of what has been said earlier, in regards to the discussed subject matter, the paper’s initial thesis may indeed be considered thoroughly valid. After all, as it was shown, it is namely the objective laws of history that predetermine the outbreaks of ‘total wars’ and not the ongoing ‘decline of morals’, as some naïve people continue to believe.
Works Cited Beck, Earl. “The Allied Bombing of Germany, 1942-1945, and the German Response: Dilemmas of Judgment.” German Studies Review 5.3 (1982): 325-337. Print.
Broers, Michael. “The Concept of ‘Total War’ in the Revolutionary Napoleonic Period.” War in History 15.3 (2008): 247-268. Print.
Neilson, Keith. “Total War: Total History.” Military Affairs 51.1 (1987): 17-21. Print.
Overy, R. J. “Mobilization for Total War in Germany 1939-1941.” The English Historical Review 103.408 (1988): 613-639. Print.
Strayer, Robert. Ways of the World: A Brief Global History with Sources, Volume 2. New York: Bedford/St. Martin’s, 2012. Print.
The new pattern of competitions and the probability of war among powerful states Research Paper college application essay help: college application essay help
Problem Identification and Background For a long time, the global capitalistic society has enjoyed a long period of stability. However, in the early 2000s, economic stability in western nations threatened this stability (Li, 2012, p. 1). Since this period, America has experienced several economic and political changes.
For example, the US has experienced several internal and external fiscal imbalances (characterized by debt-financing, consumption-led expansions, and a growing current account deficit) (Li, 2012, p. 1). Within this time, China has emerged as the dominant player in the global capitalist economy by sustaining most of the world’s economic growth (both in China and around the world).
America has been unable to counter this growth. The endless wars that the US has fought in the Middle East have also added to the country’s failure to counter-check China’s growing dominance in global politics. Instead, such wars only threaten America’s position as the main center of global political power.
Consequently, the rising dominance of China in the global political space has created tension in Sino-American relations. Now, the future of international relations between China and the United States (U.S) is unpredictable.
Several researchers have explained the outcome of the relationship between China and the US by suggesting two outcomes – war, or peace. Deeper analyses of the Sino-American relations highlight a shifting power balance in favor of China. For example, Buono
Negative Impacts of Climate Change in the Urban Areas and Possible Strategies to Address Them Essay essay help free
Table of Contents Introduction
Negative Impacts of Climate Change
Introduction Climate change is indisputable and in the absence of considerable changes in policy, the trend is bound to continue. The global emissions of gases, along with the associated climate change, will undoubtedly result in widespread economic costs and impacts across diverse regions and sectors.
Hunt and Watkiss (2011) have underscored the increasing acknowledgement of the possible effects of climate change in cities. Cities face huge negative effects of climate change not just in the present, but in the future as well.
The current essay is an attempt to outline the problems caused by the negative impacts of climate change in the urban areas. In addition, the essay shall also endeavor to assess possible strategies to address the negative impacts.
Negative Impacts of Climate Change A number of scholars have thus far reviewed various possible effects of climate change on cities and the consensus findings of their reports have helped to identify the most significant impacts of climate change on cities (Bigio 2003; Huq
Type of government Essay college essay help: college essay help
Fascism Fascism simply refers to a form of government whereby the state is given all the powers. In this type of government, the country remains the most important aspect. Nations under this type of government are run by a leader who has the total power of control over people and the government. Fascist leaders do not give citizens a chance to express their dissatisfaction with their governance.
In most cases, these leaders apply autocratic rule to ensure that all citizens work hard for the good of the government and the entire country. These authoritarian leaders will use strong military forces to maintain law and order in their respective countries.
This kind of leadership was first witnessed in the world after the First World War when Italy was ruled by Benito Mussolini. The first part of the 20th century would see the movement spreading rapidly to other regions such as Germany, Argentina, Japan, Spain, Mexico, and Brazil.
Fascism was a powerful movement for quite a number of reasons at that time. For example, most countries lacked experience with democracy, owing to their past leadership styles associated with reigning of monarchs. Another obvious reason here was that many people were disappointed by the serious consequences, which the First World War had brought to their countries.
These consequences would range from destruction of property to loss of lands and other crucial assets. Moreover, some countries such as Italy were not happy with the manner, in which other powerful nations treated them after the end of the Great War.
In this regard, Benito Mussolini, who had emerged as a strong leader, went on to assure the Italians that he would do everything to restore the lost pride of his country. This way, the Italian leader set the pace for the movement, forcing other countries to follow in the same pattern.
Fascism was associated with a number of defining features that would be observed through Militarism Corporation, Economic Nationalism, and Totalitarianism. Militarism Corporation was a common feature among fascism movements whereby the military and police forces were effectively used to help enforce law and order. Militarism was also used to help fascist governments gain full control of their people.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Leaders believed in the use of the military and police to enforce rule. The leaders were characterized by unpopular development views and policies. Therefore, they were always in fear that the masses could revolt against their unpopular rule. In this regard, those who failed to show cooperation to the government were punished through military forces.
As a result the forced cooperation with the government of the day, many people were killed through murder and political assassinations. The use of the military and police to force rule among the people caused much suffering among citizens because there were limitations on how they could express their dissatisfaction with government actions and policies.
This militaristic nature of fascist governments would significantly result in overspending in terms of military affairs, even if there were other domestic issues that called for special attention from the government (Payne 78).
Economic nationalism was another defining feature of fascist governments, whereby useful economic policies that were meant to serve the national interest were introduced. Economic performances in countries across the world are influenced by many factors, most of which are determined by the governments.
If a government adopts policies that are not geared towards economic development, then a country could stagnate in terms of economic development. On the other hand, if a government supports feasible economic policies geared towards realizing economic development, then economy of a country could develop continuously.
Fascist governments viewed national economic development from a unique standpoint. In fact, fascist economic organization is totally different from the normal economic framework followed by non-fascist governments. Fascism encouraged full commitment in private profit, and through this way, it brought numerous benefits to big corporations.
Fascist leaders believed that economic empowerment of citizens and business organizations could result in improved national economic performance. Fascists would also adopt every economic initiative or program that proved to play a significant role in the achievement of their political goals.
We will write a custom Essay on Type of government specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More For instance, fascist governments were against the foreign trade, due to the belief that there are many consequences that are associated with this type of trade, such as economic sanctions and dependency on international capital, among other issues. The governments believed that dependence on international capital could lead citizens to relax and anticipate so much to be done through foreign support.
Fascist governments led to the growth of national economies through national participation. However, lack of foreign trade led to slow growth of the various countries which adopted economic nationalism.
Countries which welcomed foreign trade were able to grow faster because there was enhanced competition among national and multinational business organizations. The national business organizations were able to learn from their multinational competitors with the aim of improving their productivity and operations.
Totalitarianism is another aspect which has received much recognition in fascist countries. Under this particular case, the government will have total control over the entire society, whereby it would seek to manipulate every aspect of private and public life. This concept was first initiated by the fascist movements in Italy in the course of the 1920s, before it had been adopted by other fascist countries.
The nations established strong governments which guaranteed great political unity that exceeded all diversity. The states would effectively apply educational concepts and other interactive media to impart social lessons on students, thus teaching them to be obedient to the government in all aspects.
It was believed that educating students on the benefits of being obedient to the government could go a long way in ensuring that there was less resistance from the people.
The American Government and Its Principles The U.S. Constitution is the supreme law that governs the country. It defines the obligations of the different key personnel in local, state and national offices. The main objectives of the Constitution are based on three key areas. First of all, it plays a crucial role in defining and limiting the powers of the national and state governments.
Secondly, the Constitution also helps to define the main relationship between state governments and the national government. Finally, the Constitution helps to safeguard the rights of the citizens by informing the citizens their rights and consequences that could follow if their rights are violated. For instance, the Constitution stipulates the citizens’ right to free expression.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Type of government by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More This is a fundamental right in the U.S. because citizens have the freedom to express their dissatisfaction with the government. For example, if the citizens feel that a certain health policy could negatively impact their access healthcare, then they are free to hold peaceful demonstrations to express their opinions about the unpopular policy.
The U.S. government consists of the federal, local, and state governments. Each of these government units plays an important role in the running of the government business as it is directed by the Constitution. Each government is independent and has its budget and personnel who are paid from government coffers. However, the federal government oversees the local and state governments.
Thus, policies that are passed by the federal government are also adopted by the local and state governments. The policies could be in health, transport, and education.
However, the local and state governments also pass their laws which have impacts on the citizens in their areas of jurisdiction. Apart from the above levels of government, the American government also comprises of three distinct branches which include the Legislative, the Executive, and the Judicial ones.
This branch is responsible for the enforcement of the laws that govern the country, and it comprises of the President, his deputy, members of the cabinet who are also the President’s advisors, and heads of executive departments. The executive branch is very essential for the overall running of government operations.
A country’s economic performance is strongly dependent on its government’s executive. Apart from working to ensure that effective enforcement of laws takes place within the country, the Executive branch is also responsible for representing the country’s economic and political interests across the borders.
This is the lawmaking unit of the government, which consists of the Congress and agencies whose main task is to support the Congress in its responsibilities. The Congress is made up of the House of Representatives and the Senate.
This branch comprises of the lower federal courts and the U.S. Supreme Court. The main purpose of this branch is to interpret the laws of the land and how they are applied in the day-to-day running of the government affairs. The branch interprets the laws of the land and determines many types of cases in private and public domains.
This branch is also responsible for conducting judicial reviews on laws to determine whether they violate the Constitution in any manner. Laws that are found to violate the Constitution are either enacted or done away with. The Judicial branch operates on the principles of the Constitution and it is viewed as the last mediator in matters involving constitutional crises.
Principles of the American Government Democracy
Democracy is a key principle of the U.S. government whereby the Constitution has guaranteed independent judicial systems, political and personal privileges, and free and fair elections among other crucial aspects. Democracy is a key pillar of the Constitution which has provided conducive environment for political and economic activities.
The American citizens have been given more powers on how they can help to shape the government policies. In this regard, the U.S. government would not interfere in any way with individual rights and personal liberties simply because this would be against the law.
There are various ways by which the power of the American government has been limited. For instance, the Constitution restricts the government from directly getting involved in personal matters of the citizens. Through this, its citizens have the freedom to think and act in ways that are geared towards their personal and national development.
The Rule of Law
The law remains supreme in America, and in that case, all citizens and institutions within the country would be held accountable to the requirements of the law. Under this principle, the U.S. government conducts its roles in regard with the existing rules and regulations. In this regard, there is no way the citizens can raise complaints on laws governing them, after they have been implemented by the government.
Put in other words, nobody is above the Constitution. Actions that are suspected to be illegal are decided by courts of law where the Constitution is interpreted. Those found guilty are punished as stipulated in the Constitution.
The Consent of the Governed
This is another key principle whereby the U.S. government will have the freedom to govern its citizens, as long as it comes up with policies that are acceptable by the people. In this case, the citizens have the right to deny the government the power to govern them if the adopted policies do not impress them. This goes a long way in ensuring that the government adopts policies that are geared towards improving the lives of all citizens.
Government’s Role in the Economy As it would be observed, the government plays a crucial role in the running of the economy. While it is obvious that producers and consumers play the ultimate role in matters aimed at shaping the economy, the government’s role can never be overestimated when it comes to steering the economic ship in the right direction. The USA has been the leading economic power in the world for the past half century.
Even though this success has mainly been driven by the unfailing efforts of capital-driven citizenry and consumer-based society, the government has also been very influential in the country’s economic structure over the years. This has been achieved through the actions of fiscal policy and monetary policy, both of which have played a crucial role in ensuring that monetary resources in the country are well supplied and managed.
Another important way through which the government controls the economy is through stabilization and growth. The government stabilizes factors that have impact on the economic performances of business organizations. When this is done, business organizations perform constantly well because there is no fear of constant business uncertainties precipitated by policies adopted by the government.
The excellent performance of business organizations in the U.S. goes a long way in improving the national economy of the biggest economy in the world. Stabilization and growth have been fundamental goals of the Federal Reserve whereby effective initiatives have been undertaken to promote price stability and maximum employment of people.
As it would be observed, the above goals have been pursued and achieved through the influences of financial conditions and interest rates as they are determined by the Federal Reserve System. Through such initiatives, the Federal government has managed to promote the country’s economic activities, thus maintaining a steady growth, increased employment levels, and stability of prices.
As a matter of fact, the U.S. economy would not reach where it is today without any challenges. Past and present financial crises have constantly shaken the country’s economic bases in a more threatening way. However, through the mission and goals of the Federal Reserve, the U.S. Congress has over the years worked hard to steer the economy in the right direction.
The role of the Federal Reserve in shaping the economy has been evident during many ways. For example, the system has been supportive to the economy in all aspects, and in that way, it has been in the front line in helping to promote a sustainable economic recovery not only for the USA but for the entire world.
There was a time in the U.S. history when unemployment and recessions were seen as the biggest economic threats. High unemployment levels of a country indicate poor performance of the economy. A stable economy is one which supports employment by ensuring that a good number of graduates from colleges and universities are absorbed into jobs.
A government ensures availability of employment vacancies by promoting investment and industrialization. Recent unemployment and recession crises nearly brought the U.S. economy to its knees. This, however, forced the government to seek and establish effective ways, through which the economy could be strengthened. One promising approach that would be applied was to cut taxes to encourage consumers to spend more.
This was supplemented with the increased growth in the monetary policy resources, which also helped to encourage more spending. Over the years, the U.S. government has discovered other better tools that can be used to stabilize the economy, particularly through fiscal policy plans.
In this regard, government revenues were manipulated to control the economy, and through such approaches, both monetary policy and fiscal policy would come to assume growing prominence as better tools that could be used to steer the U.S. economy in the right direction.
Through such approaches, the U.S. economy is rapidly recovering from the consequences of the long term recession which has progressively affected the country following previous financial crises.
In fact, the country’s economy is on better footing nowadays, considering the declining unemployment rates and price stability among other recent developments. It is expected that the U.S. economy will continue to lead across the world in the near future because it has very strong foundation and due to the fact that successive governments have been supporting stabilization and growth of the economy.
However, to maintain the lead, successive U.S. governments should always strive to lead from the front. Successful U.S. governments should promote both local and international investments. International investments in upcoming economies in Africa and in the Middle East will ensure that the country is always at the forefront in terms of economic performance.
More businesses in the U.S. are also expected to become multinational companies which would target potential markets in the Middle East and Africa. The markets in these two regions are characterized by many consumers for various services and products.
Previous performances by many U.S. multinational companies show that the U.S. companies have the potential to grow by expanding to international markets. Economies like China are doing very well in the international markets and they pose great competition to the U.S. economy, particularly in Africa where Chinese companies have adopted low pricing strategy for their services and products.
The New Federal Government The new Federal Government was first established in 1787 under the U.S. Constitution. The U.S. Constitution acted as the key platform on which the U.S. was designed. This was only about thirteen years after the Declaration of Independence.
Key personalities were instrument in the creation of the U.S. as a nation in 1787 by various roles in legal, economic and political roles. For example, Thomas Jefferson, a man of many firsts in the U.S. political system who was then serving as a U.S. minister in France, had played a key role in the designing and planning of this new form of government.
In the course of this time, the new government was not lucky to escape many of the challenges and problems that affected the newly independent countries in the world those days. Many across the world were able to start off and perform well economically based on the strategies they used to overcome problems experienced at the time of independence.
The major problems faced by the Federal Government after the passing of the Constitution ranged from foreign policy issues to economic-related problems in 1787. In fact, the U.S. is where it is today because its first leaders’ decisive leadership styles that enable country to solve most of its problems at the time of independence.
George Washington became the first U.S. President under the new government in the year 1789. However, the first years of the new Constitution had proved to be a very challenging moment for him and his assistants, especially in their plans for establishing a strong national government that would be accepted by the Americans.
In fact, George Washington and the new government faced a lot of obstacles as they tried to make things better for the Americans under the new Constitution. The U.S. citizens had so much hope in the new Constitution because they hoped that it would improve their lives through better economic performance.
One of the major issues here was that there was a challenge of establishing a strong economy out of the existing one, which was in a very bad shape following the Revolutionary War that had just come to an end. All over the world, revolutionaries have been shown to destabilize national economies.
In fact, some countries have been destroyed by revolutionaries because they lead to poor economic performances. In addition, it takes a lot of time for countries to recovers from the negative impacts of revolutionaries. However, the U.S. was able to make a great leap by learning from the revolutionary and the leaders acted to avoid uncertainties in the future.
The other problem was that it was not easy to recover from the debt resulting from the war, since the paper money that was issued in the course of the conflict had proved to be worthless. In order to succeed in this mission, the President together with the other key units in the government lacked other options, but to implement effective strategies that would help in stabilizing the country’s financial system.
The leaders understood that stabilizing the country’s financial system could help to grow and sustain the economy. Countries whose financial systems have suffered have encountered as a result of political revolutions or poor foreign policies face difficulties in growing their economies because their currencies lose value in international markets across the world.
Another big problem that faced the new government in the era of George Washington would be foreign policy issues. The new American government would constantly find itself getting into conflict with the Spanish government, which failed to recognize their western and southern boundaries. The George Washington’s regime was able to solve the boundary dispute with the Spanish government.
This gave the country a chance to concentrate on other activities to grow the economy. There was also a serious problem with the British forces, who extended their stay at Old Northwest forts, even after the 1783 Peace Treaty that had brought the Revolutionary War to an end. The leadership of the day was able to use strategies to solve problem of external aggression by the British government.
Other common issues facing the new federal government were observed in the government’s efforts to preserve the national independence of the country. More importantly, the new government was eager to establish a strong political system that would provide a lawfully begotten place for opposition.
Apart from the problems discussed above, there were also other numerous issues that affected the new Federal Government after the passing of the Constitution in the year 1787. Some of these issues included but were not limited to challenges associated with territorial expansion, diplomatic ties with the Native Americans, diplomatic relations with Europe and other Western powers, and regulation of interstate trade.
There was also the problem of consolidating public opinion and support on the new government system, since the American citizens had mixed reactions about the new Constitution. All these issues had brought serious challenges to the President George Washington and the new Federal Government.
However, the issues would play a significant role in strengthening the new governing in its future mission for the Americans. In fact, successful U.S. governments have been learning from the experiences underwent by the first U.S. government after the country gained independence.
Although the experiences were tough, the U.S. has been leading in terms of economic, political and military achievements, among other areas across the world.
Government Policies and Their Impact on Unequal Distribution of Wealth and Income Government policies are crucial in helping the government exercise its roles in the country in a successful manner. In most cases, the policies tend to influence or even determine the actions and decisions of the government on citizens. Generally, government policies are important, as they offer incentives which attract a certain value or disincentives that may suppress particular behaviors or actions.
Government policies which support individual and national efforts in economic building result in improved and sustained economic growth. On the other hand, government policies that do not support individual and national efforts in building the economy lead to slow and poor economic growth.
Through effective policies, the U.S. government has over the years managed to resolve many social, political, and economic issues affecting its diverse population. It has been established that economies cannot thrive in areas characterized by rampant social, political, economic issues.
Successful governments in the U.S. have been able to grow and sustain the economy by understanding the crucial interplay among political, social, and economic factors in the overall economic performance of a country. This significant goal has been achieved through the commitment of different government units who have always ensured that resources are equally distributed amongst the citizens using appropriate policies.
The U.S. government policies as they are adopted by different leaders over the years have continued to draw mixed reactions from the American population. While there are those who think that the policies have contributed to equal distribution of wealth and income, others presume that the policies have not been to anything better as far as the distribution of wealth and income is concerned.
However, their international critics argue that those who have been criticizing the government on the policies are not fair in their accusations. They argue that the U.S. policies have been leading across the world by enhancing distribution of wealth and income among citizens.
Even though there are incomplete answers about whether or not the government policies have achieved their goals in the society, it is clear that the policies have in fact helped to improve the wellbeing of the targeted people. In the last five decades, multiple U.S. presidents have come up with consistent policies aimed at addressing the unequal distribution of income among the Americans.
These policies, however, have increased income inequalities in the country, rather than helping to minimize them. The main reason behind this is the changing demographic patterns of the Americans. For instance, the increase in the number of single parents and the increase in the proportion of the aged people in the country have contributed largely in driving down U.S. incomes at the low end.
The dynamic demographic patterns in the U.S have led to a slowdown in the economic growth. It has been shown that a country does well economically when most of its population middle-aged.
Middle-aged persons are energetic and contribute a lot to economic activities that are geared towards building and sustaining the economy. On the other, a country characterized by a majority of citizens who are elderly is negatively impacted in terms of economic growth.
The other reason why government policies would lead to unequal distribution of income among the American citizens is because there are no strict laws or regulations in place to ensure that income redistribution is carried out fairly across various groups of people (Graham 109). Therefore, some groups are favored at the expense of others in terms of incomes.
A fair society is one in which all members are treated equally and access income fairly as encouraged by various policies that have direct and indirect impacts on incomes. There have been complaints about misappropriation, waste, and abuse of government money through income-transfer programs.
These ill practices will tend to lead to unequal distribution of income among the people. This explains the reason why actual benefits to the needy will tend to be much smaller in most cases, while it is clear that the government policies discharge enormous amounts of money every year. This would be solved in the future by ensuring that income-transfer programs are fair in their design and implementation.
In fact, they should be geared towards helping the poor. In addition, such programs should be evaluated regularly to ensure that the needy access the benefits intended by the programs. The regular evaluation will go a long way in preventing and minimizing waste, misappropriation, and abuse of government money and ensuring that the needy are helped in the society.
There is also the distribution of wealth, which according to financial experts, appears to be much more unequal in the U.S. compared to the distribution of income. The main reason why distribution of wealth remains unequal in the country is because relevant government policies have always made it difficult for everyone to comprehensively reveal information about their assets or holdings.
This way, it is not easy to acquire information about people’s wealth and possessions. The other concern here is that government policies have become less supportive of the demands of labor unions in terms of employees’ income and benefits.
This has over the time led to unequal distribution of income among different professionals in the country. As a result of this, the gap between what CEOs earn compared to what an average worker takes home has continued to widen. This has contributed to job dissatisfaction and poor performances by individuals at work.
Works Cited Graham, Hilary. “Social determinants and their unequal distribution: clarifying policy understandings.” Milbank Quarterly 82.1 (2004): 101-124. Print.
Payne, Stanley. A history of fascism, 1914-1945, Madison, WI: University of Wisconsin Press, 1996. Print.
The Common Law Background of the Fourth Amendment Essay writing essay help: writing essay help
Most of the legal declarations that make up the Bill of Rights, including the Fourth Amendment, were founded on the Common Law, which existed in the 16th and 17th century in England. As a matter of fact, three British law-related cases prompted the Fourth Amendment. Two out of the three cases were tried in England, and the other, adjudicated in America during the 17th century.
The two cases adjudicated in England, Entick v. Carrington in 1765 and Wilkes v. Wood in 1763, were about similar issues. In both cases, Entick and Wilkes were accused “of seditious libel” for indirectly condemning the king by criticizing his ministers.
The men disseminated written statements criticizing actions of the king. The king therefore passed a warrant that allowed his agents to search the residences of the men, and seize every written statement found. This action incited Entick and Wilkes to file lawsuits against the king for damages.
They claimed that it was not right for the king’s agents to search their residences in a forcible manner and impounded all their written properties.
Lord Camden, the judge in charge of the case, concurred with the plaintiffs and thereby made a pronouncement that the warrant issued by the king to carry out the search, as well as the actions of his agents were indeed wrong on the grounds that the issued warrant permitted the agents to confiscate all their written belongings instead of confiscating only the written materials that were pertinent to allegations, and that the warrant was passed in the absence of a reasonable cause.
Also, the Fourth Warrant was inspired by the case between English Monarchs and American colonies. British Crowns imposed taxes on colonists in order to clear war debts. This action forced American traders to smuggle goods in a bid to dodge exorbitant taxes.
As a result, the British crown issued General Warrant, also referred to as Writs of Assistance, to their custom officers, which empowered them to search and impound possessions of people suspected of smuggling items. The Writs of Assistance, permitted government officials to search and impound virtually anything without reasonable cause. Writs of Assistance attained loss of right in 1763, when the French and Indian War ended.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More This event led to the extinction of General Warrant. The Fourth Amendment was therefore incorporated into the United States Constitution in 1791 upon the enactment of the Bill of Rights. Even after acceptance of the Fourth Amendment, issues of search and seizure were not well recognized until 1914 when the Supreme Court case, Weeks v. United States, instituted the “exclusionary rule”.
As determined by this rule, the court will not recognize any evidence presented by the government that is contrary to the Fourth Amendment rights of the suspect, and such evidence is not sufficient to declare that person guilty.
In recent times, legal and political pundits have debated about the advantages of the exclusionary rule. Those against the rule argue that it abuses justice, and defends the guilty. Others in support of the rule are of the opinion that it prevents violation of human right by overzealous officers of the law.
Rich couples have lower divorce rates Research Paper essay help free
Table of Contents Abstract
Results and findings
Abstract Divorce is the termination of relationships between married couples. Divorce could be decided through a court litigation or mediation. Several factors have been shown to lead to increased rates of divorce in the society. This paper introduces the divorce topic by discussing the types, causes, and impacts of divorce. It presents three models for assessing whether the independent variables lead to lower rates of divorce among rich couples.
The paper discusses the anticipated data and how it would be collected and quantified for statistical analysis. Finally, the paper discusses the significance of the anticipated findings and offers a conclusion based on the research question.
Introduction Divorce refers to the termination of a union between the married couple. It involves ending all legal marital obligations. In many countries, divorce cases are sanctioned by courts through legal processes. However, the Philippines and the Vatican City are the only countries that do not allow divorce.
Divorce has been proven to be a stressful event that has influence on finances, lifestyles, and schedules of both people. The proposed study aims to answer the following research question:
Do financial stability, faithfulness, and sexual satisfaction contribute to lower divorce rates among rich couples?
Divorce cases among young and old married couples have been on the increase around the world in the recent decades. Several factors have been cited to cause the increase in divorce rates. It would be essential to understand the various aspects of divorce cases among couples so that measures could be implemented to help save marriages in the future.
Literature review There are many types of divorce across the world as stipulated by national laws. Contested divorce cases are taken to courts so that a judge can decide on the disputed issues. A divorce case is taken to court if a couple is not able to agree on some issues like child uptake and property sharing. Such cases take long periods of time to be concluded by judges, and the couple has to pay for legal representation in courts.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Once a verdict is given, a partner can feel dissatisfied and file an appeal. An appeal could be rejected or upheld based on the legal evidence produced in court. At-fault divorce requires one partner to allege that his or her partner has committed an act that is not acceptable in marriage. The acts committed by the partner could be unfaithfulness, abandonment and/or cruelty.
No-fault divorce does not require a partner to prove that his or her partner has committed one of such acts. Spouses could decide to part ways because they felt that their union could not work any longer. Still, a judge can consider factors like past violence and marital irresponsibility issues when deciding on division of property and children’s upkeep.
A summary divorce requires spouses to fulfil some legal requirements before they can be allowed to end their union. The legal requirements can be short marriages as defined by the law, minimal real property, and absence of children, among others. Uncontested divorce is the termination of marriage whereby both spouses agree on children’s upkeep, division of property and support issues without the use of mediators or lawyers.
A collaborative divorce is a termination of marriage whereby spouses are helped to reach a resolution with the assistance of attorneys. A mediated divorce is a termination of marriage which involves the use of mediators to facilitate sharing of marital property and children’s upkeep.
A mediated divorce is cheaper than a divorce which is taken to a court for litigation. Mediators can be financial analysts and counsellors who work to help a couple to understand and accept divorce issues.
Polygamous marriages have been shown to have more cases of divorce than monogamous marriages (Brinig
Neocolonialism and Global South Research Paper best essay help: best essay help
The term neocolonialism was coined by Kwame Nkrumah, a former President of Ghana to explain the political, social and economic control which can be propagated culturally, linguistically and economically.
The overall objective of the control is to enhance and promote the culture of the neocolonialist state(s) among the citizens of the targeted countries so as to get access to markets, labor and raw materials for corporations based in the neocolonialist state(s).
The key pillars of neocolonialism therefore include globalization, capitalism and imperialism. Neocolonialism is contrasted with colonialism, which implies direct military and political control of one state by another in a ruler-ruled relationship (Bauer and Holowinska 72).
Neocolonialism goes hand in hand with the concept of global divide which divides the world into global north and global south. The powerful nations popularly known as the first world make up the global north.
Such countries include the United States (US) and its allies who control the United Nations (UN) and are also members of the G8. The global north accounts for a quarter of world’s population but controls three quarters of world’s income. The citizens of such countries have access to education, health and shelter (Sartre 18).
The global south on the other hand comprises the developing or undeveloped countries majorly in Africa, Asia and Latin America. These countries account for three quarters of world’s population but they only control a quarter of the world’s income. In the global south, the access to health, education and shelter is usually a privilege of the few.
However, the global divide is not mainly influenced by geographical location of a country. If a country in Africa is able to compete economically with other western powers, it is put under the category of global north. Similarly, if a country in Europe is poor, it is put under the category of global south. In other words, the defining criteria is the economic stability of a country, not its geographical location.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Theoretical models for explaining neocolonialism Idealism theory
In international relations and foreign policy, idealism is a political philosophy which entails the advancement of a particular ideology (political, social or economic) both at home and abroad, with the aim of promoting and safeguarding the interests of citizens of a country and those of citizens in other countries.
Examples include the fight against poverty, HIV/AIDS and advocacy for democracy instead of dictatorship or authoritarianism as well as safeguarding of human rights.
This is a state centered international relations theory which looks at states as the key actors in international politics. The theory is based on the works of historical writers such as Rousseau, Machiavelli and Thucydides (Edkins and Vaughan-Williams 43). The main argument of realism is that international relations are characterized by anarchy, in which nations interact for their selfish interests.
Realism therefore negates the mutual understanding of nations in their relations and puts more emphasis on the struggle of nations to amass as much resources as possible in order to advance their own interests. With realism, economic success is the leading interest in international relations.
The US and its allies are known to promote democracy in many parts of Africa. However, a critical look at the issue shows that in most cases, the US is only interested in having democratic leaders who can help it gain access to markets and raw materials. Leaders who are not ready to cooperate are labeled as criminals, terrorists and unfit to hold office.
Such leaders and their countries are eventually slapped with economic sanctions and are also isolated by the international community. A good example is Robert Mugabe of Zimbabwe whose country has been isolated by the international community.
Globalization and neocolonialism Globalization can be defined as the minimization of the differences between people of the world and the maximization of their similarities through interactions, cooperation and communication.
We will write a custom Research Paper on Neocolonialism and Global South specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Before the world wars, the world was characterized by minimal interaction, communication, cross-border movements and language homogeneity. However, after the world wars, this situation changed. The changes were mainly triggered by the desire of nations of the world to unite in various spheres of development, mainly the economy, education, employment, environment and governance.
The main driving forces of globalization were however the advancement in Information and Communication Technology (ICT), improved transport systems, liberalized trade as well as liberalized immigration policies. Globalization has made it possible for any person to work, study, marry and stay in any part of the world irrespective of his or her culture.
After the world wars, a new form of globalization emerged. This was triggered by the new desire to unite the world through the three main development pillars, namely social, political and economic pillars.
Many states thought that the world wars were mainly caused by poor interaction between the nations, arguing that many countries did not care harming others as a result of the old economic philosophy which pegged development on elimination of rivals rather than the cooperation between stakeholders.
The contemporary form of globalization is characterized by the liberalization of trade, the emergence of multinational corporations as well as emergence of global institutions like the World Bank, the International Monetary Fund (IMF) and other UN affiliated institutions.
The advancement in ICT has transformed the world into a global village. Through ICT and improved means of transport, people are more than ever able to do business with each other without any form of barriers.
The developed countries have been in the forefront in propagating the idea of globalization. These countries led by the US usually view the developing countries as their imperial territories. They always ensure that there are in place rules and regulations governing the economic, social and political endeavors of the developing countries (Gills and Thompson 175).
They know that with a global culture in place, they are able to remain ahead by using resources from the developing and the undeveloped countries for their economic, social and political progress (Baylis, Smith and Owens 90).
Not sure if you can write a paper on Neocolonialism and Global South by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The developing countries are known as the markets of the western culture. Culture in this context is taken to mean business, educational, political and governance ideas. Many developing countries in Africa are known to have embraced what is referred to as export based agriculture at the expense of subsistence agriculture. This has led to recurrent food shortages in many developing countries (Buckman 42).
The trend began in early 1980s through what were referred to as Structural Adjustment Programs (SAPS), which required countries in Africa and Asia to embrace economic development at the expense of social and political development (Kelsey 95).
This led to the ever rising levels of poverty and population growth rates in the developing world, forcing them to comply with the policies of the new world order for the fear of economic and political sanctions from the developed countries (Konadu-Agyemang 219).
The undeveloped countries are those which have high poverty levels and illiteracy. Most of these countries are found in Africa and are described as living in the wrong civilization or being uncivilized. These countries are the best dumping sites for western culture. Most of the undeveloped countries are characterized by poor governance, ethnic strife and lack of basic social amenities.
Many analysts have however argued that the poverty and lack of infrastructure in the undeveloped countries can be attributed to the imperial nature of their relationships with their developed counterparts.
Forms of Neocolonialism Colonialism was very popular during the 19th century when the British, the US and other western powers scrambled for resources for their industries in the developing and undeveloped countries.
They used the ideas of religion and education to penetrate and gain control over the countries especially in Africa where there were no formal governments and institutions. Some western powers even went ahead to use the Africans as slaves due to ignorance of the African people.
With time, colonization was slowly brought to an end following the end of world wars. However, what the Africans and the developing countries did not know was that only flags of their countries changed.
Some political analysts have described the independence of many African and Asian countries as “independence of the flag”, meaning that even though the countries are independent, they can only exercise that independence to the extent of self governance alone.
What this means is that the countries are literally colonized but through ideas. It can therefore be argued that even though many developing countries were granted permission to govern themselves, their former colonies still maintained high economic, social and political dominance in their former colonies.
One of the ways in which neocolonialism has been propagated is through what is referred to as the odious debt. This is a debt which is incurred when a loan is given to a poor country but fails to benefit the citizens due to corruption by the leaders. Such countries also lack a clear economic policy to regulate investment, taxation and foreign debt.
The developed countries benefit from the debts because they charge high interest rates on the loans, which are not used for the economic progress of the poor countries but are misappropriated by the corrupt leaders. These dictators in return become loyal to the countries which give them the loans and thus the developed countries get an opportunity to exploit the markets, labor and raw materials of the developing countries.
There are also double standards even on genuine loans when it comes to repayment. When a country like the US gives a loan to another country like Germany or France, the loan is repaid with very little interest or even interest free.
However, when the same loan is given to a developing country, it is repaid with interest which is three to five times higher than what France or Germany would pay. The aim is to ensure that the developing countries do not become economically independent.
Neocolonialism is also propagated using international institutions like the IMF. This institution was formed with an aim of liberalizing the world’s economy to enable the developing countries get loans for their development (Kegley 46).
However, the problem with the IMF is that it gives loans to the developing countries with strings attached. One example to illustrate this is Jamaica, which was given a loan by IMF in 1977 to reconstruct the economy which had disintegrated in 1970.
However, the condition of the loan was that Jamaica was supposed to eliminate all labor laws and especially the law on minimum wage. This paved way for exploitation of the citizens by multinational corporations which underpaid the citizens of Jamaica.
The idea of International Law and neocolonialism International law refers to the set of laws or principles which govern the relationships between sovereign states (Fichtelberg 76). It was initially formed to govern the manner in which nations related to each other with a view of improving their relationships in regard to specific issues. International law initially took the form of treaties and agreements between states, which were either bilateral or multilateral.
The protection of human rights moved the international law to create the international criminal court to try the perpetrators of crimes against humanity.
Since its formation, the court has investigated several perpetrators of crimes against humanity like Charles Taylor of Liberia, Slobodan Milosevic of Yugoslavia and has issued a warrant of arrest against Sudanese president Omar Al Bashir for the chaos and atrocities in the Darfur region of the Sudan.
However, the court has attracted criticism from political analysts who have accused it of double standards in that it only targets the developing countries.
The super powers of the world like the US, which refused to be a signatory to the Rome statute which formed the court, have never been subjected to the court’s jurisdictions despite the fact that they have committed crimes of aggression against other states like the Iraq invasion in 2003.
My prescription on how the international community should deal with the issue of neocolonialism is for international institutions such as the UN and its affiliated institutions to ensure that the international law is followed to the letter.
The UN in particular should seek to empower the developing and undeveloped countries with social, political and economic resources for them to resist any attempts of neocolonialism by the US and its allies.
Works Cited Bauer, Franziska, and Magdalena Holowinska. Colonialism and Neo-Colonialism. München GRIN: Verlag GmbH, 2009. Print.
Baylis, John, Steve Smith, and Patricia Owens. The Globalization of World Politics: An Introduction to International Relations. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2010. Print.
Buckman, Greg. Globalization: Tame it or Scrap it? : Mapping the Alternatives of the Anti-Globalization Movement. London: Zed Books, 2004. Print.
Edkins, Jenny, and Nick Vaughan-Williams. Critical Theorists in International Relations. London: Routledge, 2009. Print.
Fichtelberg, Aaron. Law at the Vanishing Point: A Philosophical Analysis of International Law. Farnham GU9 7PT: Ashgate Publishing, 2005. Print.
Gills, Barry, and William Thompson . Globalization and Global History; Rethinking Globalizations. London: Routledge, 2006. Print.
Kegley, Charles. World Politics: Trend and Transformation. Boston, MA: Cengage Learning, 2009. Print.
Kelsey, Jane. International economic regulation. Sheffield: Ashgate Publishers, 2002. Print.
Konadu-Agyemang, Kwado. IMF and World Bank Sponsored Structural Adjustment Programs in Africa: Ghana’s Experience, 1983-1999.Voices in Development Management. Sheffield: Ashgate Publishers, 2001. Print.
Sartre, Jean-Paul. Colonialism and Neocolonialism. New York: Routledge, 2001. Print.
A Critical Review of The Realm of God’s Providence from the Arminian and Calvinist Perspectives Research Paper best college essay help
Introduction All religions in the world respect the existence of a divine nature or order of things in the universe. In such an arrangement, humans interact with the Supreme Being that is God.1 In this regard, providence is taken as the manner in which God intervenes in the world. There are certain events and occurrences in the world that suggest the intervention of a Supreme Being.
Such events include the existence of the universe itself, the interaction between the world and the rest of the entire solar system, and the existence of life on earth. As a theological concept, providence is divided into two categories. The two categories are special and general providence.
In both cases, the link between God and man is explained. However, like all philosophical issues, debate on the realm of God’s providence has always been looked at differently by various players in theological circles.
In the current paper, the author acknowledges the fact that there are multiple variables that bring about debate in the providence of God’s realm. Towards this end, the author looks at two particular variables in the providence debate.
According to Boyd and Eddy, the two main perspectives of God’s providence are the Calvinist and Arminian views.2 In this paper, the author examines each of the two perspectives at length. In this regard, the paper examines their respective merits and demerits.
The objective of this paper is to determine whether or not there are alternative opinions that respect the two perspectives, based on their merits. To this end, the author restricts their arguments to God’s control over occurrences in the world.
Lutzer affirms that the world acts as the habitat for humans. The various choices made by humans are based on, among others, the various occurrences in the world.3 In this paper, the author associates God’s interventions in the world to the choices that man makes on a daily basis.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The Realm of God’s Providence: A Critical Analysis Wilson observes that providence is an avenue through which God provides divine guidance to mankind.4 The doctrine is one among the many associated with Christianity. Most of these doctrines are not explained in scriptures, but are alluded to in the various passages that make up the Bible.
Wilson adds that the Word, when observed from a grammatical perspective, allows one to comprehend the omniscient nature of God. In this regard, there is the introduction of the concept of a ‘hidden hand’ that is responsible for providing help to mankind.5 The hidden hand is divine in nature, and it is seen as informing the decisions made by mankind in the world.
The providence of God is controversial in contemporary society. Different religious scholars have adopted different views with regards to this concept. Such diverging viewpoints are informed by the individual scholars’ personal, religious, and professional orientations. Boice argues that there are numerous aspects of the secular world that are not in agreement with the belief in an all powerful God.
According to religious adherents, such secular views allow calamity to befall man.6 In this regard, Boice makes a secular observation that there is evil in the world despite the world being under the rule of a good and all knowing God.7
There are several calamities in the world that afflict mankind. Some of the calamities are natural. They include drought, floods, and earthquakes. However, some of them are manmade. They include wars, crime and such others. Boice makes reference to past encounters with such calamities and how they are referred to as acts of God.8
However, it is important to note at this juncture that some people refer to these calamities as the work of God, while others try to explain them from a scientific point of view. The great debate about providence revolves around the control that God has over man and other creations that exist in the universe.
Is God to blame for the calamities that befall man, or has He allowed the events in the world to happen without His interference? That is the big question. Thus, it is important to understand the various variables and nuanced positions around this subject matter.
We will write a custom Research Paper on A Critical Review of The Realm of God’s Providence from the Arminian and Calvinist Perspectives specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The Variables and Nuanced Positions in the Realm of God’s Providence Overview
According to Boice, providence implies that the universe and all that is in it was created by God.9 In this regard, Boice introduces a school of thought that presupposes creation. According to this school of thought, God has not abandoned His creation. Such a presupposition is opposed to the secular insinuation that God has no control over the afflictions that befall man.
To counter this secularist position, providence implies that God is still in charge and relies on His own counsel to govern the affairs of man. Consequently, there are several variables around this topic which help shed some light on this debate.
Does the Universe exist on its own Elements?
The debate on providence is usually triggered by sentiments that allude to God being an absentee administrator of the earth. However, Boice observes that even though nature is in a constant state of change, there seems to be an ordered pattern to these events.10
In essence, there seems to be some uniformity in nature. That notwithstanding, there is no scientific explanation as to the source of the uniformity. In a nutshell, the developments are baffling to man.
In their argument, Boice makes reference to the Bible. Boice quotes Hebrews Chapter 1 verse 13. The verse is used to suggest that the uniformity in nature comes from God.11
The perspective brought into light is that providence cannot be explained by the physical characteristics of the world. In this light, the omniscient and omnipotent ability of God is used to prove that He still runs the world, albeit beyond human understanding.
The Rules of God
In the opinion of Emerson, God has ascribed several rules through which man’s actions are governed.12 To this end, God’s providence is observed in the consequences associated with the act of going against the rules He has put in place.
The implication, in this regard, is that God is a sovereign Being and His providence extends beyond one’s obedience to His rules. Emerson makes reference to a passage in the Bible, where Jonah disobeyed a direct instruction from God. That notwithstanding, God was able to intervene and ensure His instructions were met.
Not sure if you can write a paper on A Critical Review of The Realm of God’s Providence from the Arminian and Calvinist Perspectives by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The Conflicting Perspectives in the Providence Debate
In the opinion of Boyd and Eddy, the raging debate on God’s providence revolves around two major topics.13 As aforementioned, the two conflicting perspectives are the Calvinist and Arminian views on providence. In this section, the paper examines each of the perspectives in terms of their characteristics and merits.
However, Boyd and Eddy affirm that both perspectives agree on the fact that the world is governed by God.14 Lutzer points out that the divergence in the two perspectives is in the ‘how’ God’s authority is felt in the world.15
The Calvinist View and the Providence Debate
Boyd and Eddy point out that the Calvinist perspective on providence in God’s realm is unique in itself. According to this view, God has ultimate control over the affairs of man, including his actions and their outcomes.16
The Calvinist view was advanced by John Calvin at the time when Christians were breaking ranks with the doctrines of the Roman Catholic Church. The principles underlying this theological perspective are summarized under the acronym TULIP. The principles make up the merits of this perspective.
Lutzer outlines each of the letters in the acronym TULIP as follows:
Lutzer uses the outcomes of Adam and Eve’s disobedience to God to explain this point. According to Lutzer, the outcomes of this act were passed on to subsequent generations.
Consequently, the ability to commit sin was passed on to all humanity. As a result, man is rendered helpless with regards to comprehending the teachings of God, hence the need for salvation.17 In this regard, God’s providence is seen in the way He eventually sends the Holy Spirit to act as a helper in understanding the scriptures and in growing in salvation.
Pink associates this principle to the concept of predestination. The implication here is that there is a group of people whom God has already elected.18 Their election qualifies them to understand the teachings of God. On the other hand, there is a group of people who are destined to spend their eternity in hell with the torture therein.
Similar to the natural occurrence of things in nature, unconditional election assumes that God made the aforementioned selection before creation.19 In this regard, the wayward nature of sinners is considered part of the grand scheme of God’s plans. God knew that they will turn out the way they did.
Calvin argues that the death of Christ was meant to save the whole of mankind.20 The theologian’s implication is that the death of Christ acted as a sacrifice for sins of persons believed to have been saved.
Calvin points out that the individuals that God has elected for salvation are under a calling.21 Calvin adds that the elected cannot escape the knowledge of God.
Perseverance of the Saints
Calvin advances this principle to imply that salvation is a one- off occurrence in the life of an individual.22 To this end, salvation continues as a result of God’s intervention to make an individual perfect to occupy space in heaven.
Arminian Views and the Providence Debate
Prussic points out that these perceptions were advanced by a Dutch theologian named Jarcobus Armenius.23 Prussic points out that the Arminian perspective of God’s authority over the world makes reference to choices. To this end, choices are inevitable actions to mankind. Consequently, God is the one who dictates for the existence of that choice.24
The significant merit in this perspective is that humans have a free will to make decisions on various actions. In this regard, God is not viewed as the cause of sin since He has no control over the choices made by an individual.
However, the Arminian perspective on God’s providence elicits debate due to a number of factors. That choices are judged by God imputes that His authority is secondary to man’s.25 The argument, in this case, questions why a Super Being like God would judge the actions of His creation.
In addition, whereas the Arminian perspective on God’s authority over the world respects Him as being in charge, it belittles His ability of being an all knowing figure. Prussic argues that this perspective implies that God relies on man as the source of His knowledge.
Other merits of this perspective include the fact that depravity does not, in any way, inhibit mankind from making choices based on their free will.26 Further, the Arminian view suggests that people are not pre-elected into salvation like argued in the case of the Calvinist view.
Rather, this perspective introduces faith as the requirement for election into eternal salvation.27 The Arminian view also suggests that everyone is eligible to be called the child of God, only if they accept to be saved.
Arminian view of God’s reign over the world suggests that since people have free will to exercise their choices, it follows then that they can resist the help of the Holy Spirit.28
To this end, man is capable of resisting conversion that results from salvation. Finally, the Arminian perspective relies on man’s free will to guarantee him salvation. In this regard, man is allowed the freedom to believe in the promises of God in order to be saved from eternal damnation.
Notwithstanding the free will that is characteristic of the Arminian view, Prussic cautions that this perspective appears to be an avenue for reducing the power of God.29 The scholar argues that,
God works ALL things after the counsel of His will. See, the Bible exalts God’s will over man’s. Arminianism turns this on its head, exalting the will of man over God’s. Indeed, Arminianism SUBJECTS the will of God to man’s will. It makes God’s knowledge dependent upon men. Does this Arminianism sound like the religion of the Bible? Not for a second. It smacks of humanism. (Prussic 2010, par. 7).
The aspect of free will in this perspective lowers the place of God in the hierarchy. It subordinates God to man. Consequently, His intervention in the affairs of man is not given much attention owing to the perceived inability on His part to dictate what man should and should not do.
Conclusion In this paper, the author examined the two main perspectives that elicit debate on God’s providence. The author affirms that there are alternative views to both perspectives. For example, the doctrine of humanism is brought into light by the mere fact that man has the freedom to do as he pleases. It is expected that man will make choices that guarantee his salvation from damnation.
Humanism also incorporates some elements of Calvinism in that man is qualified to become a child of God. Consequently, the perspective implies that man can choose to become a child of God by accepting Jesus as the Savior. Thus, providence of God’s realm is all about the opinions that people formulate around His position as a ruler of the world.
Bibliography Blanton, Gregg. “Integrating Postmodern and Christian Contemplative Thought: Building a Theoretical Framework.” Journal of Psychology and Christianity 27, no. 1 (2008): 73.
Boice, James. “God’s Providence.” The Highway. 2013. Web.
Boyd, Gregory, and Paul Eddy. Across the Spectrum: Understanding Issues in Evangelical Theology. Grand Rapids: Baker Academic, 2009.
Calvin, John. Institutes of Christian Religion. Philadelphia: McNeill, 1960.
Emerson, Tyler. “The Role of the Providence Debate in the Theory and Practice of Counseling.” Yahoo Voices. 2008. Web.
Eric, Johnson. “Describing the Self within Redemptive History.” Journal of Psychology and Christianity 19, no. 1 (2002): 5-24.
Lutzer, Erwin. The Doctrines that Divide: A Fresh Look at the Historic Doctrines that Separate Christians. Grand Rapids: Kregel Publications, 1998.
Pink, Arthur. The Sovereignty of God. Grand Rapids: Baker Book House, 2000.
Prussic, Tim. “An Arminian View of God.” Word Press. 2010. Web.
Wilson, Kevin. “The Providence Debate – Calvinism Vs Arminians.” Scribd. 2013. Web.
Footnotes 1. Gregg Blanton, “Integrating Postmodern and Christian Contemplative Thought: Building a Theoretical Framework,” Journal of Psychology and Christianity 27, no. 1 (2008): 73.
2. Gregory Boyd and Paul Eddy, Across the Spectrum: Understanding Issues in Evangelical Theology (Grand Rapids: Baker Academic, 2009), 67.
3. Johnson Eric, “Describing the Self within Redemptive History,” Journal of Psychology and Christianity 19, no. 1 (2002): 5.
4. Kevin Wilson, “The Providence Debate – Calvinism Vs Arminians,” 2013.
5. Wilson, “The Providence Debate.”
6. James Boice, “God’s Providence,” The Highway.
7. Boice, “God’s Providence.”
8. Boice, “God’s Providence.”
9. Boice, “God’s Providence.”
10. Boice, “God’s Providence.”
11. Boice, “God’s Providence.”
12. Tyler Emerson, “The Role of the Providence Debate in the Theory and Practice of Counseling,” Yahoo Voices, 2008. Web.
13. Boyd and Eddy, Across the Spectrum, 67-89.
14. Boyd and Eddy, Across the Spectrum, 67-89.
15. Erwin Lutzer, The Doctrines that Divide: A Fresh Look at the Historic Doctrines that Separate Christians (Grand Rapids: Kregel Publications, 1998), 64-76.
16. Lutzer, The Doctrines that Divide, 65.
17. Lutzer, The Doctrines that Divide, 66.
18. Lutzer, The Doctrines that Divide, 67.
19. Arthur Pink, The Sovereignty of God (Grand Rapids: Baker Book House, 2000), 91-120.
20. John Calvin, Institutes of Christian Religion (Philadelphia: McNeill, 1960), 73-75.
21. Calvin, Institutes of Christian Religion, 74.
22. Calvin, Institutes of Christian Religion, 75.
23. Tim Prussic, “An Arminian View of God,” Word Press.
24. Prussic, “An Arminian View of God.”
25. Prussic, “An Arminian View of God.”
26. Eric, “Describing the Self,” 18.
27. Eric, “Describing the Self,” 24.
28. Prussic, “An Arminian View of God.”
29. Prussic, “An Arminian View of God.”
Managing Organizational Change by Graetz, F., Rimmer, M., Lawrence, A. and Smith, A. Essay (Book Review) college essay help near me
The relationship between strategic planning and strategic thinking in relation to the management of change Strategic planning involves analysis, establishment, and formalization of procedures and systems. Strategic thinking synthesizes and encourages creativity and intuition across all organizational levels. It aims at innovating and imagining a better future that may cause an organization to redefine its major strategies and/or industry.
Strategic planning, on the other hand, aims at realizing and encouraging strategies initiated in the strategic thinking processes. Formulating and implementing strategic thinking is interactive, whereas strategic planning involves specialization. In strategic thinking, subordinate managers participate directly in strategy-making.
However, in strategic planning, senior managers gather information from subordinate managers and apply it in creating a plan that all managers use for implementation. Graetz’s study of the “Communications Co.” indicates that an organisation needs leaders with emotional intelligence to lead the way in strategic thinking. This is because the process requires full concentration on details.
The two thought processes maintain each other in order to promote effective strategic management. The sphere of strategic planning is deliberate, rational and analytical. Strategic thinking involves intuitive, creative, and emergent thinking. Good planning encompasses both strategies.
Balancing between the two helps in avoiding problems related to the adoption of either over-rationalistic, prescriptive schemes, or unrealistic designs, which have high chances of failure.
Differences between leadership and management in relation to management of change Leadership triggers action that initiates change while management aims at making change operations effective. Change leadership focuses on aligning people to the vision of the organization.
Leadership is the ability to communicate, inspire, and influence employees to work toward the realization of the organization’s goals. Leadership in the 21st Century seeks to understand and manage situational and follower attributes, rather than to divide and control them.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Change management involves a set of fundamental processes aimed at controlling any development effort. These processes weigh performance, staffing, budgeting, planning, and problem-solving in cases where the outcome is not as expected. Effective running of an organization requires proper balancing between leadership and management. The target-setting approach works well when there is good leadership.
Target-setting is useful in focusing attention on individual operations. Successful operations require organizations to demonstrate leadership by placing emphasis on the significance of the operation. Leaders should inspire employees by demonstrating the manner in which set targets contribute toward the organization’s aims.
Whereas leadership and management are different, the skills required in both concepts naturally overlap. Great managers are also leaders. A manager must also demonstrate great leadership skills when managing a team. Emotional intelligence is a key requirement for leaders in the contemporary business world.
Reward and performance management strategies that change employee behavior There are different reward and performance management strategies that organizations use to leverage change in employee behavior. HRM strategies are a major function of human resource professionals and managers. The types of strategies applied determine the quality of employees for an organization and the degree of performance of work.
Performance management focuses on the processes designed to manage the performance of the organization, group, and individual against the objectives of the organization. The organization’s objectives should relate to departmental, team, and individual objectives.
Communication of the objectives in all levels of organizational change enables all employees to embrace change. The organization and employees need a chance to weigh the intended and actual impact of the objectives. Managers and leaders should take necessary steps to improve performance.
Reward management is about allocation of rewards such as promotion and pay for desired outputs. Human resource professionals and managers should ensure that appropriate benefits and rewards reinforce the desired behaviors and outcomes.
We will write a custom Book Review on Managing Organizational Change by Graetz, F., Rimmer, M., Lawrence, A. and Smith, A. specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Rewards should focus on encouraging the business and change objectives and the desired culture of the organization. In addition, they should meet the concerns and needs of employees, including purchasing power, equity and need satisfaction in terms of influence, appreciation, recognition, and career development.
Change Tools Lean production refers to operations management approach driven by three targets: zero waste, zero inventory, and zero defects. Zero waste and zero defects relate to consistent improvement designs that are dependent on multi-skilled teams. Zero inventory depends on timely supply chain management in which the order of operation sets off production.
Learning development tools include double-loop learning, single-loop learning, and haphazard learning. Double-loop learning concerns feeding staff input on learning to guide the objectives of performance. Single-loop learning goes in line with performance objectives. Haphazard learning lacks the process of reinforcing positive lessons.
Total Quality Management (TQM) is an established change technique. TQM focuses on the needs and concerns of customers. There are three approaches to quality: quality circles, quality assurance, and statistical quality control. TQM puts emphasis on team-work, communication, cultural factors, and group problem-solving techniques.
The condition of the environment
Best practice and partnership involve consistent improvement in delivery, quality, and cost. The organization develops closer links to clients and suppliers. The organization utilizes technology for strategic advantage. There are human resource policies that ensure consistent flexibility, participation, teamwork, and learning.
Strengths and weaknesses
Business Process Re-engineering (BPR) eliminates structures developed around narrow functional tasks. It recommends integrated business processes whereby new processes replace old processes.
The Wisconsin Cooperative Movement Essay essay help free: essay help free
The agricultural sector plays a very important role in any economy. It is important to note that no country has ever developed without first strengthening its agricultural sector. However, agricultural products are not easy to market and they usually attract low prices compared to other goods.
On the same note, value addition for agricultural products requires heavy capital investments which are out of reach for most individual farmers. However, collectively farmers can have influence over prices and also be able to bargain for increased market share (Janus, 2011, p. 135). Consequently, farmers in many parts of the world have organized themselves into cooperative unions.
These cooperatives have been very influential in the fight for better prices as well as technically supporting farmers. It is important to note that Wisconsin farmers have not been left behind as far as cooperatives are concerned.
A cooperative is defined as a group of people with similar interests who have pulled resources together for their common benefit. It is important to note that cooperatives are non profit making organizations and their main aim is to advance members’ welfare. Historically, cooperatives have been depicted to be autonomous groups of people who aim at mutual social, economic and cultural benefits.
In this regard, cooperatives are supposed to act as collection centers of products from farmers. Cooperatives also help in streamlining the supply chain system to ensure efficiency. On the same note, cooperative societies organize marketing of the products of farmers at good prices (Monaghan, 2008, p. 93).
Additionally, cooperatives help farmers by giving them inputs of production. It is important to note that while small scale farmers find it difficult to individually produce commodities for commercial purposes, cooperatives easily achieve this because several producers bring their products together.
In this regard, people join cooperatives because of various reasons. Producers want to have a steady market for their products and joining cooperatives is one way of achieving this. On the same note, people seek better representation in legislative and regulatory boards, a function which cooperatives achieve effectively.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More More importantly, producers will always go for the best terms of trade. Consequently, they will be willing to join cooperatives since by joining hands with others they are able to bargain for better terms of trade.
The history of cooperatives in Wisconsin dates back to 1800’s when people decided to work together. However, the specific date when cooperatives started is a subject of debate. In the early 19th century, there were several groups of milk farmers who acted collectively in various aspects. The first group that was recognized as a cooperative for production of cheese in United States was started around 1841 in Jefferson County, Wisconsin.
Due to the success of the cheese cooperative, there was formation of many other cooperatives in the years that followed. In the beginning, people came together strictly for cooperative purposes (Hubbell, 2007, p. 49). However, private enterprises invaded the field and changed the spirit of communal activities.
Initially, every factory sold its products on its own, either to individual people or to a group of people. These people, either from the local area or from other counties, came to the factories where prices were bargained and agreements reached. This system led to many problems including price variability. Consequently, cheese boards were developed to assist in negotiation of prices between buyers and sellers. Through this system, a base price was set which was used to pay farmers for their products.
As a result, there was uniformity across the industry. Unfortunately, large cheese dealers and packers used their influence to manipulate the industry and fixed low selling prices which negatively impacted the producers (Monaghan, 2008, p. 87). This was achieved through the board of Plymouth, Wisconsin. Farmers then decided to form another group that would work for their benefit.
This led to formation of the Sheboygan County Cheese Producer’s federation by forty three cheese factories under the leadership of Henry Krumrey. The main agenda of this formation was to sell cheese of member factories. The federation was started in 1914 and has tremendously grown with its members increasing from 43 to over 400. The federation suffered a set back when it was prevented from selling on the Plymouth board while at the same time penalties were imposed on its members.
Moreover, the federation faced opposition from dealers, packers as well as cheese makers. Despite all these, the federation has evolved to become very influential. It also changed its name to Wisconsin Cheese Producers Federation and later to National Cheese Producers’ Federation (Torgerson, 2006, p. 153). The federation strives to ensure that consumers and producers of cheese trade fairly. In this regard, the federation ensures enhancement of quality and efficiency in supply chain.
We will write a custom Essay on The Wisconsin Cooperative Movement specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More On the other hand, butter producers have also been organizing themselves into cooperatives. While butter production started mainly as a small scale affair, increase in demand led to the need to increase production. Consequently, factories were built to help in large scale production of butter (Janus, 2011, p. 141). This led to rapid increase of butter production in Wisconsin State.
Due to the increase in production and the emergence of the factory system, it became necessary to combine forces. This led to the emergence of cooperative creameries that aimed at enhancing efficiency in production and distribution. The Wisconsin Cooperative Creamery Federation is one of the cooperatives that were formed. The cooperative’s main aim was to inform people on the importance of pulling forces together to improve quality and reduce expenses by cutting some costs (Torgerson, 2006, p. 314).
Other butter producers joined together to form the Land O’Lakes Creameries. This was a relatively larger cooperative with members drawn from Minnesota, Wisconsin, and Iowa. The Creameries aimed at ensuring uniformity in quality of butter sold across the region. Conquering the market through insistent marketing was a vital strategy for the Land O’Lakes Creameries.
It is important to note that other dairy products like condensed milk and market milk have also had their cooperatives. However, these cooperatives have been consolidated in the recent years. Nevertheless, cooperatives continue to reorganize with time due to the changes in the business environment.
Cooperatives are started with the aim of increasing bargaining power in the market. This vision is achieved by ensuring that there is a wide variety of products under the control of cooperatives. In this regard, many cooperatives have grouped together to form mergers. These large scale cooperatives always control supply through membership and contract agreement. On the same note, these cooperatives engage in continuous research to increase market for their products.
They also keep buffer stocks to ensure smooth supply of products throughout the period thus avoiding seasonal interruption in supply (Hubbell, 2007, p. 63). Moreover, cooperatives usually aim at increasing the quality of products that pass through their supply channels so as to enhance demand. Besides increasing the numbers of customers, high quality products are known to attract high prices.
If every single producer is left to sell his or her products, it would be very difficult to get good prices. The small quantity of output that each single farmer gets will not enable them to have any influence in the market. Similarly, delivery of the products to respective customers would be impossible due to the large transportation costs involved.
As a result, cooperatives come in handy to assist producers especially farmers. By collecting products from different farmers, quantity increases thus enabling cooperatives to have high bargaining power.
Not sure if you can write a paper on The Wisconsin Cooperative Movement by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More On the same note, cooperatives ensure that members effectively get information about the markets. Moreover, cooperatives arrange for distribution which is usually efficient. In addition, cooperatives are able to minimize costs by eradicating some unnecessary expenses.
There are various factors that affect performance of cooperative movements and the cooperative spirit. To begin with, cooperatives are known to be involved in aggressive marketing in a move that is meant to increase their market share. This may involve discounts, promotions and offers that are meant to attract customers. All these reduce the income of cooperatives and end up reducing the income of producers.
It should be noted that the overall outcome is against the reason of joining cooperatives, which is to increase returns on products (Hubbell, 2007, p. 49). On the same note, research has shown that prices are usually lower in markets dominated by cooperatives. This is because distribution is efficient and any increase in demand is satisfied without the consumer having to strain.
Similarly, sometimes cooperatives find it difficult to balance between the need for efficiency and democracy. While cooperatives are formed on the principle of democracy, efficiency is their main aim. Unfortunately, both democracy and efficiency cannot always be achieved at the same time.
Moreover, though cooperatives are formed by producers to benefit them, people have to be employed to run their day to day affairs. Additionally, cooperatives work through agents who help in the channels of distribution. This relationship brings about the problem of who should benefit first. In many cases, cooperative members are pushed to the back and are only given what remains after others have been satisfied.
Despite the global shift towards large scale and fewer dairy cooperatives, Wisconsin continues to have smaller but successful dairy cooperatives. However, the farmers are changing their mode of operations as well as their demands.
Consequently, cooperatives will need to undergo structural changes to meet the dynamic needs of members (Monaghan, 2008, p. 112). On the same note, cooperatives will need to advance their services to cater not only for their members, but also the highly selective customers due to technological advancement.
Wisconsin is among the states with the highest number of farmers. Consequently, the state plays a crucial role in the United States of America’s dairy industry. It is also crucial to note that agriculture, and more specifically dairy farming, contributes highly to the economy of Wisconsin.
In this regard, dairy cooperatives play a major role in the economy since they are involved with the collection and marketing of dairy products. As a result, efforts should be made to ensure that the main aim of joining cooperatives is met.
References Hubbell, J. W. (2007). Minneapolis: Urban-environmental Change in the Upper Mississippi, 1824-1924. Ann Arbor: Proquest.
Janus, E. (2011). Creating Dairyland: How Caring for Cows Saved Our Soil, Created Our Landscape, Brought Prosperity to Our State, and Still Shapes Our Way of Life in Wisconsin. Madison: Wisconsin Historical Society.
Monaghan, P. (2008). Wineries of Wisconsin and Minnesota. Madison: Minnesota Historical Society.
Torgerson, R. E. (2006). Truman Torgerson: Leadership Straight from the Shoulder. Bloomington: AuthorHouse.
The painting “Planting Chrysanthemums” Term Paper college essay help online
Table of Contents Introduction
Sense of Space
Delicateness of the Lines
Shading and Coloring
Depiction of Land, River and Sky
Introduction In examining the painting “Planting Chrysanthemums” by Lu Zhi, it can be seen that it possesses stylistic elements found in the types of hanging scroll paintings during the Ming Dynasty. It is interesting to note that this particular painting was a gift to Lu Zhi’s friend Tao Yuanming (considered one of the greatest Chinese poets) who, at the time, had recently gone into seclusion/retirement when this painting was given.
The reason behind this, as indicated by historical accounts and his own poems, was his aversion towards his career in the military and the sordid politics of the Jin dynasty.
The painting was thus meant as a means of reinvigorating the mind of Yuanming by show casing a calming and ethereally peaceful scene. Lu Zhi’s “Planting Chrysanthemums” invokes a sense of openness through the depiction of a vast clam space in which the viewer observes a land devoid of conflict where peace and calmness reign.
Sense of Space When examining the painting, one cannot help but see the disparity between the clustered trees, rocks and objects at the bottom to the huge expanse of open space on the top. I believe that this stylistic element was intentional on the part of the artist to enhance the feeling of openness and space within the work wherein the viewer cannot help but attempt to imagine what lies beyond the open expanse that has been showcased.
The result of such introspection is a feeling of insignificance wherein one things that the problems that they have experienced through their life is insignificant compared to the vastness of the world in front of them.
Delicateness of the Lines In the case of “Planting Chrysanthemums” a heavier shading style on the lines of the painting is eschewed in favor of a lighter and more delicate appearance in the formation of the lines and the shading of the mountains and trees. As it can be seen, a considerable degree of detailing was done in the foreground (i.e. the rocks and trees) and fades as one looks up and to the clouds.
This is of course a recurring element in a large percentage of ancient and modern artwork that depicts vast landscapes, however, in the case of Planting Chrysanthemums” this helps to expand on the feeling of calm openness that the painter was attempting to accentuate. Another facet of the work that should be pointed out is the level of detail that went into trees and rocks.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Even though the painting is supposed to merely depict a landscape and such level of detail is not necessarily, the fact that it is there helps to accentuate the work as a whole by making it seem like a faded picture rather than a mere painting. It was likely the artist’s intent to make the painting seem as a realistic as possible to further enhance the sense of openness as the viewers eye’s shift from the detailed bottom to the open sky and mountains on top.
Shading and Coloring The painting primarily uses tones of brown and green to help enhance the realism of the trees and mountains, however, these colors are applied in a very light and soft manner thereby creating a more surreal image which does not force its realism onto the viewer but rather transitions them into an appreciation of the quiet nature of the both the painting and the scene it is trying to depict.
The different levels of light tones and shading which grow considerably less pronounced as one views up the scroll is, I believe, an intentional aspect of this painting wherein the rubbed out and light shading effect was meant to depict some form of mist like setting in the foreground and background of the painting.
This helps to accentuate the ethereal quality of the work which many art scholars apparently relate to Lu Zhi’s interpretation of an ever distant utopia that is eternally peaceful.
Depiction of Land, River and Sky Another facet of the painting that should be explored is the apparent transitory nature of land to river. In the very middle of the painting we can see what appears to be the home of Lu Zhi yet as you look up it seems to take on the characteristics of a river. In fact, from a top down perspective it even seems to be a river from the mountains flowing down.
This can actually be considered as an abstract concept being incorporated into an early Chinese work of art wherein the normal boundaries depicting a separation between land, river and sky is removed. I believe this is an intentional aspect of the work since based on the inscription of the author the home of his friend is near the sea.
As such, the seemingly combined nature of land, river and sky can be considered a subtle message saying that despite the distance between them they will always be connected.
We will write a custom Term Paper on The painting “Planting Chrysanthemums” specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Conclusion ” Lu Zhi’s “Planting Chrysanthemums” invokes a sense of openness through the depiction of a vast clam space in which the viewer observes a land devoid of conflict where peace and calmness reign. This, I believe, is one of the reasons why “Planting Chrysanthemums” is a more celebrated work of Chinese art from this time period as compared to other examples since its is both different, in the sense that it uses a lighter style of outlining and shading, but familiar due to the thematic elements seen within which were prevalent in the Ming Dynasty.
Review: What is this “Mother Fxxker with a Hat” All About? Essay college essay help near me: college essay help near me
Whenever someone sits down to watch a play that has such a controversial title, one does so expecting anything. The performances in “The Mother Fxxker with the Hat” live up to this expectation. The play is mostly a high-octane shouting match that has the actors’ foaming mouths showering the front row audience with spit.
The shouting matches aside, the comedy rich play is still a beautiful ensemble of talent. The title of the play should not lead anyone into thinking that the performance in this play is reckless.
“The Mother Fxxker with the Hat” was scripted by Stephen Adly Guirgis and it is now showing at the San Francisco Playhouse. The staging at Playhouse marks the West coast’s premiere of Guirgis’ play. The play premiered on Broadway in 2011 featuring a star-studded cast. The production is done under the direction of Bill English.
In the production’s program, the director notes that Guirgis’ characters are always meant to be on the path of discovering their spirituality. English makes references to actors in another of Guirgis’ production known as “Judas Iscariot”. In this latest production, the supposedly spiritual characters are struggling addicts who are embroiled in a fusion of jealousy, love, and addiction.
The performances in this play are supposed to be comical all through save for some moments near the end of the play. The cast of this play is magnificent to say the least. The actors bring out Guirgis’ comedy with starling prowess.
The main character is Jackie a former drug dealer who is being released from prison after a two-year sentence. Gabriel Marin presents a very likeable Jackie who is determined to finish his parole without incident. To accomplish this, Jackie joins a twelve-step rehabilitation program.
Gabriel Marin is able to shift his performance from the calm Jackie we first meet to the out of control Jackie who suspects his girlfriend of cheating. The shifts in his emotions are seamless and he is able to carry his audience through a journey of emotions, anger, and raw comedy. As the performer who has to interact with most of the other characters, the success of other performers depends a lot on his performance.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In this play, Marin the main performer is taking a comically charged and adventurous journey. He is on a quest to look for the “mother fxxker” left a hat at his girlfriend’s house after a probable illicit liaison. The lovable Marin’s first lively performance is witnessed when he goes to see his addiction sponsor about this matter. When he gets to Ralph’s place, he discloses to him that Veronica has been having an affair behind his back.
Even though Veronica is still the one doing drugs, her overall composure seems better than that of both Jackie and Ralph. Marin and Lumbly’s performances are top notch as far as their explosiveness is concerned. Jackie is going to seek his sponsor’s help because he suspects that a shock like this is enough to make him relapse. However, when Jackie gets to Ralph’s place, Lumbly delivers a very mixed performance.
On one side, he presents the audience with a caring sponsor who has his life in order. On the other hand, he is still able to communicate his innermost struggles to the audience. When this play premiered, Ralph’s role was assigned to Chris Rock, a very seasoned actor. This initial casting might have been by chance or by design. However, it is clear that this role is very important to the play. Ralph is by all means the epicenter of all the themes in this play.
For instance, through Lumbly’s Ralph the audience is able to grasp the two-sided nature of addiction. Ralph exemplifies those people that do not get into drugs because of their under achievement. His performance also shows that addiction is mostly as a result of inner struggles as opposed to outer struggles. Through this scene, it is also clear that although both Lumbly and Jackie are on the right path, their battle is far from over.
Carl Lumbly’s Ralph is one of the people who interacts with Jackie the most. As Marin’s sponsor, Lumbly has to tune his performance with that of Marin. Ralph’s character is akin to the play’s success. When the play premiered, Chris Rock took up this role and it has remained popular since then.
The expletive-filled conversations between Jackie and Ralph are supposed to be both emotional and comically vulgar. The actors portraying these emotions try their best to maintain this balance but eventually their performances end up being more vulgar than comical.
The supporting cast in this play does a good job that warrants a nod of approval from the audience. In most productions, the performances of the supporting cast are easily overshadowed by those of the main players. “The Mother Fxxker with the Hat” features a supporting cast that bears striking resemblances with the main cast. Julio is the only supporting actor whose performance stands out.
We will write a custom Essay on Review: What is this “Mother Fxxker with a Hat” All About? specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More One of the supporting performers in this production is Isabella Ortega who assumes the role of Veronica, Jackie’s long time girlfriend. Veronica and Jackie have been on a journey of love since the eighth grade. When Jackie is arrested for selling drugs from their New York apartment, Veronica waits for him to serve his two-year sentence. Ortega’s performance is good enough to confuse even those who are keen among the audience. She is able to exemplify a loyal and faithful girlfriend until the hat incident.
This is where she is able to deliver a confusing performance. Half of the audience believes her performance as a faithful girlfriend while the other half questions her faithfulness. Her foul-mouthing techniques are also hard to forget. The most notable performance by a supporting actor is by Ruddy Guerrero who plays Julio. He is able to deliver a macho performance and at the same time deliver the play’s funniest performance.
The scene with Jackie and Ralph seeking his help when they are hiding a gun is exceptionally funny. His performance is basically the “other type of performance” in this play. Margo Hall who plays Victoria, Ralph’s wife was billed as one of the most seasoned actors in the play. However, her performance did not have a lasting impression on me. It is mostly lukewarm and a bit too procedural.
The director of this play is blessed with a huge stage that can make any stage-designing dreams a reality. English does not let this advantage slip through his fingers. Instead, he makes use of the huge stage by putting together three different scenes. All three scenes are at different places. One is a bedroom, the other is a living room, and the third one is the scene of a balcony.
The stage is designed to depict New York in the most realistic way possible. The exterior brick-wall design on either side of the stage makes it feel like a real city. The difference between Ralph’s middle class apartment and Veronica’s colorful low-income house is emphasized by the stage’s design.
Although these two live in different worlds financially, they both have to deal with the demons of addiction. The placement of Julio’s apartment is meant to liken him to Jackie’s guardian angel. This is because Julio is always prepared to offer his help to Jackie.
“The Mother Fxxker with a Hat” is a play that focuses on the addiction theme. Guirgis meant to portray addiction as the unifying factor in this play. Jackie paints the picture of a lovable under achiever while Ralph is a diligent man who has accomplished a lot. Both men are judged differently from the outside but they still have to fight similar battles.
The playwright does not wish to engage the audience in an emotional roller coaster. Instead, he knows that after all the laughter dies down, deep thoughts will inadvertently take over. This play is like one of those movies that have you laughing at one moment, and then have you depressed the next.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Review: What is this “Mother Fxxker with a Hat” All About? by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More This production is almost like a comedy marathon because its emotional bits are very few. During the entire show, the performers use gestures, loud voices, and physical expressions of emotions. The elegant nature of this stage makes this production seem elegant. The wideness of the stage and the height of the ceilings seem to be the only things protecting the audience from the type of language being exchanged at the stage.
English’s superb directing is mixed with accurate portrayals of Veronica’s highs, Victoria’s repressed anger, Jackie’s controlling nature, Ralph’s slyness, and Julio’s good nature to make this play a success.
Apple Function and Form Report essay help site:edu: essay help site:edu
Introduction Apple Inc. is a publicly listed American company specializing in the production of high technological electronic products, computer hardware, and software. The company sells software, Smartphone, e-Book readers, Electronic music, Computers, and other consumer electronics. An entrepreneur named Steve Jobs started up the corporation in the fiscal 1977 (Rich, 2012).
Even though many products urbanized under his watch including PowerBook G3 and iMac online store, the company continues to rely on electronics and box computer to prevail in the market and make sales. The company has been bringing out cut-price versions of its Smartphone.
Looking even further, the company is staking its future on new products that could take electronics and computing power even deeper into everyday lives of consumers (Antràs
Marketing Management Report college essay help near me
Introduction Al Ahlia Gulf Line (AGL) is a leading manufacturer and marketer of soft drinks in the United Arab Emirates (UAE). Some of brands marketed by AGL in the UAE include Fanta, Arwa, Burn, Coke, and Sprite. Coca Cola is a leading company in the world. Coke’s brand equity is also strong in the UAE. The parent company began in 1892 after Charles Candler incorporated the organization.
The company originated in the United States. Today, Coca Cola markets its soft drinks to consumers across the globe. The company’s background dates back to 1886 when Candler’s father, John Pemberton, came up with the original “Coca Cola formula”. By 1899, Coca Cola was a leading company in America.
In the past years, the company has promoted the best business practices thus becoming a leading player in the global soft drink industry. In the UAE, Coca Cola (AGL) began its operations 1989. The company has succeeded in the region due to its quality bottling operations and distribution systems.
Marketing Environment There are different macro and micro environmental factors that affect the performance of a business. Micro-environmental factors are the “internal” aspects affecting a business. Macro environmental aspects are those factors that a firm cannot control. In the UAE, Coca Cola has been considering such macro and micro environmental aspects in order to emerge successful.
Micro Environmental Factors Organizational Aspects
The company embraces the best managerial strategies. This makes it easier to establish the best internal policies, objectives, and strategies.
Consumers and Suppliers
The company has to consider the bargaining powers and expectations of both its suppliers and consumers in order to remain profitable. The managers should consider the best principles in order to ensure the company is on the right path towards success.
There are different “fast food” companies in the region. These companies produce fruit juices and mineral water. As well, Pepsi is a leading marketer of soft drinks in the UAE market. These competitors might affect the company’s performance.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Marketing Mix
Al Ahlia Gulf Line (AGL) uses the best marketing mix in order to remain successful. The marketing includes aspects such as “price, place, promotion, advertising, and quality of its products”.
Macro Environment Factors: PESTEL Analysis Political Factors
Al Ahlia Gulf Line (AGL) operates in a politically stable country. The region has a reliable political climate and labor practices. However, insecurity is also common due to terrorism and insurgencies.
The UAE is definitely portraying a positive economic growth. This explains why the company should always consider the economic factors in order to remain profitable. The company can succeed in the long term.
The region is experiencing a socio-cultural change. The MNC should consider such changes in order to succeed in this market.
The company should consider new technologies because they influence logistical operations, product development, and service delivery. These are critical aspects for the company.
The world is presently becoming aware of the environment due to climate change. AGL should consider the best practices in order to safeguard the environment.
There are certain legislations affecting different companies in the UAE. These range from ethical practices, business policies, environmental legislations, and food safety measures. It has been necessary for the company to reconsider such legal aspects.
We will write a custom Report on Marketing Management specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Segmentation
One of the company’s favorite products is “Coke”. The use of segmentation can make Coke successful in the UAE. In order to make this particular product successful, AGL should consider the idea of “multi-segmentation” as detailed below.
Al Ahlia Gulf Line (AGL) can target different regions whereby more individuals will consume the product. The main regions will include the major urban centers and cities in the country.
The company can target the population based on income levels, gender and age. For instance, the company should target individuals between 16-45 years of age. This population has a good income and is willing to spend money on luxury products.
Many consumers are conscious about brands. That being the case, more consumers will be willing to consume Coca Cola’s products.
Current Target Market There are certain values that describe the target market for Coke. Most of the consumers have similar needs and expectations. The first thing to consider is the issue of geographic location. The potential consumers are in the urban areas. As well, the company should consider certain issues such as demographics, lifestyles, and behaviors. Most of the targeted consumers are between 16 and 45 years of age.
The company can use “socioeconomic segmentation” in order to market its product successfully. The issues to consider include gender, occupation, personal expectations, and education level. The company will also have to consider the attitudes, lifestyles, and behaviors of its consumers.
Description of the Market Opportunity The existence of a “marketing opportunity” makes it easier for a company to realize its goals. To begin with, the company has a unique brand equity thus making it a major competitor in the industry. The country is today receiving more tourists and investors.
The UAE is also experiencing a robust growth in terms of economy and political stability. More consumers are becoming financial stable and aware of their expectations. This has contributed to a “lifestyle change” thus presenting new opportunities to market Coke to the consumers.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Marketing Management by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Marketing Analysis The study focused on key aspects such as “economic position”, consumer expectations, and public awareness. The study also examined the past and current position of various soft drinks in the UAE market. After conducting the survey, the gathered information presented the behaviors of the potential consumers.
By so doing, it was possible to establish the existing opportunities for the company. As well, the respondents provided a “detailed description of the existing opportunities for Coca Cola” in the market. This made it easier to come up with a clear description of the marketing opportunity for the company.
Proposed Product Al Ahlia Gulf Line (AGL) can successfully introduce a new product in the UAE. The best product to introduce in this market is “Diet Coke”. Based on the existing marketing opportunities, AGL can market Diet Coke successfully to the consumers. The marketer needs to use the “three levels of the product”. The first one is the “core product”. Coke’s brand equity will make this level successful.
The second level is the “actual product”. Diet coke can help people address their health problems and benefit from the product. Finally, the company needs to use the best marketing mix, promotions and advertisements to add value to this new product in the UAE market.
Diet Coke SWOT Analysis Strengths
The product is healthy and tasty.
Diet coke has succeeded elsewhere.
It is competitive in the market.
The company’s “brand equity” is unique.
It is a new product.
Marketing incentives are lacking for Diet Coke.
Can be described a “foreign product”.
More consumers are sensitive about their health.
More people are consuming soft drinks.
Coca Cola dominates the market.
There are stable economic and political factors.
There is competition from substitute goods such as “fresh juices”.
There is competition from Pepsi.
Proposed Pricing The pricing strategy for Diet Coke should be in accordance with the existing competition and consumer expectations. The product’s price will be slightly higher than that of the competing products. The approach will make Diet Coke a “superior product”. The price should also be sensitive to the prices of other competing companies such as Pepsi.
Proposed Distribution Process After introducing the product and identifying the targeted consumers, the company will use its effective supply chain system. The approach will ensure equal distribution of the product across the UAE.
The marketers and distributors will be monitoring the level of consumption in order to promote a steady chain supply for the new product. The supply system will include distribution centers, convenient stores, shopping malls, and customer outlets.
Proposed Promotion Mix Promotion is an important aspect of marketing mix. AGL should employ the right personnel to market the product directly to the consumers. As well, sales promotions will sensitize the people about the benefits of the new product. The company will also use sporting events to increase awareness.
The company will also use different media and celebrities to advertise Diet Coke in the country. The use of internet-based promotion will make the product successful. For example, AGL can embrace the use of different social media in order to market its new product.
The Nature of Managerial Work in the Contemporary Business Essay college essay help: college essay help
Table of Contents Introduction
Understanding managerial work
Overview of research in managerial work
Research in managerial work and evaluation of the findings
Introduction Management is often termed as a wide area of study by a substantial number of people, including managers, managerial experts, researchers, and the wider section of the modern population. A substantial number of people in the modern society are still highly involved in managerial research. Diverse aspects of management, for instance management skills, are given much attention in modern research in management.
Management is an old field of study that has attracted a lot of researchers. It can be said that all activities that are conducted in the modern economy revolves around aspects of management. It is good to explore how the field of management has changed over time. This can only be done through an explicit exploration of the course, which management has taken especially from the 19th century onwards.
However, it is vital to note that the foundations of the studies and practice of management in the 19th century were derived from the developments in management in the 18th century (Willmott 1987: 249). In order to make an explicit comprehension and acknowledgement, or even criticism of modern managerial work, one must understand the methods that have been deployed in management research over the past five decades.
A lot of empirical explanations and models of management have been developed out of the wide research that has been and is still being done in the field of management. The modern managers are faced with complex organizational tasks due to the needs and demands of the work environment (National Research Council 1999: 161).
The changes that are seen in the nature of managerial work in the contemporary business landscape are highly dependent on the findings of research studies that have been conducted by managerial experts (Mintzberg 1998: 27). This paper carries out an analytical evaluation of the studies that have been done in the field of management for the last five decades.
The paper analyzes the findings of the researches in order to bring out the most critical findings. The paper begins by developing a brief overview of managerial work, after which an exploration of diverse studies in managerial work is done.
Understanding managerial work According to Tengblad (2012: 312), the concept of managerial work is quite broad. It is critical to understand what entails managerial work before exploring research work and findings that have been derived from the research. Managerial work comprises of a set of activities and practices that are developed and implemented by organizational leaders who are at times referred to as organizational managers.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More As used in this paper, managerial work refers to a number of practices that are desired in administration of organizations and institutions. This includes the setup of work environments and the skills that are demanded for setting up such environments. Therefore, managerial work as used in this paper revolves around the issue of skills and skill requirements and developments by both managers and subordinates in diverse organizational setups.
There is a need to explicate diverse studies about managerial skills, and to what level the findings in these studies point to the relevance of certain managerial skills in contemporary management. A wide section of people point to the need for the advancement of managerial skills of modern managers. These skills cannot be effectively advanced without a look into the previous research findings on managerial work (Tengblad 2012: 312-313).
A critical look into these researches can help modern managerial experts understand areas that need improvement through the establishment of further research in new forms of management. A lot of attention is being paid to the nature of managerial work in contemporary organizations. It is argued that there is insufficient empirical research on the nature of managerial work that is exercised by modern managers.
While this is looked at as a crisis by a section of experts, a number of people see this as an opportunity to explore other research findings in order to come up with empirical findings on the nature of work and the managerial skills that are demanded of modern managers (National Research Council 1999: 161).
It is critical to observe that managerial work is deeply rooted in education. Managerial education is oriented towards equipping learners with the moral requirement in diverse contexts of management. Managerial education is critical in the advancement of various fields of research in managerial work (Burgoyne 1995: 92).
Overview of research in managerial work As noted earlier, managerial work is the pillar of the functionality of almost all organizations that operate in the contemporary environment. Therefore, it is easy for one to conclude that there is a lot of research in managerial work. While this seems to hold some logic, it is vital for people involved in the field of management to ascertain the existence of research and research findings in managerial work.
This can help to categorize the findings in managerial work over time, thus making it easy pattern the methods utilized in the researches with the findings of the researches. Research work in the field of management can be traced from the ancient times, when a number of managerial theories and models were developed. These include the theory of bureaucracy by Weber and the principles of management by Fayol. These theories and models fall in the classical times (Thomas 2003: 38).
We will write a custom Essay on The Nature of Managerial Work in the Contemporary Business specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More It is argued that there has been a paradigm shift in managerial work, which has been witnessed from the mid years of the 20th century to date. The shift is likened to the changing nature of the work environment, marked by things like increased competition between business organizations, decrease in the amount of resources, and the rise in the number of external factors that affect organizational existence and operation.
These findings from the recent research work have been critical to the development of new models of management, which captures the changing demands in organizational management. The questioning of the classical theorists of management is the denominator for the development of modern research in managerial work.
Modern research in management is quite elusive and captures all the critical issues that appertain to management in organizations. Modern research focuses on the roles of managers, employees and other organizational stakeholders in the shaping the managerial environment in organizations (Lee
Incremental innovation Thesis essay help site:edu
Table of Contents SWOT analysis and Porter’s Forces
The Thought Process
Business Situation and Virtuous team
Small and gradual improvements on a product, service, or process are incremental innovations that add value and lead to sustained customer benefits, satisfaction, growth, quality of services, and maintains and improves a service or product’s position in the market. Innovations can be incremental, radical, and disruptive. However, this paper will emphasize on sustained incremental innovation.
This approach is integrated in an organization to goes through the transformation stages of growth that include fluid, transitional, and the specific stage of innovation to competitively remain and maintain a strong market position (Innovation Zone 2006).
In addition, organizations integrate SWOT and other competitive forces identified by porter as rivalries, threats of substitutes, buyer’s power, supplier’s power, and threat of entry in service provision in the incremental innovation process. (Porter 2004).These approaches may include relationships tailored to march a company’s strategic objectives and service delivery relationships.
The innovation process entailed working in a team with each member assigned different roles and responsibilities towards innovatively attaining improved service delivery at every stage of the company’s growth. Integrating incremental innovation and sustainability came with derived benefits of reduced transaction costs, good will, and effective problem solving methods. These lead to improved performance in services deliveries in line with the organization’s strategic vision in a dynamic business environment as illustrated on diagram 1 below.
Incremental innovation is a tool that has transformed companies and enabled them to stay competitive in a dynamically changing business environment and to maintain their lead in the market. In addition, team involvement enhances incremental innovation as the team employed various approaches to service innovation and problem solving skills illustrated on diagram 1 and 2 below.
SWOT analysis and Porter’s Forces The researcher actively participated in the innovation process in the capacity of Optus DSL team leader. One of the qualifying factors for success in incremental service innovation and sustainability included a SWOT analysis and integration of Porter’s forces within the service provision of the company (Porter 2004).
Incremental service innovation included active participation by team members with new and dynamic approaches within the organization’s structure (Innovation Zone 2006). These included conducting a SWOT analysis by identifying the strengths, weaknesses, opportunities, and threats facing Optus DSL.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Optus DSL’s strengths lay in its strong capital base, a strong and common brand name, a wide and strong market position, well trained and skilled technical team, a strong and experienced management team, reliable suppliers, clear and well specified communication channels both in the vertical and horizontal directions, and a clear organizational vision.
Different kinds of teams may be designed and incorporated in the innovation process. These may include virtual teams, virtuoso teams, and common teams, a virtuous team’s elements characterized the team the researcher was involved in. The team leader identified culture and language as factors that made the team to work cohesively with trust as fundamental tools for team work in the innovation process.
While a healthy team works towards achieving a common goal, members, must be characterized by a shared understanding, fully committed to the pursuit of the business organization’s goals while abiding by the team rules.
A successful team must also be characterized by commitment to a common business purpose, in this case service provision. According to the article Innovation Zone (2006), it was critical for the team members to hold the same values and to work with the same views integrated in the pursuit of the same business goals.
One of the critical success factors included a clear comprehension of the organization’s culture and working environment. A team leader, characterized by high achievement, time management, personal effectiveness, problem solution and decision making, and effective communication skills, in liaison with the organization’s management was selected to provide leadership and guidance when carrying out incremental service provision in line with the organization’s vision and business strategy (Innovation Zen 2006).
Successful service innovation was a characterizing hallmark for the team. The strategic approach to success was characterized by a functional approach that thrived on an in-depth analysis of the service problem which relied on an excellent decision making process in the innovation process (Burnett 1996).
Baumgartner (2009) argues a comprehensive innovation structure should be embedded in an organization where the innovation team should identify the actual problem or challenge at hand. In-depth analysis of the problem was done through a brainstorming session. The problem included declining customer numbers, dissatisfied customers, declining profits, and poor service delivery. The project commenced and ended as illustrated on figure 2 below.
We will write a custom Thesis on Incremental innovation specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The creative abilities of the team members were effectively and efficiently utilized through team and management collaborations. The problems were identified and through these collaborations, a number of potential solutions were generated. In addition to that, the team’s effectiveness was identified when new data about the problems were presented.
Baumgartner (2009) asserts that a number of these new data and ideas were combined while the team went further to consider the potential solutions. A satisfied team emerged with team members entirely satisfied with the problem definition, their inputs, and solutions suggested for the problems.
Baumgartner (2009) identifies a Scientific Peer Review Evaluation approach to service innovation as the basis of service innovation. This stage was identified by intense discussions on the best approach to service innovation. Team members did not participate equally though disparities were always kept checked. Uneven participation in the discussion was identified with the potential create uneven participation in the innovation process illustrated on diagram 4.
In addition, gender and organizational culture were critical issues considered in the discussion. Success in the team evolved around the leader and team members’ abilities to recognize varied viewpoints as conflicts that stemmed from a healthy approach to problem solutions could be amicably resolved.
The Thought Process The innovation process went through a period of intense discussions on appropriate solutions by team members. According to the article The Thought Process (n.d), team remember went through a mental process characterized by reasoning by inferring on previous experience and available data and knowledge, deductive reasoning where logical analysis was done on available information, inductive reasoning, and adductive reasoning where actions that cause results were critically evaluated.
Then team members entered the problem solving stage of finding solutions to problems on service provisions and sustainability based on Gestalt’s theory illustrated on figure 5. The theory asserts problem solving draws on both insight and experience. The discussion also centered on conducting a gap analysis on the company’s services delivery to identify service provision gaps.
Business Situation and Virtuous team Selecting a virtuous team depended on the business situation of the company in question. According to Lovelock, Patterson, and Walker (2007), the business organization was characterized by a wide area of coverage and customer base. While the virtuous team, a variant of a face-to-face team, could operate in a confined environment, interaction between virtuous team members was highly accelerated as the business environment was in a dynamically evolving technological environment (Lovelock, Patterson, Walker,
The use of stream-of-consciousness technique in The Dead and in The Heart of Darkness Essay college essay help online
One of the most peculiar characteristics of now famous literary works, published throughout the 20th century’s early phase, is that the themes and motifs, contained in these works, reflect the essence of what was a predominant socio-philosophical discourse of the time.
In its turn, this discourse used to be largely concerned with the fact that, throughout the mentioned historical period, the newly emerged science of psychology started to people with an in-depth insight into the workings of their psyche (Kessen and Cahan 640).
Consequently, this was causing intellectually advanced individuals to assume that the particulars of how they assess the surrounding reality cannot be discussed outside of what happened to be their socially suppressed unconscious anxieties.
This, of course, created objective preconditions for many writers, to decide in favor of taking a practical advantage of the so-called ‘stream-of-consciousness’ narrative technique, when readers are being exposed to the flow of seemingly random semi-conscious thoughts, on the part of the featured characters – hence, gaining a better understanding of the motivations behind the concerned characters’ behavior.
In my paper, I will discuss the particulars of this technique’s deployment in James Joyce’s short story The Death and in Josef Conrad’s novel The Heart of Darkness, while elaborating on how it accentuates the discursive significance of both literary masterpieces.
Nowadays, it became a commonplace practice among literary critics to refer to Joyce’s The Death in terms of a ‘modernist story’. One of the reasons for this is that, unlike what it is being usually the case in ‘Victorian stories’, the manner in which the story’s main character Gabriel addresses life-challenges, has very little to do with his ability to rationalize the emanations of the reality around him.
Unlike Victorian characters, Gabriel does not strive to adjust his behavior to be consistent with the provisions of the conventional morality, but rather allows his highly subjective perception of the world around him to affect the manner in which he behaves.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The validity of this suggestion can be well illustrated in regards to the scene, where overwhelmed with the sensation of an emotional discomfort towards the idea that there can be a good sense in exploring one’s ‘cultural roots’, Gabriel simply tells Miss Ivors that he hates the country in which he happened to live.
Nevertheless, the way in which Gabriel acts makes a perfectly good logic. This is because, throughout the story’s entirety, Gabriel is being represented as an individual that never ceases to remain in a close touch with his irrational emotions. In their turn, these emotions appear to derive out of the character’s memories of the past, which of course justifies the author’s deployment of stream-of-consciousness technique, as yet additional instrument of ensuring the perceptual plausibility of the plot.
For example, while contemplating upon what may have contributed towards his sensation of an existential inadequateness, Gabriel cannot help recalling the past-images of himself: “He (Gabriel) saw himself as a ludicrous figure, acting as a pennyboy for his aunts, a nervous, well-meaning sentimentalist, orating to vulgarians and idealising his own clownish lusts, the pitiable fatuous fellow he had caught a glimpse of in the mirror” (Joyce 20).
Even though that, formally speaking, exposing readers to Gabriel’s self-reflective images may be considered as such that does not make much of a sense, since there is no any way for the latter to relate to these images cognitively/emotionally, this is far from being the actual case.
The reason for this is apparent – while provided with the opportunity to catch the semantically unrelated glimpses of Gabriel, throughout his life’s different phases, readers are able to gain a better understanding of the main character’s state of mind.
There is even more to it – the deployment of stream-of-consciousness technique in The Dead, was also meant to encourage readers to consider the possibility that, contrary to the philosophical conventions of the 19th century, the particulars of how people indulge in a rational reasoning are predetermined by the working of their unconscious.
Therefore, it will not be much of an exaggeration to suggest that, apart from adding to the plot’s plausibility, the application of stream-of-consciousness technique in the story also intended to serve the purpose of enlightening readers on how one’s mind actually works. That is, after having formulated a particular conscious thought, people unconsciously seek to confirm this thought’s soundness, in regards to what used to be the emotionally relevant circumstances, at the time of its formulation.
We will write a custom Essay on The use of stream-of-consciousness technique in The Dead and in The Heart of Darkness specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More This explains their tendency to assess the validity of abstract ideas through the perceptually subjective lenses of their past-memories/experiences: “He (Gabriel) wondered at his riot of emotions of an hour before. From what had it proceeded? From his aunt’s supper, from his own foolish speech, from the wine and dancing, the merry-making when saying good night in the hall, the pleasure of the walk along the river in the snow” (22).
As the above-quote suggests, it is specifically the sphere of their irrational unconscious, in which people’s rational thoughts actually ‘reside’. Even though that, as of today, the validity of this suggestion is being commonly deemed self-evident, at the time when Joyce was working on his story, the idea that one’s behavior sublimates his or her essentially unconscious angsts, was considered truly innovative.
This explains the ‘modernist’ status of the story in question – its themes and motifs, made even more recognizable by the author’s deployment of stream-of-consciousness technique; do extrapolate Joyce’s anticipation of modernity. Therefore, there is nothing odd about the fact that even today, The Death continues to be referred to, as such that constitutes a particularly high literary value.
Whereas, in The Death, the utilization of stream-of consciousness technique serves primarily the function of emphasizing the plot’s plausibility, the deployment of the same technique in Conrad’s novel The Heart of Darkness appears to serve the function ensuring the structural integrity of the narration, concerned with Marlow’s quest in the primeval jungles of Africa.
After all, Marlow’s voyage into the ‘heart of darkness’ has a strongly defined metaphorical significance, which in turn allows us to discuss Conrad’s novel, as such that it is being subliminally reflective of one’s semi-conscious voyage into the dark depths of his or her unconscious psyche.
Therefore, it is fully explainable why the motif of darkness appears to be present in many of Marlow’s lapses into ‘consciousness-streaming’, such as the following one: “I saw him extend his short flipper of an arm for a gesture that took in the forest, the creek, the mud, the river – seemed to beckon with a dishonoring flourish before the sunlit face of the land a treacherous appeal to the lurking death, to the hidden evil, to the profound darkness of its heart” (Conrad 10).
Apparently, one of the reasons why Conrad used the stream-of-consciousness technique repeatedly, throughout the novel’s entirety, is that it helped him to advance the idea that one’s prolonged self-reflexing is being potentially capable of driving the concerned individual towards insanity.
This the reason why, while exposed to Marlow’s ‘day dreaming’, readers often experience a hard time, while trying to separate the de facto reality, which surrounds the character, from the one he had already been faced with (or reflected upon) in the past.
Not sure if you can write a paper on The use of stream-of-consciousness technique in The Dead and in The Heart of Darkness by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The following quotation is particularly illustrative of this statement’s legitimacy: “The broadening waters flowed through a mob of wooded islands; you lost your way on that river as you would in a desert, and butted all day long against shoals, trying to find the channel, till you thought yourself bewitched and cut off for ever from everything you had known once -somewhere – far away – in another existence perhaps” (11).
After all, it does not represent much of a secret to psychiatrists, that mentally deranged individuals do seem to perceive the objective reality, as such that has the mind of its own – hence, their tendency to seek a ‘hidden meaning’ in just about anything they happened to focus their attention upon.
Moreover, while self-reflecting, these individuals often become overwhelmed by their deep-seated irrational fears, which in turn undermine the actual legibility of how they express their thoughts: “The reality – the reality, I tell you – fades.
The inner truth is hidden – luckily, luckily” (11). Thus, even before being introduced to the character of Kurtz, readers already have a good idea, as to what kind of person he actually is. This is because, after having been provided with a glimpse into the Marlow mind’s stream-of-consciousness, they naturally conclude that the very paradigm of living in the midst of primeval wilderness, naturally affects the concerned individual’s mental well-being.
Even though that the narrator’s reflections upon the surrounding ‘darkness’ do not contain an explicit clue, as to what accounts for the actual difference between ‘savages’, on the one hand, and ‘civilized men’, on the other, readers nevertheless do come to recognize this difference’s roots.
This is because the author’s deployment of stream-of-consciousness technique does suggest that, as opposed to what it is being the case with civilized individuals; savages tend to objectualize themselves within the natural environment. Allegorically speaking, they live but what they see, without being able to engage with what they see cognitively, as it would undermine their chances of a physical survival (Segal 637).
The same can be said about civilized individuals that are the path of becoming savages – they simply acknowledge what they see, without bothering to reflect upon the meaning of their visual experiences.
As Marlow noted: “We were wanderers on a prehistoric earth… as we struggled round a bend, there would be a glimpse of rush walls, of peaked grass-roofs, a burst of yells, a whirl of black limbs, a mass of hands clapping, of feet stamping, of bodies swaying, of eyes rolling, under the droop of heavy and motionless foliage” (13).
Therefore, it will not be much of an exaggeration to suggest that it was namely Conrad’s masterful use of the ‘stream-of-consciousness’ narrative technique, which helped his novel to attain a cult-status, more than anything else did. This is because, as it was shown earlier, the deployment of this particular technique in the novel, created objective prerequisites for Conrad’s literary masterpiece to be considered well ahead of its time, in the discursive sense of this word.
Works Cited Conrad, Joseph 1997, The Heart of Darkness. 6 Mar. 2012.
Joyce, James 2010, The Dead. PDF file. 6 Mar. 2012.
Kaplan, Robert. “Madness and James Joyce.” Australasian Psychiatry 10.2 (2002): 172-176. Print.
Kessen, William and Emily Cahan. “A Century of Psychology: From Subject to Object to Agent.” American Scientist 74.6 (1986): 640-649. Print.
Segal, Robert. “Jung and Lévy-Bruhl.” Journal of Analytical Psychology 52.5 (2007): 635-658. Print.
The Iliad Essay a level english language essay help: a level english language essay help
A hero in the society can be defined as an individual who is admired and emulated by everyone because of his superior virtues and character that the culture or the society has. A Hero has virtues and attributes that are adored, valued and desired by many.
The ideals of a given culture are determined by the social –cultural conditions of a society or can also be greatly influenced by the views and the perceptions of the author. The motivations and the actions of a hero greatly determine the society view towards them.
The Iliad is one of the ancient literatures that date between 900 and 750 B.C. The events took place in the ancient Greek Bronze Age. During the time, the Greek region was filled with strife and there was need for strong men to provide defense to the community.
One of the heroic acts was to become a great warrior who feared nothing. In the Greek Dark Age, most of the rulers were the warrior class and they had to show the ability to defend the land and its populace.
In the Iliad, the two main heroic characters were Achilles and Hector. These two were drawn from the two main armies, that is, the Greek army and the Trojan army. These two warriors share some commonalities as well as differences (Samuel 5).
The two heroes share some common features that distinguish them as heroes. Both were great warriors from both sides. The two warriors were strong and had high confidence in themselves. During the duel between the two warriors, they were confident that they would beat each other. The two warriors were also men of honor and had pride.
Hector refused to retreat when ordered by his father Priam while Achilles decided to avenge the death of Patroclus. Both warriors also wanted glory and everyone to respect them. Another similarity is that both warriors are faithful to their family and friends. Achilles decides to forget his differences with the Agamemnon so as to avenge the death of his friend. He also wept bitterly for the loss of his friend Patroclus (Samuel 25).
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The Ilaid also shows a number of differences between the two warriors. Prince hector is viewed as an epitome of the humane warrior and a fierce fighter. He is courageous and even fights the Greek giant Ajax. He is humane and is portrayed as been a father and a loving son to his aging parents. He also loves to his wife Andromache.
On the other hand, Achilles is depicted as a rough cruel and unmerciful warrior. He only has her mother and Patroclus his friend. Even though hector pleads with Achilles to allow him get a decent burial, Achilles kills hectors and drags his body on his chariot as a sign of dishonouring and disrespecting him. Achilles is mostly portrayed as a man of rage and furious. His anger towards the Agamemnon made Achilles to stop fighting for the Greeks and decided to fall back (McKenzie, 6)
Unlike hector, Achilles fights for the glory and honour of his name. He has excessive pride and has no regard or love for his countrymen. This is seen when he withdraws from the war leaving the Greek venerable to death. Achilles is also very individualistic and full of vengeance. Hector is an honourable and patriotic man. He fights to defend his own kingdom and the people of Troy as well as his honour.
Achilles is also depicted as a traditional epic hero. The Iliad discuss him as a superhuman that cannot be conquered but having a weakness only in his kneel. Hector is not deemed as invisible but as a person who can be conquered. The king urges hector not to fight Achilles indicating that Priam feared his son would be defeated.
Works Cited Samuel, Butler. Homer’s The Iliad. New York: Orange Street Press. 1998. Print.
Greece in a Utopian Economic Paradigm Essay writing essay help
Introduction Greece is a European country located in the Southeast part of the continent. Many have described Greece as one of the most developed nations in the world. The country is ranked position 34 in the world as far as economy is concerned. In addition, the country’s population is found to enjoy fairly good standards of living.
The term ‘utopia’ is used to describe an ideal society. The idea of a utopian society has, however, been viewed by scholars as unrealistic. Paradigm, on the other hand, is a term used to refer to a line of thought or concepts. Leaders across the world use the ideas held in relation to a utopian society to put in place the necessary plans to improve the lives of the people.
The title of this paper, Greece in a Utopian Economic Paradigm, alludes to a fictional description of the country. The writer describes the idea of Greece as an ideal economy. Like many other countries, Greece has several economic challenges, the most common one being the debt crisis.
Over-borrowing by the country has forced the government to spend beyond its means (Cohen
Spinoza’s Views on God Essay college admission essay help: college admission essay help
The philosophy of Benedict Spinoza can sometimes be complex especially to upcoming scholars. In these readings, Spinoza expounds his views on God in detail. The readings on Spinoza’s views on God represent a complex philosophy. However, the author’s explanations make this philosophy very understandable. This philosophy addresses the author’s views on unity of everything.
In addition, the readings explain how God fits into this unity. Then Spinoza outlines the impact of the above knowledge on human beings. The first part of Spinoza’s readings on ethics addresses God as the main subject. This paper will break down this subject into three parts. The first part will explore God as an infinite subject. The second part will investigate God as a cause while the third part will explore Spinoza’s views on determinism.
According to first part of Spinoza’s readings, God is an infinite subject. The author’s general view is that there is no being that does not express God’s existence. The first statement in these readings starts with the expression that all substances are “by nature prior to their modification”. This means that no substance appears without having existed even though it was in another form.
This statement by the author helps us explain the nature of the universe. Human beings have the tendency to go through a lot of trouble when trying to discover origins. However, each of the discovered origin points towards another origin. For example, this “nature prior to modification” is the weak point in the theory of evolution.
This is because even if it can be explained that human beings previously existed as monkeys, it cannot be explained what monkeys were prior to their modification. The author also claims that when two things have nothing in common, none of them can cause the other. This can also be put into context using the evolution theory. Those advocating for evolution may take issue with this view.
This is because the interrelation between species can be faulted by this argument. The independence of species only proves the existence of a higher power. In this case, it seems like the author meant that God’s idea of different species eliminates confusion. This is why it is not possible to get a different species from the same species. The counter argument of this stand would be that some species are too similar.
According to the author, no two different substances in the universe can have identical nature and attributes. This would mean that the differences in attributes are the defining factor. Therefore, similarity does not amount to exactness. What all these arguments mean is that all substances are infinite. This is because they have neither origin nor destiny.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The author claims that this analogy explains the infinity of God’s existence. In addition, there is no God’s equal because there can never exist two substances with the same attributes. The author continues to explain the fallacies that are associated with God’s existence.
The article forwards a very interesting argument concerning where God came from. According to the article, the origin of God cannot be explained by exploring other origins. God is an origin and this means He can only cause His own existence. Following this line of thought, the article concludes that God is the first cause. This can be translated to mean that God is the origin of God.
In addition, it means that because God is the first cause, everything else must have originated from Him. This particular argument touches on other various issues. It can also help answer some frequently asked questions pertaining to God’s existence, origin, and, actions. For instance, most kids and adults alike have often found themselves confused when it comes to the origin of God.
Simply put, the question on most people’s minds is where did God come from? Spinoza answers this question by aligning several facts. Firsts, he poses the question about whose intention it was to make God exist. The answer to this question is that it was God’s intention to have God exist. Therefore, unlike many people speculate, there was no big event or accident that caused God’s existence.
It is also an accurate guess that God being the first form of existence holds the key to all other subsequent forms of existence. The other popular concern about God has to do with His actions. Given that all other forms of existence are answerable to a higher entity, people question who or what forces and laws control God’s actions.
Spinoza’s article answers this by noting that God is governed by “laws of his own nature”. According to this article, God is the reason why all things come into existence. Furthermore, the essence of all things can be explained through God. This puts God at the beginning and at the end of every other existence. The article also offers insight into God’s essence.
The discussion in this article brings us to the third part of this philosophy. Spinoza argues that all things are trained to act in a certain manner. Their trainer is the God to whom they owe their essence and existence. This means that all things are conditioned by God and consequently nothing in this world has the ability to condition itself.
We will write a custom Essay on Spinoza’s Views on God specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More This philosophy raises a storm with the common folk. This is because everybody wants to associate God with only the good actions. Whenever things happen because of negative conditioning, most people are reluctant to attribute this conditioning to God. To add to this debate, Spinoza notes that something that is conditioned cannot reverse its conditioning.
This would mean that those with conditioning that is undesirable to fellow humans do not have the capacity to change for the better. This is in spite of their efforts to try and change their conditioning. However, Spinoza addresses this presumption by arguing that God is not necessarily the source of individualistic behavior. The only reason God propagates such behavior is to offer examples of behaviors that are contrary to his own propagation.
This means that the reason evil exists is so that it highlights God’s nature. Therefore, it is up to God’s subjects to determine which behaviors are propagated for the sole reason of highlighting God’s effects. Nevertheless, it is true that the cause of all behaviors can be attributed to God. The only difference between these behaviors is that some of them are supposed to compliment God’s nature while others are supposed to contrast it.
The philosophy of causes of behavior is very dear to many people. This also touches on what causes some people to be good while others remain bad. In addition, some of the shocking behaviors that are associated with people could be explained using this philosophy. Spinoza’s article indicates that not all behaviors reflect God’s nature. Some ill or negative behaviors are meant to contrast God’s nature and make it more valuable.
Evaluation of the Bank Ethical Actions Essay college essay help: college essay help
Table of Contents Introduction
Necessity of Ethics Training
Business Culture and Ethics
Code of Ethics
Introduction As I am sure you are aware of, some of the executives of Goliath National Bank have been accused by the Financial Standards Authority, the Bank of England and the Government of engaging in fixing inter-bank rates.
Further investigation into this issue reveals that their accusations do have substantial merit albeit the fact that such forms of “fixing” has existed informally to a certain extent in the banking industry for years. When examining the situation at hand it is recommended that the bank focus on preserving the reputation of the organization.
To ensure continued consumer trust well into the future, the following plan has been developed:
Mention that the bank was not aware of the activities of the executives
State that their method of “fixing” the inter-bank borrowing rates was purely informal
Emphasize that the bank would put stop gap measures to ensure this will not be repeated
State that the bank will do all it can to cooperate with authorities to investigate this issue.
While such actions will help to resolve the bank’s current problems in the short term, they do not address the possible problems it will encounter in the long turn given that this incident has cast serious doubt on the ethical and moral conduct of the bank’s executives.
It is based on this that it is recommended that aside from the recommended actions to address the concerns of the media, the company should also revaluate its current corporate culture and implement a better and more ethical business environment.
Necessity of Ethics Training Various studies on corporate culture have emphasized the importance of ethics training as a means of encouraging and facilitating proper ethical practices within the workplace (Schwartz 2002, pp. 27-43). Furthermore, they indicated that ethics training allows a workforce to be more aware of the ethical codes of conduct that a company abides by and as a result enables them to be far more likely to conduct themselves in a manner that is in line with the highest standards of moral and ethical behavior (Ethics cannot be ignored 2002, p. 4).
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Even organizations with the best ethical codes in the world often fall prey to instances of unethical conduct within its ranks (as seen in the current incident) and as such it is important to constantly re-evaluate whether the executives and employees that we have at the present have the necessary ethical and moral compass to do what is right for both the business and the general public (Ethics cannot be ignored 2002, p. 4).
In order resolve such issues for the company, it is recommended that the use of ethical training sessions be implemented as a means of building up on the framework of actions initially established by the ethical codes of conduct emphasized by the company (Gasorek 2003, p. 24). Based on what has happened at the present, I believe that ethical codes are not enough to dissuade unethical actions, it is often necessary to create an even greater emphasis on ethics in order for employees to feel the correlation between ethical action and the company culture that they are a part of.
Business Culture and Ethics The fact is that ethical behaviors from employees are influenced by business culture and the corporate environment that they are exposed to (Eleftherlou-Smith 2011, p. 1). The more ethically oriented the business culture and corporate environment is, the more likely employees are to display ethical behaviors (Eleftherlou-Smith 2011, p. 1). The reverse is also true wherein the more unethical the environment the greater the potential for employees to show unethical behaviors.
I feel that the bank itself is at fault in this regard wherein in the pursuit of profit we have failed to pursue the moral highroad on how such profits are made in the first place. It should be noted though that even if ethical codes of conduct and ethical training sessions are implemented to create ethical employees, this does not mean that the end result will create an ethical company (Pactwa 2006, pp. 3-9).
Even the most ethical of employees with the best code of ethics and ethical training possible can fall prey to unethical actions within a business culture when it concerns either the performance of the company or the necessity of implementing measures connected to competitive survival (Pactwa 2006, pp. 3-9). This was seen in the case of the outsourcing industry wherein many companies outsourced various aspects of their operations to other countries such as India and China.
On the surface such companies stated that they stuck to the strict environmental rules and regulations established by the EPA within the U.S., however, since such regulations do not apply to outsourced operations in other countries these companies can in effect flagrantly degrade the environment through their operations while still stating that they were not the ones directly responsible for the incidences, rather, it is all the fault of one of their suppliers.
This is just one of the numerous examples of corporate double standards that exist in organizations that supposedly have high ethical codes of standards and undergo ethical training sessions. In order to avoid falling into such a state we must be wary that profits alone do not dictate the way in which we choose to operate.
We will write a custom Essay on Evaluation of the Bank Ethical Actions specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Code of Ethics There is an old saying that states that “the left hand doesn’t know what the right hand is doing”, in the case of the bank this takes on a more significant meaning due to the proliferation of various departments, operational sites and standards of doing business in particular areas which allowed the actions of the executives to happen in the first place (Magnet
Early Netherlandish Painting: Triptych of Madonna and Child with Angels; Donor and His Patron Saint online essay help
Table of Contents Introduction
The Description and Analysis of the Painting
The Historical Framework and Relation to the Other Paintings
Early Netherlandish Painting: Triptych of Madonna and Child with Angels; Donor and His Patron Saint Peter Martyr; and Saint Jerome and His Lion by the Master of the Legend of Saint Lucy
Introduction The period of 1420-1550 in the European art is characterized by the development of the early Netherlandish painting. In their works, the early Netherlandish painters focused on the religious motives and the sacred plots and subjects. These elements became the typical features of the early Netherlandish or Flemish painting. The artists chose the complex forms of diptychs and triptychs in order to depict the religious objects, symbols, and images.
The most famous Netherlandish artists belonging to the painting school are Jan van Eyck, Hans Memling, and Gerard David1. Nevertheless, to analyze the particular features of the early Netherlandish religious painting, it is necessary to pay attention to Triptych of Madonna and Child with Angels; Donor and His Patron Saint Peter Martyr; and Saint Jerome and His Lion painted by the anonymous author known as the Master of the Legend of Saint Lucy because of his work in Saint James’ Church in Bruges.
The triptych can be discussed as one of the most characteristic representations of Madonna in the early Netherlandish painting which was reflected in the works of the other Netherlandish painters; that is why, the analysis of this work is important to understand the particular features if the early Netherlandish religious painting.
The Description and Analysis of the Painting In spite of the fact, the author of Triptych of Madonna and Child with Angels is anonymous, the researchers are inclined to agree that the works of the author of the Legend of Saint Lucy in Saint James’ Church in Bruges can be characterized by a lot of features which help distinguish the author’s paintings and speak about the characteristics of the artist’s hand. These characteristics are the usage of intense and contrast colors, strict compositions, and the focus on expressionless faces2.
Triptych of Madonna and Child with Angels; Donor and His Patron Saint Peter Martyr; and Saint Jerome and His Lion is an oil painting made on the oak panels. It is possible to admit that the work was painted before 1483. Triptychs were the typical form for the early Netherlandish painters to represent the religious plots in symbolic and sacred paintings3.
The triptych depicts Madonna with a child as the central figures and Saints Peter and Jerome as the side figures of the painting. Thus, the idea of the triptych is presented clearly, and the principles of the strict compositions are followed.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Each part of the triptych represents two figures. The central figures are Madonna and Christ, the left figures are the donor and Saint Peter Martyr, and right figures are Saint Jerome and the lion. It is rather easy to recognize the figures because of much detail provided.
Madonna as the main figure of the triptych is depicted with Christ sitting on the throne. Madonna’s position accentuated the importance of the figure in the triptych. Being depicted in the centre of the panel, Madonna is rounded by two angels portrayed rather symmetrically while standing at the left and right sides in relation to Madonna.
Thus, Madonna is dressed in red clothes, and the symbolic dark blue mantle reflects the clothing typical for a lot of Madonna’s images presented in paintings. Christ is depicted naked, and it seems that his right hand is reaching to the flower in the hand of one angel. The other angel is depicted as reading sacred texts.
The faces of the figures have the extremely oval shape, and they are rather expressionless. These features are discussed as the characteristic of the artist’s style in painting. The composition of the central panel makes the audience think about the placid religious picture.
The donor and Saint Peter are depicted on the left panel of the triptych. The donor is kneeling in prayer and looking at Madonna, and Saint Peter is placing the hand on the donor’s shoulder and is holding the sword in the other hand. The representation of the sword as the certain symbol accentuates the protective role of Saint Peter.
The donor and Saint Peter are dressed in black clothes to present their religious roles. It is possible to see the contours of some religious buildings at the background of the left panel. Thus, the artist uses the elements of the two dimensional technique. On the right panel, Saint Jerome is depicted with a lion. Saint Jerome is holding a book in one hand.
The lion is snuggling to the saint, and it is holding the saint’s other hand. The background is presented in soft and naturalistic green colors. Saint Jerome is dressed in red clothes which reflect Madonna’s clothes in relation to the color and its intensity.
We will write a custom Research Paper on Early Netherlandish Painting: Triptych of Madonna and Child with Angels; Donor and His Patron Saint Peter Martyr; and Saint Jerome and His Lion by the Master of the Legend of Saint Lucy specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More It is possible to note that the artist paid much attention to the colors presented in the triptych. The most vivid colors are characteristic for the dresses of Madonna. Thus, Madonna’s clothing is depicted in deep and intense bold colors. The mantle is dark blue to accentuate Madonna’s integrity. Saint Jerome is also dressed in deep red clothes.
The white clothes are typical for two angels presented on the central panel and for the drapery of Christ. The white color is associated with purity and this symbolic meaning is depicted with the help of the color in the painting. The gold colors are used to depict the throne on which Madonna is sitting.
Thus, all the main colors typical for religious paintings are presented in the triptych4. However, it is important to note that the artist is inclined to utilize the intense bold colors, and different tones are used to emphasize the deepness of the basic color.
The figures and objects depicted in the triptych are rather realistic in their features, but the lack of balance in the figures’ sizes can be observed. Moreover, the figure of Madonna is accentuated, and it is presented in the centre of the main panel providing the centre for the whole symmetrical composition. The painter focuses on the central figure of Madonna making the other figures be turned to Madonna and Christ while looking at them.
The Historical Framework and Relation to the Other Paintings The Master of the Legend of Saint Lucy is discussed as one of the most significant early Netherlandish painters. As the other painters working during the period, the Master of the Legend of Saint Lucy concentrated in his works on the religious plots and provided the depiction of symbols along with the realistic objects to emphasize the connection of the religion and the real everyday life5.
The subject of the triptych is the representation of Madonna with Christ accentuating their purity, integrity, and their influential religious role with providing them as the central figures of the triptych in comparison with the figures of saints depicted.
The composition with the centralized figure of Madonna was typical for the iconography of the period. Moreover, triptychs were usually used by the early Netherlandish painters to represent the definite religious subjects and plots. The image of Madonna was portrayed in many paintings accompanied with different figures6.
The Master of the Legend of Saint Lucy chose the figures of Saint Peter and Saint Jerome to portray them in the triptych. It is important to pay attention to the symbols depicted along with the figures of saints. These symbols could be easily recognized by the audience basing on the religious legends and stories, and they helped determine the personalities of the saints presented.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Early Netherlandish Painting: Triptych of Madonna and Child with Angels; Donor and His Patron Saint Peter Martyr; and Saint Jerome and His Lion by the Master of the Legend of Saint Lucy by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Thus, Saint Peter is depicted with the symbolic sword used to protect Christ, and Saint Jerome is depicted with a lion which is snuggling to the saint to demonstrate his obedience because, according to the legend, Saint Jerome helped the lion remove a thorn from the paw. It is important to note that the question of patronage is closely associated with the work by the Master of the Legend of Saint Lucy.
The figures of saints and a donor in the triptych are identified with references to the symbolic objects accompanied these figures7. The tradition to use symbolic objects is characteristic for the early Netherlandish painters.
The idea of the religious triptych with accentuating the central figure is typical for many Netherlandish painters. Referring to the works which were painted earlier than the work by the Master of the Legend of Saint Lucy, it is necessary to pay attention to Hans Memling’s oil triptych made on wood known as Last Judgment (1466-1473).
Many researchers agree that Hans Memling’s works influenced the style of the Master of the Legend of Saint Lucy significantly8. Moreover, the elements of the Spanish painting school are also observed in relation to the artist’s works. It is possible to compare the Master of the Legend of Saint Lucy and Hans Memling’s works because the artists used the similar techniques, the colors are compared in relation to their deepness and usage of tones, the depiction of figures is also similar.
However, it is also possible to discuss the impact of the triptych painted by the Master of the Legend of Saint Lucy on the works of the other painters belonging to the early Netherlandish school of painting. Thus, Gerard David’s The Virgin among the Virgins (1509) in its composition, figure of Madonna, her face expression, figure of Christ, and clothes is similar to Triptych of Madonna and Child with Angels9.
The Master of the Legend of Saint Lucy specialized in painting the religious works, but the discussed triptych took a special position in the artist’s career because it is possible to speak about reflecting the artist’s style and manner of depicting Madonna in the works of the other painters. The triptych is significant because of the subject chosen to depict as the main one and because of the associated elements.
Thus, the work was created under the influence of the social tendencies and reflected the importance of the religious motives and sacred subjects in the people’s life. That is why, the presentation of many symbolic objects at the background of rather real things was characteristic for the early Netherlandish painting as the combination of the secular and sacred worlds.
The work by the Master of the Legend of Saint Lucy reflects the main tendencies in art influenced by the definite historical conditions typical for the period of 1420-1550. The main patron of the arts at the territories was Philip the Good. He supported the works made according to the naturalistic trends and sacred works accentuating with the help of definite symbols.
Moreover, the orientation to both sacred and secular worlds along with the naturalistic details led to the combination of these elements in painting. The patronage of monarchs and their interests in art contributed to the development of the painting school, and the early Netherlandish painters received the opportunity to develop their approaches to presenting the symbolic sacred world along with naturalistic pictures and portraits10.
Much attention was paid to details that is why the early Netherlandish painters are characterized by meticulousness which is also typical for the work painted by the Master of the Legend of Saint Lucy. Thus, the historical conditions in which the triptych was created can be discussed as rather favorable.
Conclusion The triptych painted by the Master of the Legend of Saint Lucy is the example of the traditional early Netherlandish painting with references to the religious motives and subjects used. The role of the Master of the Legend of Saint Lucy in developing the early Netherlandish painting school is significant because the artist not only followed the set standards but he also contributed to the development of the deeper mergence of the sacred and secular elements in the works of the early Netherlandish painters as it is possible to note with references to the later works painted by Gerard David.
References Ainsworth, M. (2005). Intentional alterations of early Netherlandish paintings. Metropolitan Museum Journal, 40(10), 51-65.
Social Networks Application in Smartphone Research Paper essay help: essay help
In the recent years, researchers have expressed concerns over the alarming rate in the spread of the use of social network applications. Most researchers agree that the issue deserves attention, which could be attributed to the widespread use of mobile phones due to their availability. With the recent developments and innovations on mobile phones, more social networks applications have come into use.
With Smartphone being one of the recent mobile technologies, widespread use of various social networks applications has been inevitable. In addition, the technology through the utilization of social networks applications has eased our day-to-day operations in various ways.
Just as the name suggests, social networks applications are sort of programs that enable or even enhance communication among individuals regardless of the geographical distance separating them (Goldenberg et al., 2006). However, these social networks applications have had impacts across various aspects of the society in general. This paper shall be based on the application of social networks in Smartphone coupled with my personal social media experience.
Apart from the aspect of interacting with friends, the social media technology can be utilized to achieve many other goals that include soliciting funds and an avenue through which one can find a job among other aspects. My social media experience will be based on the use of social media applications to maintain a long distance relationship. The paper shall also highlight some of the implications of utilizing these applications both to an individual and to the society.
After John, my closest friend, went to Australia for studies, I could not stand the loneliness. The available few modes of communication were quite expensive and inefficient, especially for the long distance communication. At times, I felt as though our relationship was falling apart as communication was curtailed by the geographical distance between us.
Notably, for a relationship to remain steady, communication should be put into consideration and should be consistent. However, we kept on exchanging gifts and communication was through phone calls and other means such as emails and telegraphs. These modes were quite expensive and unreliable at times. For instance, it would take such a long time for John to reply my fax messages and emails, especially if I had sent them without informing him first.
On the other hand, we spent a lot of money sending parcels through air couriers. Telephone calls also proved to be expensive since they were international and the call rates were quite high. It even came a time we had to stay for weeks without communicating due to unavailability of funds since we had no jobs and thus we depended on parents for our upkeep.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Currently, the trend has changed a great deal and we can communicate any time we want. With the latest development of Smartphone among mobile technologies, communication has been eased significantly. Smartphone is a type of mobile phone that has additional features and programs, thus making it better than other mobile phones.
A Smartphone can perform different functionality at the same time, which is missing in other normal phones. For instance, a Smartphone comes with a feature that lets the user to divide the screen into different portions and run different tasks on those compartments at the same time.
With the introduction of these smart phones into the market, communication between us eased as we were in a position to utilize both free and paid social networks applications that come along with a smart phone (Goldenberg et al., 2006).
Apart from G-chats and short messaging applications, we also learnt to utilize other social networks applications to enhance our communication, thus, shortening the distance between us. Through invitations for TV nights, we were able to watch our favorite shows through the Skype together. Through this application, John remained updated on commercials that were being aired back here at home. Meeting new friends and introducing them to each other was quite an easy task.
For instance, through the Google hangout application, we managed to arrange for double dates. With social media applications, life seemed normal for us as we were in a position to do most things together.
Playing games as scrabble was not such a big deal, as we could still communicate as the game proceeded as though we are physically together. Boredom is one aspect that creeps in when repetitive activities happen for quite a long time, and thus to break away from the monotony of social networks, we could send manual packages to each other.
Many couples and friends find themselves in a dilemma due to geographical distance separating them. Appreciably, it can be quite cumbersome to maintain a long distance relationship. With the emergence and widespread use social networks applications, the challenge of distance should no longer be a hindrance in a relationship, especially in the wake of Smartphones.
We will write a custom Research Paper on Social Networks Application in Smartphone specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More In addition, various Smartphones support these applications, hence making communication easier. Social network applications are sort of programs that enable communication through additional modifications that include sharing of pictures, status updates, playing games, and sending messages among many others. Face- to- face communication can be enhanced through Skype, which is an application that allows you to see the other person as you communicate.
Many other activities can be performed through the application, viz. preparing meals together and having dinners through the Internet. In addition, other applications let the communicating parties to send voice notes and video messages if they are not available for a chat. Facebook and Twitter are other types of network applications that allow people to share their feelings through status updates, photographs, and comments among others. However, these applications do not allow face-to-face communication, as they do not support such features.
Currently, a myriad of social networks can be utilized to keep a long distance relationship. In addition, social networks can be utilized for other purposes other than maintaining relationships. For instance, in the political arena, politicians utilize social networks to launch their manifestos and make them available to citizens.
In the field of medicine, there exist social network applications that can be utilized by medics to treat patients in other countries and regions. On the part of education, social networks are used to convey reading materials and other academic information to students; therefore, enhancing electronic learning (Goldenberg et al., 2006). In maintaining long distance relationships, the concept of creativity on the usage of social media plays a key role in ensuring effective and exciting communication.
Although social networks have played a significant role in enhancing communication, they have had both positive and negative impacts to individuals and the society in general. Conventionally, social networks have helped in making the world a global village. With just a click, information can be relayed to persons quite far away from each other.
Through these social networks, people have been in a position to create identities whereby people can search a person’s profile through the social media. Connecting with people in the community has been enhanced through these social networks, hence maintaining relationships (Hill et al., 2006).
Although conversation could take place through phone calls, connecting to many people at the same time was such a difficult task. In addition, one could only speak to people familiar to him or her, since not all people were willing to share their numbers. With the emergence of social networks, the idea of friendships changed as one could make many friends within a short time and communicate with multiple individuals simultaneously.
Researchers have established that loneliness can result into people taking actions that lead to destruction of their own lives in addition to stress and depression. However, through social networks, people can socialize and thus do away with loneliness (Boyd, 2008). Through social media, people share life experiences, hence depicting a sort of group therapy.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Social Networks Application in Smartphone by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The point is, by people sharing their experiences, they can empathize with each other and one can easily find solutions to his or her problems. One person may have gone through such an experience previously and can inform the other on how he or she went through the whole situation. Social media enhances the speed of communication, thus ensuring speedy and efficient communication. Currently, time is never enough to most people because of work and commitments to family.
Social networks offer a chance to this class of people to communicate with other efficiently and effectively. For instance, it takes an individual less than a minute to post updates to one social network, say Facebook, and with the help of a feature that allows cross posting to other social networks, the updates reaches all intended parties instantly.
The social media opens up the world to an individual through making it a smaller place as opposed to the earlier days when these applications were inexistent. Social networks have also created the aspect of equality towards everyone regardless of the geographical location. For instance, families living far apart can remain in touch with the rest of the family members living in the hometown. One can also connect with school friends that have relocated to other towns or states.
Sharing one’s interests is one of the ways through which social networks can be utilized to create identity (Goldenberg et al., 2009). For instance, some social networks allow a person choose people with similar interests for friendship. On the other hand, others like Twitter will let a person follow those with statuses of interest, thus making connections with people with similar interests, which would be hard to establish if socializing offline.
The aspect of socialization can be viewed in different dimensions including the economic dimension through marketing and other aspects of commerce. Social network applications enhance network-marketing techniques that help marketers identify influencers and predict variables affecting the behavior depicted by various consumers (Hill et al., 2006).
Depending on how people behave on various social network sites, marketers can easily identify characteristics of various individuals, demographics of a certain state or region, and any form of existing constraints, hence leading to identification of market gaps that depict a marketing opportunity.
Just like most issue in life, social networks also have positive and negative impacts attached to them. On the part of education, the social media has a direct impact on the value of information (Acquisti
Two Activities for Motor Skills Essay (Critical Writing) essay help online free
Table of Contents Motor skills
Motor skills A two year old child requires assistance in all aspects. These include body movement and language development. Body movement all any kind of movement that the child learns is referred to as motor skills. As indicated, motor skills refer to movement of muscles and this may be categorized as either gross or fine motor skills.
Gross motors skills in a two year old child generally refers to the general movement of body muscles, while fine motor skills are masterly skills required by a child in aspect such as writing or drawing objects using a pen. According to Charlesworth (2010), the following two activities can be used by the child’s parent to improve the child’s motor skills.
Games Games have continually been used to engage two year olds in coordinated movement. Soft games such as touching body parts can help a child learn how to balance body parts. For example, a child may learn how to stand on one leg. Another aspect of coordinating body movement in a child is through closing one eye, touching the nose and such.
A two year child can also be introduced into games that require jumping and hopping. In general, games help a child to develop other important skills. For example, a scrabble game can help children start learning about animals, animal names and language comprehension.
Drawing By using drawing activities, a two year old child learns the skills of using hands and eyes in a well coordinated manner. For example, a parent can let the child use tracing lines to draw an object.
The perfection of this activity by the child shows that the child-eye coordination is developing. Nonetheless, this skill is also critical in helping a child learn how to read. This is possible, since the child can observe and comprehend the meaning of a shape and trace the pen along the lines to draw a shape.
Language development Providing a two year old with language development skills is essential in growth and development of a child. The following activities can be used in fostering language development skills in a two year old child.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Puzzles A parent can construct puzzles or buy puzzles with bright colors. Bright colors are attractive to young children, and conversing with them while working on puzzles can be playful. For example, a parent can ask a few questions that are direct and expect the child to answer. However, such questions should be based on the puzzle colors, design and shapes.
A puzzle is also essential in promoting fine motor skills in the child, since a lot of coordination between the hand and the eyes is involved. In this process, children are able to name shapes of animals and object in the puzzle and even tell imaginary stories on the same.
Matching games Matching games activities involves the use of pictures and objects that are brightly colored. Nonetheless, such matching games should be simple and easy to understand by children. Most importantly, the use of matching games should also involve the parent in instructing the child in various tasks on the matching game. In this process, fine motor skills are also developed as the parent assists the child in hand and eye coordination tasks. In the process, children also develop cognitive skills by narrating and recalling the last time they saw such pictures or objects.
References Charlesworth, R. (2010). Understanding child development. Boston, MA: Cengage Learning.
Chesebrough, E. (2004). A blueprint for the promotion of pro-social behavior in early childhood. New York, NY: Springer.
The Justice Process for a Felony Criminal Charge Research Paper best college essay help
Introduction An offense that is punishable by death or imprisonment for more than one year is known as a felony (Johnson, 2008). A felony is considered by law as one of the severest crimes in the criminal justice system (Johnson, 2008). This paper is intended to explicate the entire justice process for a felony criminal charge filed in a state court. In this regard, the New York court system will be used as an illustration.
It is important to note that a felony criminal case does not have to go through all these processes since it can end before it reaches the trial stage. The thesis of this paper is that the process of handling felony criminal cases in a state court is efficient as to ensure justice for both the accused and the complainant.
The Criminal Justice Process for a Felony Criminal Charge in a State Court Initiation of charges by a complainant
This is the first process in dealing with a felony crime in a state court. This stage consists of an arrest of a suspect, complaint and booking of a felony case; it also involves conducting investigations. A felony criminal case often commences with an arrest of a suspect by a police officer.
Important to note is the fact that a person accused of having committed a felony crime may be arrested, but not necessarily held in detention (Johnson, 2008). Alternatively, the person may be issued with an appearance ticket or a Desk Appearance Ticket in the case of New York State courts (Johnson, 2008). After the issuance of the ticket, the accused can be released from detention. Interestingly, a person issued with an appearance ticket may be freed without bail.
Following an investigation, a criminal case may start with the filing of a felony criminal offense charge. Otherwise, it may commence with information provided by a prosecutor or police officer (Cohen, 2006). In other cases, this comes after an indictment by a grand jury (Gibeaut, 2001). After an arrest is made, defendants are often booked at a local police station or other relevant detention facilities.
During this process, fingerprints and photographs of the defendant are taken; these are important in determining any prior criminal activity of the defendant (Cole
Growth and Development of Children Essay (Critical Writing) college essay help: college essay help
The bodies of children change in their measurable characteristics during the period of infancy, early childhood, and adolescence significantly. Moreover, children can develop their abilities and skills and achieve different results while growing. Thus, it is necessary to concentrate on different concepts of growth and development in order to examine all the possible changes associated with the children’s progress in body size or in gaining more skills.
The children’s growth is discussed when the changes in body size, proportions, height, and weight are obvious. These changes can be measured and compared with the definite set standards. The concept of development is used to evaluate the changes in children’s acquiring new skills, performing new actions, and forming new social interactions. Thus, a child develops when he or she improves definite skills and abilities and gains some new knowledge.
The concept of the children’s growth is based on physical changes. It is important to pay attention to the fact that the characteristics of the children’s growth are measurable, and it is possible to refer to the certain rate in growth in order to compare the measures with the age standards. The body of a child changes significantly during the first years.
Thus, the most rapid growth can be observed during the periods of infancy and early childhood when the proportions of the children’s bodies change according to their sizes. Furthermore, the rate of the children’s growth is not significant during the school age, but it can become extremely rapid during the period of adolescence when the growth is associated with the hormone changes (Hendry, Farley,
Week 3 Essay scholarship essay help
Discussion Objective: (CO2) Analyze the scholarly works of scientific researcher with respect to emergency and disaster management.
Discussion Overview: Use Drabek as your guide to this discussion. As an emergency and disaster management professional you will encounter many questions/assertions that you may have to respond to. These important questions/assertions may impact how you conduct your day-to-day business. Think about the following questions/assertions and provide a substantive scholarly response.
What are the differences between the way conservatives and progressives view the federal role in emergency management? What are the advantages and disadvantages of each?
What is meant by ‘blaming the victim’? Provide examples of victim blaming. How does this concept influence the way our society responds to disaster?
What is the interface between emergency management and homeland security? Which is the ‘parent’ concept? Justify.
Discussion Instruction: Respond to each question/assertion with a substantive and scholarly response, use Drabek as a guide to your posting.
YOU HAVE TO USE THE SOURCE I PROVIDED TO ANSWER THE QUESTIONS. WHICH IS ATTACHED.
This video was additional reading for the week https://embed.ted.com/talks/peter_haas_haiti_s_disaster_of_engineering
Child Development Essay (Critical Writing) essay help: essay help
Table of Contents Introduction
Introduction Child development is an essential process that takes place in the life of an individual. This process commences immediately after birth when an individual highly relies on others for sustenance and ends towards the end of adolescence when the said individual approaches independence (Graham, 2010). In the process of child development, there are various factors that determine the cognitive and psychological development of an individual.
The genetic constitution and prenatal care are some of the factors that influence the development of an individual during this phase of development. Consequently, ecological factors also play a significant role in child development. This paper will therefore focus on the impact that ecological factors have on child development.
Ecological Factors In the process of development, there are various factors that determine the rate of development in a child. According to Urie (2006), ecological factors play a significant role in the process of child development since a child responds to various environmental cues that surrounds him/her. Thus, there are various environmental systems that a child interacts with that are influential in his/her development.
The microsystem is the first environmental system that determines child development. This system comprises of the institutions and groups that immediately surround a child. The family is perhaps the most influential segment of this system. The behavior and personality of a child highly depends on the influence that arises from his/her family (Urie, 2006).
In this respect therefore, family members have always been encourage to offer support and positive guidance to children to support their process of development. Consequently, educational and religious institutions also play a significant role in the process of child development especially in setting up their values, morals, goals, and beliefs. The influence that a child gets from his/her peers also determines his/her process of development.
In most cases, children tend to imitate or adopt behaviors from their peers. For instance, the interaction that children have plays a significant role in speech development (Graham, 2010). Thus, a child who interacts more stands a high chance of learning how to speak fluently as compared to a child who does not interact with children of his/her age.
The macrosystem is another environmental system that affects the process of child development. The macrosystem highly concentrates on the culture in which a child is brought up in. The level of economic development in the nation/region that a child is brought up in plays a significant role in determining his/her level of development.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More For instance, a child who is brought up in an industrialized country that is economically stable is expected to be different in terms of cognitive and psychological development as compared to a child who is brought up in a third world country. The child in a developed nation has a lot of resources and opportunities that will enhance his/her process of development.
Ethnicity and cultural background are also significant factors in the process of development. An African American child is expected to have different values and beliefs as compared to a White American child despite the fact that they might be living in the same neighborhood.
The chronosystems involves the transitions that a child experiences in the process of development. It has been identified that transferring a child to a new school or moving him/her to a different neighborhood, state, or nation will have a psychological effect that will definitely affect his/her development. Consequently, issues such as divorce, separation, and death will have effects that will affect the psychological and cognitive development of a child.
Conclusion This paper has therefore identified that there are several ecological factors that affect the development of a child. It is therefore essential that necessary measures are taken to ensure that a child is exposed to the right environmental cues to ensure that his process of development is effective. This will play a significant role in ensuring that the child grows to be a morally and psychologically stable individual as an adult.
References Graham, D. (2010). Environmental Factors Affecting the Growth of Children. The American Journal of Clinical Nutrition, 2(1), 44-50.
Urie, B. (2006). Ecology of the Family as a Context for Human Development: Research Perspectives. Developmental Psychology, 22(6), 723-742
Incident at Morale Case Study essay help online: essay help online
Table of Contents Introduction
Step 1: Determine Facts of the Case
Step 2 and 3: Stakeholders and Their Motivations
Step 4: Formulate Possible Solutions
Step 5: Evaluate Alternatives
Step 6: Additional Assistance
Step 7: The Best Course of Action
Step 8: Implementing the Solution
Step 9: Monitoring and Assessing the Outcomes
Introduction The case under analysis called Incident at Morale focuses on ethical responsibilities and decisions that are highlighted in engineering practice. In particular, the video demonstrates that good and conscientious people can sometimes face situations, leading to unfortunate and unethical outcomes.
Therefore, the main aspects of the case rely on ethical considerations, overview of codes of ethics affecting the decision-making process, and evaluation of obligations that engineers should fulfill while concluding an agreement with a customer.
Step 1: Determine Facts of the Case Incident at Morales involves a range of ethical issues that the company confronts while building a plant and launching a new chemical product to sustain a competitive edge. Phaust Chemical manufactures a paint remover that is considered the leader at the market. Chemitoil plans to launch a new product to capture the market dominated by Phaust.
On learning that, Phaust’s executives have decided to work out a new highly competitive product and build a new plant in Mexico. In order to develop a new paint remover, the company employs a chemical engineer that had previously been working for Chemitoil. As the project begins, Phaust’s parent firm located in France reduces budget by 20 %. Under these circumstances, the vice president tells the newly hired engineer Fred to decrease the construction costs.
However, Fred encounters a number of ethical contradictions that play an important role in discussing expenditures, budget plans, environmental issues, management issues. In order to produce paint removal, Fred has to buy pipes and other devices that are made up of either of high pressure alloy or stainless steel.
Due to the fact that the major conception of Phaust’s new product lies in delivering the remover requiring higher pressures and temperatures, it can cause significant problems in terms of technical process and ethics. As a result of reduced terms and challenging conditions, an unfortunate accident occurs, causing serious problems.
Step 2 and 3: Stakeholders and Their Motivations Both Chuck, the head of engineering department, and Dominique, the head of the parent company in France, were interested in immediate construction of chemical plant in Mexico to produce a new product and capture new markets. Under these circumstances, they also have the opportunity to outstrip to the indices of their competitor – Chemitoil.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The main responsibility imposed on Mr. Martinez lied in designing a new firm within the established deadline and budgeting, which is a serious challenge. These terms, however, prevented the new engineer from taking environmental and safety issues into consideration and considering the responsibility for the personnel and quality of equipment.
Finally, Wally, the official representative of the Mexican department, exposed significant pressure on Fred who attempted to make certain amendments to the construction plan. The role of Wally, therefore, lied in convincing Mr. Martinez of using his own experience in creating the chemical manufacture. Ignorance of safety measures and inspection process could be the main reason for the accident at the plant.
Step 4: Formulate Possible Solutions While evaluating the main premises of the case, specific emphasis should be placed on such aspects as responsibility distribution, accountability, and corporate culture. To begin with, the Mexican official should have considered the role of responsibility in handling such issues as inspection control, human resources management, and adherence to quality standards.
Negligence of the construction plan procedures was explained by Wally excess attention to the outcomes of the venture. At this point, Wally should have been more careful before choosing the supplier for delivering details to a new plant and accelerating the process by all means.
Aside from the security measures, Fred should have been more strict and accountable for the construction process before making decision. In particular, Mr. Martinez should reconsider the budget and insist on development of new alternatives for construction process. This is of particular concern to purchasing alloys, which the plant could not afford.
Second, the new plant designer was under the pressure of environmental contradictions because most of the regulations were not followed. At this point, the solution here should involve assessment of ecological situation before analyzing the possibility for purchasing new equipment.
Step 5: Evaluate Alternatives Strict allocation of responsibilities should be introduced to the new team of constructors and engineers. Chuck should be more concerned with moral codes and corporate culture before deciding on the new chemical plant project.
We will write a custom Case Study on Incident at Morale specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Moreover, the attention also requires external environment evaluation, including social and political challenges that are predetermined by other environmental organizations and governmental authorities. The case with Wally’s power overuse demonstrates increased pressure and serious violation of ethical norms, which can result in negative consequences for the welfare of the personnel
Step 6: Additional Assistance Environmental protection and social corporate responsibilities should be the pillars of any business organization operating at the global market. Therefore, the company should, first of all, rely on these concepts before launching a new business venture. Second, the head of the engineering department should be aware of the professional obligations that each employee should observe.
Step 7: The Best Course of Action Adherence to ethical values, such as civility, respect, fairness, and kindness, is crucial for the managers to succeed in monitoring and administering the entire business project. In order to avoid complication and disagreements with environmental organization, the head of the engineering department should take greater control of inspection, testing, and reliability of the plant design to avert damage and ensure security issues.
This is of particular concern to personnel testing, analysis of legality and publicity, as well as common practice test, which identifies the reasonability of the implemented practices.
Step 8: Implementing the Solution Before implementing the above-proposed solutions, the managerial staff should conduct a performance test to evaluate emotional, psychological, and cultural aspects in the employed environment. All these issues are urgent for ensuring productivity and ethics in the workplace.
In addition, all actions carried out during the construction process should be transparent and, therefore, the public relation department should be more concerned with constant reporting. Information related to the environmental aspects of construction, as well as employees’ ethics should not be concealed because it prevents from fulfilling the main objectives of an international company.
Step 9: Monitoring and Assessing the Outcomes Open Door policy should be beneficial for introducing amendment to ethical and moral issues of the project. At this point, the manager should constantly monitor the fulfillment of and compliance with existing legal and ethical regulations to avoid complications. Such a policy can contribute greatly to company’s reputation and attract larger customer base.
While assessing the outcomes, the managers and engineers should pay closer attention to testing procedures, including performance procedure and employees’ engagement into the production process.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Incident at Morale by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More
The Title IX Decision against the Quinnipiac University Essay a level english language essay help
The question of gender is actively discussed in relation to sport with references to providing the equal opportunities for female athletes. According to Title IX, any discrimination regarding the sex or gender issues is prohibited (Thornton, 2010). The Title IX Decision against the Quinnipiac University of 2010 became one of the most controversial cases associated with the question.
It was stated that the Quinnipiac University intended to eliminate the women’s varsity volleyball team because of the lack of funding and to develop a competitive cheerleading team instead. The volleyball team’s players and their coach insisted on trying the case in court because of violating Title IX in relation to providing the equal opportunities for university athletes.
According to the injunction provided by the Judge Stefan Underhill, the volleyball team was allowed to continue the activities during the next season when the development of the competitive cheerleading team could not be discussed as the alternative to the female sport team to meet the Title IX requirements.
To evaluate the effectiveness of Underhill’s decision, it is necessary to pay attention to the details of the case. The volleyball team of the Quinnipiac University and the team’s coach accentuated that the plan to eliminate the team violates Title IX because the proportion of the male and female athletes would be defied.
From this point, it is possible to speak about the direct violation of Title IX in relation to providing the equal opportunities for male and female athletes. Underhill stated that the fact of discriminating female athletes’ rights was presented, and the Quinnipiac University was obliged to provide the opportunities for the team to perform during the next season (The Quinnipiac University Case, 2010).
Thus, the legal strength of the argument was accentuated, and the team could be discussed as winning the case. However, there are two visions of the decision. On the one hand, the rights and interests of the women’s varsity volleyball team were met, and the fact of discrimination was stated.
On the other hand, the team was allowed to perform only during the 2010-2011 season, and the question was discussed again in 2012. Thus, the decision provided by the judge lacked some details.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Furthermore, Underhill concentrated on the fact that it was impossible to refer to the cheerleading team as the competitive team and to discuss that team as the alternative to the volleyball team to meet the Title IX requirements. The decision provided by Underhill was rather effective while discussing the cheerleading team as inappropriate alternative to the female volleyball team.
Nevertheless, the controversy was associated with the fact that Underhill focused on the standards of the competitive sport teams and judged about the relevance of the standards and cheerleading team’s features to discuss it as the sport team. Underhill supported the decision in relation to the definition of the varsity sport with references to the Title IX standards (The Quinnipiac University Case, 2010).
It is important to pay attention to the fact that the position of the judge as the advisor or an expert to determine the standards for the varsity sport is rather controversial, and it could be more effective to focus on violating the Title IX requirements regarding the women’s volleyball team rather than on discussing the features and standards of the varsity sport.
In spite of the general win of the women’s volleyball team of the Quinnipiac University in relation to Title IX, the judge’s argument cannot be discussed as strong and effective because it was important to concentrate on the issue of discrimination to determine the position of the team not only for one season but for the long period of time.
References The Quinnipiac University Case. (2010). Retrieved from http://courtweb.pamd.uscourts.gov/courtwebsearch/ctxc/KX330R32.pdf
Thornton, P. K. (2010). Sports law. USA: Jones
Poly-Substance Abuse in Adolescent Males with Depression Research Paper essay help: essay help
Abstract It is projected that poly-substance abuse is the major cause of depression because there are high chances that a depressed individual is a frequent user of poly-substances. Poly-substance abuse forces people to abandon their social roles, which lead to depression. This paper looks at the ways in which poly-substance abuse is related to depression.
The paper looks at the way in which poly-substance abuse brings about depression in adolescent males. The essay suggests a quantitative study that would be critical in gathering relevant data related to the relationship between depression and drug abuse. In the subsequent section, the proposal suggests a data analysis method that uses statistics
Introduction Poly-substance abuse in adolescent males with depression is common in many societies. Winters and Latimer (2004) conducted a study, which established that poly-substance abuse affects all ethnic groups meaning that it does not affect only certain cultural groupings. This quantitative study focuses on the relationship between poly-substance abuse in adolescent males and depression. By definition, poly-substance abuse refers to the patterned intake of a substance (drug) that is usually taken either in large or small quantities.
The substance has the ability to affect the behavior and actions of individuals. The substance is usually used illegally using unapproved methods meaning that it would definitely change the attitude of the individual. It should be noted that poly-substance abuse is not restricted to those that change the mood of the individual or those that activate the psychological processes.
Athletes are usually reported to using drugs that stimulate their muscles and give them additional energy. This is also considered drug abuse because it changes the functioning of the body and the brain, which affects the psychological processes. Ksir (2002) observed that the use of illicit drugs such as narcotics, stimulants, and depressants are some of the examples of poly-substance abuse.
Poly-substance abuse is directly related to depression because those who use drugs are always miserable as compared to non-users of drugs. People suffer emotionally due to the intake of illicit drugs. For instance, athletes are usually snatched their medals due to suspicion of poly-substance abuse. Research gaps in literature, which is related to the relationship between substance abuse and depression, exist.
In human life, there are moments that an individual feels confused and sad. This is a normal feeling, but its persistence is considered a sign of depression. Depression occurs when a male adolescent loses something that he values so much in his life. Sometimes, an adolescent could be depressed after going through a stressful event or event.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More At times, depression affects the normal life of the adolescent male because he cannot execute his duties in a way that befits him. This may lead to a psychological disorder referred to as the major depressive disorder (MDD), also referred to as clinical depression. Therefore, there is need of establishing the extent at which poly-substance abuse is related to depression.
It is clear that adolescent males engage in poly-substance abuse because of a number of reasons. Depression is the major cause because many feel frustrated to an extent of engaging in poly-substance abuse as a way of reducing stress.
Statement of Purpose
A number of studies have been conducted to ascertain the relationship between poly-substance abuse and depression. Each study has been focusing on particular groups, depending on the choice of the researcher. In this proposal, the effects of poly-substance abuse in adolescent males would be evaluated.
The main purpose of the proposal is to suggest a relevant method that would achieve desired results. The proposal gives some of the articles that would be critical in understanding the relationship between poly-substance abuse and depression in adolescent males. Apart from suggesting some of the articles in the literature review section, the proposal suggests a quantitative method that will utilize the questionnaires in gathering relevant data.
The use of questionnaire enables the researcher to collect adequate information that is relevant to the study. In doing this, the proposal seeks to answer a number of questions, including the following:
Is poly-substance abuse the only cause of depression among male adolescents?
To what extent does substance abuse influence the behavior of an individual
What are some of the substances that the adolescent males frequently abuse
Male adolescents go through various challenges, one of them being poly-substance abuse, which affects their behavior and mood. Poly-substance abuse is a major cause of depression in adolescent males because it affects their psychological and social processes. This causes depression because the adolescent might not be able to achieve the expected results owing to poly-substance abuse.
Literature review Depression is the most crucial aspect that makes young males to indulge in poly-substance abuse. Male adolescents express their depression in various ways. Poly- substance abuse lowers an individual’s level of judgment making him or her to indulge in risky behaviors such as premarital sex or even becoming homosexual an aspect that increases their risk to diseases such as HIV/AIDS among others.
We will write a custom Research Paper on Poly-Substance Abuse in Adolescent Males with Depression specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More One of the studies that Boys, Marsden, and Strang conducted in 2000 concluded that poly-substance abuse has a tremendous effect on the life of young males. The study utilized a snowball sampling technique to reach at the conclusion. The respondents noted that some of the commonly abused substances include alcohol, cannabis, and cocaine.
The majority of the participants confirmed that they had actually utilized the above substances to fulfill their measured substance use functions. In another study conducted by Huba and Lisa (2000), it was established that poly-substance abuse increases the risk of contracting HIV/AIDS. In their study, young Hispanic males were more likely to abuse poly-substances while the Native American females were prone to poly-substance abuse.
Moreover, the study established that those who abuse drugs are likely to engage in unprotected sex, which predisposes them to the risks of contracting HIV. It is noteworthy that their research results are representative of findings in clinical gay-bisexual male adolescents and may not hold for the same group of male adolescents in the general societal setting.
Additionally, different ethnic groups exhibit varying frequencies of the involvement of depressed adolescent boys in poly-substance abuse. This was established through a study carried out by Winters and Latimer (2004) in their attempt to find the relationship between Alcohol and other drugs abused in adolescent boys from different ethnic groups in the U.S.
Poulin (2004) and other scholars investigated the relationship between depression and poly-substance abuse in male adolescents in the four Atlantic provinces of Canada as far as gender is concerned. Poulin’s sample consisted of 12,771 students in both junior and high schools of the public schools in the four provinces.
They found out that adolescent males were consistently at a higher risk of depressive symptoms, depressive disorders since they tend to internalize their problems more than others do. According to their study, the prevalence of very elevated symptoms among male adolescents was 8.6% while that of the males was 2.6%. However, male adolescents are at a greater risk of substance use disorders than the adolescent females.
Poulin (2004) found out that different substances are used at different rates among male adolescents with depression. The findings were similar to those of Nolen-Hoeksema’s (2001) who carried out a study to describe how the different genders have different experiences as far as stress in male adolescents is concerned. They identified most of the abused substances among male adolescents. They include alcohol, cigarettes, and cannabis.
They associated the increased use of these substances with an increasing probability of depressive disorder. They also noted that smoking was the least controllable substance among the males. They established that depressive symptoms and disorder are the major predictors of smoking uptake not only in adolescence but also in adulthood. Early onset smoking poses a greater risk for severe depression symptoms than later onset smoking. On the other hand, cannabis abuse was associated with males with had a history of depression disorder.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Poly-Substance Abuse in Adolescent Males with Depression by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More An approximated 16% of those who had used cannabis at least once in their life were diagnosed with depression compared to 6% of the male adolescents who had never used cannabis. They also found out that most of the students had depression symptoms while others already had depression disorder but they had not received much help form the society. Only 10.3% reported that they had received help for depression.
Their findings show that for the different levels of depression only 12% of the students with somewhat elevated depressive symptoms had received help so was 22% of the students who had very elevated depressive symptoms. Major depression is one of the most common and serious disorders among male adolescents.
The estimated prevalence of the disorder is between 2.8% and 8.2%. Depressed adolescents are highly vulnerable to poly substance abuse such as engagement in multiple illegal activities (Poulin 2004).
No study proves that defective genes cause major depressive disorder. However, a relationship between genetic makeup and susceptibility to major depression disorder exits. This is based on the idea that some families are known to commit suicide while others have the ability of handling stress very well.
In one of the studies performed on twins, a relationship between genetics and major depression disorder was eminent (Smoller, Sheidley,
Chapter 2, 3, essay help online
Book – Managerial Accounting for Managers By: Eric Noreen
– After reading Chapter 2 in the Noreen text, complete the following exercises/problems: Exercise 2-7, Exercise 2-13 Submit your work preferably in spreadsheet format (Excel)
– After reading Chapter 3 in the Noreen text, complete the following exercises/problems: Exercise 3-16 Submit your work preferably in spreadsheet format (Excel)
– After reading Chapter 4 in the Noreen text, complete the following exercises/problems: Exercise 4-16, Exercise 4-17 Submit your work preferably in spreadsheet format (Excel)
Problems are attached
Fishery Industry: UAE Term Paper online essay help
Introduction For centuries fish has been a mainstay of the diet of the people within the U.A.E. and, as a result, has brought about the creation of numerous industries which focus on harvesting, processing and delivering seafood to a vast consumer market within the region.
However, it should be noted that researchers such as Zoubir and Yahia (1999) state that industries such as these are not given carte blanche to do whatever they want in terms of harvesting the waters in and around the U.A.E. (Zoubir and Yahia, 1999). Certain limitations have to be implemented due to the potential for these industries to wipe out a finite ocean resource (Groeneveld et al., 2012).
What must be understood is that supplies of fish and other aquatic organisms take a certain amount of time to replenish. Unfortunately, due to the subsequent increase in demand for seafood as well as the advanced methods of capture that are being utilized at the present, unrestricted fishing practices often result in unsustainable local aquatic populations which subsequently die out (Groeneveld et al., 2012).
Evidence of this can be seen in the case of the blue fin tuna species as well as the North Atlantic salmon which have experienced considerable population declines to the extent that the W.T.O. as well as several advocacy groups have been protesting their continued use as a food product due to the very real possibility of extinction.
Due to instances such as this, the necessity of implementing proper policies and guidelines to create catch quotas has been at the forefront of present-day government legislation involving the local fishery industry within the U.A.E.
It is based on this that this paper will examine the current policies being utilized for fish within the U.A.E. and what these policies have achieved in terms of creating the necessary catch limitations to ensure sustainable fishing practices.
Through this study, it is expected that readers will develop a greater understanding of current import/export practices within the U.A.E. involving fish as well as whether there exists any potential problems within the fishery industry that the government should focus on in order to increase the effective and efficient utilization of aquatic resources in order to reduce cost and wastefulness.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Background of the Study Fish as a Staple of the Human Diet
For a large percentage of the current global population fish represents a readily available and above all affordable means of sustenance when compared to other food types. Based on comparative global prices it can be seen that certain species of domesticated fish such as milkfish, cod, and dory are actually consumed by the metric ton on an almost daily basis due to their relatively low prices.
While it may be true that beef, chicken and pork have a relatively higher rate of consumption the fact still remains that in most markets fish that are either caught on the open sea or produced through aquaculture have a relatively lower price as compared to most cuts of beef, chicken or pork.
In some cultures, particularly those in the Middle East, fish is actually consumed more than beef, chicken or pork due to their geography, which places them near larger sources of fish as compared to cultures located in Central Europe or the central states in the U.S.
Taking this into consideration it can be seen that fish has a different value depending on the geographic location of the culture that consumes it. For some cultures various dishes based on fish can be considered an integral part of their cultural tradition, while for others fish can be considered nothing more than a miscellaneous option between chicken, beef, pork or vegetables.
Sustainability refers to the utilization of resources and the production of goods/services in a manner that takes into consideration not only the impact of a company on the environment but also its ability to ensure that the resources it utilizes are sourced in a manner that ensures that they can be renewable.
By doing so, this creates a system where costs are reduced, efficiency is increased and the company presents a far better public image due to the general consensus that implementing sustainable practices creates a beneficial effect for the general public.
As such, sustainable supply chains implement the aforementioned principles into a cohesive whole in every aspect of the supply chain, whether it is the sourcing of raw materials, the manufacturing of goods/services or the distribution of such outputs to consumers. From the perspective
We will write a custom Term Paper on Fishery Industry: UAE specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Abbasi and Nilsson (2012) an organization with a truly successful sustainable supply chain could theoretically remain in business forever (depending on continued consumer demand for its products of course) which lends credence to the beneficial effects a sustainable supply chain could have for a company (Abbasi and Nilsson, 2012).
One example of a sustainable supply chain is when a company’s management orientation is evidenced by a business model where economic goals are compatible with environmental and social goals. In this particular version of a successful supply chain a company does not focus entirely on a competitor oriented approach (though this is also important) rather what is being accomplished is that it focuses on developing a business model that utilizes Corporate Social Responsibility (C.S.R.) as the basis behind its actions.
Since C.S.R. is a form of internal self-regulation, a company that implements this focuses on reducing adverse environmental practices while at the same time develops positive social effects. A second example of a sustainable supply chain is when sustainability becomes integrated in the organization where the organization has both a managerial orientation toward sustainability and an innovation capability.
This means that internal developments within the organization focus on developing methods wherein processes become more efficient, waste is reduced, resources are obtained from renewable sources and the focus of the company is towards the development of practices that result in positive environmental effects.
Objectives The main objectives of this study consist of the following:
To examine the current policies for fish and fisheries involving seasonal and species limitations.
Determine the extent by which the policies that have been developed are actually effective in ensuring sustainable fishing practices.
Examine the current import/export regulations of fisheries.
Investigate whether there are any inherent problems/discrepancies in government policies and regulations.
Create a means by which any identified problems can be succinctly addressed with an effective strategy that would resolve the issues.
Methodology Introduction to Methodology
This section aims to provide information on how the study will be conducted and the rationale behind employing the discussed methodologies and techniques towards augmenting the study’s validity. In addition to describing the research design, this section will also elaborate on instrumentation and data collection techniques, validity, data analysis, and pertinent ethical issues that may emerge in the course of undertaking this study.
The primary method of data analysis for this study will consist of document analysis. As described in the book “Qualitative Research: A Guide to Design and Implementation” by Merriam (2009), document analysis primarily consists of examining academic articles, journals and books as well as various analytic and statistical reports in order to investigate a particular topic or issue.
This method of analysis primarily concerns itself with the presentation of data in support of an argument through a summary and subsequent explanation of all the literature and statistical references collected by the author.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Fishery Industry: UAE by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More This method of analysis was chosen since it would enable the most efficient investigation of the data necessary for this study as well as enables the researcher to easily present the needed data without undue complications such as scheduling issues or noncompliance with the objectives of the research which is often seen in interview/questionnaire-based studies.
Data collection for this study will actually be quite straightforward, the researcher will collect information from a variety of online databases such as EBSCOhost and Jstore as well as through other sources such as published books and articles (when available).
Online statistical databases created by the U.A.E. will also be utilized in order to collect data over the past 60 years regarding catch rates and present-day catch limitations that are being imposed on local fisheries within the U.A.E.
It is expected that through these databases an accurate representation of the current state of the fishery industry within the U.A.E. can be created.
Possible ethical considerations that may arise through this study consist of the following:
The potential for unintentional plagiarism through verbatim lifting of information, arguments and points of view from researched source material.
The use of unsubstantiated information taken from unverifiable or nonacademic resources (ex: internet articles).
The use of a biased viewpoint on issues which may inadvertently result in an alteration of the data collection results.
Presentation of data without sufficient corroborating evidence or a lack of citation.
Falsifying the results of the research for the benefit of the initial assumptions of the study.
Using views and ideas without giving due credit to the original source.
According to various research guides, “Ethics refers to the appropriateness of your behavior in relation to the rights of those who become the subject of your work, or are affected by it”. It is based on this that the researcher will attempt to perform proper research ethics on this paper by actively avoiding all the listed possible ethical issues that may arise in order to ensure the validity and veracity of the study results.
Results and Analysis Fishing within the U.A.E
It is quite interesting to note that despite being one the richest and technologically advanced regions within the world, the U.A.E. actually has little in the way of large scale local fisheries. Most of the vessels utilized for fishing within the waters off the Emirate are relatively small scale with technological developments such as trawling through the use of large nets being banned.
While from a certain perspective the U.A.E. does not rely on its fishery industry due to its rich oil reserves, the fact remains that the region considers fishing as a form of regional heritage and, as such, various policies have been enacted which have created a state of rudimentary management as compared to the state of affairs that existed 40 years ago where no effective methods of management were implemented.
Despite the artisanal (i.e., heritage-based) fishing that exists within the U.A.E., it has been shown that nearly 90 percent of its fish stocks have experienced a significant decline in the past two decades.
Not only that, combined with the fact that vessel registration within the Emirate has seen a 25% decline is indicative of the fact that not only is there a decline in the availability of local species, the local fishery industries have actually noticed this and, as a result, have scaled back their operations resulting in a scant number of vessels actually fishing the local U.A.E. coastline.
In trying to understand the decline of fish stocks within the region it is important to note that within the past 30 years, the U.A.E. has actually experienced phenomenal growth in terms of industrial and commercial property development. This has impacted not only the region’s interior but has actually encompassed aspects of its coastline as well wherein various land reclamation projects have in effect significantly altered the bio-system of established aquatic species.
Researchers such as Tourenq and Launay (2008) have pointed out that the artificial expansion of the U.A.E. coastline without heed for the possible environmental ramifications would definitely have had some form of impact on the local fish population (Tourenq and Launay, 2008).
As Tourenq and Launay (2008) explains, coastlines act not only as breeding areas and sanctuaries but are also the local of a vast percentage of the local migration patterns of aquatic sea populations. The development that has occurred within the U.A.E. has upset such a balance resulting in the declining fish populations that are seen at the present (Tourenq and Launay, 2008).
Current State of the U.A.E Fisheries Industry
Based on an examination of recent catches, it can be seen that the following fish species are the primary catches caught off the local coastline by the fishery industry:
Groupers – consists of 24.7 percent of all caught fish
Jacks- consists of 16.5 percent of all caught fish
Emperors – consists of 25 percent of all caught fish
Sweet lips – consists of 10.5 percent of all caught fish
Scads – consists of 5.2 percent of all caught fish
While it may be true that artisanal fishing vessels in the form of dhows (wooden vessels that are 15 meters in length) or outboard powered vessels “tarads” (normally 8 to 10 meters in length) are the primary means by which the local fishing industry gets its “catch” the fact remains that combined with the current state of coastline development within the country, the means by which the local fishery industry catches fish is contributing significantly to the continued reduction of fish species within the Emirate.
The reason behind this is quite simple, in combination with traditional practices the local fishery industry at times attempts to utilize banned methods of fishing, which results in considerable reductions in the local population to such a degree that the methods utilized are in effect unsustainable in the long run.
First and foremost, the use of traditional fixed stake rake nets, which are called “hadra” has lead to the catch of fish that are less than the optimum size. These fish, usually juveniles, have yet to spawn and contribute to the local fish population and, as such, their capture is incredibly detrimental towards the continued survival of local species.
The problem with hadra’s is that the netting they utilize in catching fish has not changed in design in well over 100 years. This type of netting is usually meant to catch as many fish as possible without heed for size and, as such, has holes which do not let juveniles pass through as compared to a majority of modern-day fishing nets which are more discriminate in the type of fish they are able to catch.
While the Environmental Research and Wildlife Development Agency (ERWDA) has attempted to establish a variety of new regulations limiting the types of netting utilized as well as the size of fish caught the problem really boils down to the fact that there is an insufficient means of enforcement within the region to facilitate and effective means of enforcement for the agency’s policies.
Aside from the use of hadras, there has been a significant increase in the use of illegal trawling nets in order to catch Spanish mackerel during its fishing seasons.
The main problem with trawling is similar to that of the hadras since they are indiscriminate in the types of fish caught, however, unlike the hadras trawling nets are able to catch thousands of pounds of fish at a time and, as a result, this has lead to further reduction in local fish stocks since insufficient numbers of fish have been left behind in order to help boost the population.
Another problem with the local fishery industry is related to the fact that no official numbers have been collected regarding the amount of catches per fishery vessel within the Emirate.
Despite the fact that most of the fish caught is funneled through Abu Dhabi, there has been an insufficient level of investigation at the local level in order to determine whether local fisheries are staying within the catch allotments assigned to them by the government.
As a result, there is a very real possibility that overfishing is occurring which contributes to the current decline in the local aquatic species.
Discussion Management Efforts in Resolving the Identified Issues
Some environmental management efforts to resolve to the identified issues initially came in the form of freezing the amount of licenses granted to new fishermen in 2003, yet by 2004 licenses were allowed to be issued again despite the fact that there has been no sufficient recovery on the part of the local ocean life.
Other such limitations have come in the form of a limitation on the number of fishing traps (called gargoor) to 100 per boat (Al-Qaydi, 2008). However, despite this limitation on the number of traps, there was no limitation set on other types of fishing gear per vessel (i.e., nets), which enabled the fisheries to continue fishing with no apparent reduction in the amount of fish caught.
Other restrictions attempted by the local government came in the form of requiring a U.A.E. national to be on board the boat when it attempted to fish. While such a tactic worked initially, the lack of enforcement on the part of the government when it came to ensuring that U.A.E. nationals were actually on the boats themselves resulted in subsequent “ghost fishing trips” occurring wherein nationals claimed they were on the boat but were in fact nowhere near the boat in the first place (Al-Qaydi, 2008).
While the U.A.E. was able to introduce legislation to resolve the identified issues with its local fishery industry in the form of Federal Law number 23, the fact remains that there is an insufficient structure for enforcement and investigation at the local level. Catches are not monitored on a per boat basis but rather on the amounts found within the drop off centers and declared by the boats themselves resulting in the very real possibility of catch falsification in order to show compliance with local regulations.
Not only that, with no search and seizure mandates as well as sufficiently harsh criminal prosecutions on individuals who violate the established mandates on catch limitations within the coastlines of the Emirate, this shows that the current means by which the local aquatic environment is being protected is only a “show”.
There is no means by which enforcement is created and established with various public ministries merely patching up the damage rather than directly addressing the issue.
As a result of such actions, despite the attempts of the local government to create a sustainable fishing environment within the U.A.E., the fact remains that the lack of government willingness to actually establish concrete measures of enforcement and compliance has made it so that it is likely that fish populations within the U.A.E. will continue to plummet as a direct result of overfishing and the continued rapid development of construction projects along its coastlines (Al-Qaydi, 2008).
Resolving the Problems
Aside from implementing more stringent management and regulatory procedures on local fisheries, the U.A.E. government, along with various private enterprises, has actually actively sought to help address the problem of overfishing through alternative methods. One of these methods actually involves the raising of juvenile fish by the thousands at onshore facilities, which are then released into the wild to help address the issue of dwindling supplies of fish.
This program, which was enacted by the Ministry of Environment and Water’s Marine Resources Research Center has been effective in helping to temporarily curb the decline of various fish species within the past few years. Unfortunately, despite the fact that the fishing catch within the U.A.E. ha decline from 118,000 metric tons in 1999 to 90,000 tons at the present, the fact remains that the rate of reproduction of local species has yet to reach a sufficient level to become sustainable in the long run.
Adding to this problem is a general lack of public concern surrounding the issue of declining fish populations within the Emirate. What must be understood is that a vast majority of the current fish stock within many of the U.A.E.’s markets and grocery stores are actually imported from other countries and regions.
As a result, the general public has not “felt” so to speak the declining fish availability since they are used to having a large and prolific choice of fish as a direct result of international importers.
The end result of such a state of affairs is a slow and at times redundant introduction of new juvenile fish species by the Ministry of Environment and Water’s Marine Resources Research Center which do not have the desired impact due to the lack of general public support for a respite in the amount of fish caught locally (Fujiwara, 2012).
Other attempts at reducing the amount of fish caught have come in the form of establishing small fishing farms within various areas along the U.A.E. coastline in order to help raise the needed fish in a more sustainable fashion. Such attempts have actually proven to be immensely successful and have even led to the introduction of new types of fish species being introduced into the Emirate as seen in the case of the various.
Summary and Conclusion The defining factors of a successful society in the modern-day era has been the level of industrial and technological achievement from which that society derives a certain degree of economic success and creates the trappings of what is known as the “modern-day lifestyle”.
Societies all over the world continue to strive to reach this supposed pinnacle of success; yet, the price for reaching such a goal often comes through significant environmental deterioration as seen in the case of the U.A.E.’s local fishery industry. The inherent source of the problem is not the process of industrialization itself, but the attitudes many societies have developed in response to the supposed “necessity” of reaching the goal of “modern-day success”.
People are not concerned whether or not the continued development of the U.A.E. coast leads towards the destruction of the local aquatic ecosystem nor are they overly concerned with the impact of overfishing on the local marine life, instead they are more than happy to relegate such responsibilities to the local government which itself is unwilling to take the necessary actions in fear of being labeled “too harsh” by local critics.
This is particularly troublesome when taking into consideration the difficulties involved in a conjoined societal effort to implement new practices of sustainability for the fishery industry when there is mutual distrust as a direct result of the social stratification brought about by industrialization.
Based on the various arguments presented, it can be seen that it is not the process of industrialization itself that has lead to unsustainable fishery practices and the deterioration of the local coastline environment, rather, it is the perspective of U.A.E. society at the present wherein people believe that it is necessary to industrialize in order to achieve what is perceived as a modern-day lifestyle regardless of the possible costs that is the main culprit behind the problems seen today.
Recommendation As the demand for fish grows so too will the necessity of increasingly larger means of fish extraction and delivery to supply such a demand. The inherent problem with this is that the price of finite resources continues to increase over time as demand grows. There will eventually come a time where the U.A.E. will have to deal with the dwindling supply of fish and the aftereffects that continued construction and overfishing have caused on the environment.
There are already squabbles breaking out between India, China and Egypt regarding sharing the aquatic resources that feed into their respective territories with no end in sight in finding an effective solution. It is based on this that the researcher for this project advocate better methods of aquatic species conservation as well as a certain degree of self-imposed limitations on demand growth through the following methods so as to ensure that fish resources are not completely depleted within the coming years:
Use of Propaganda to Incite Public Opinion Towards Conservation
Propaganda is a method of communication which is used to influence the attitudes of specific groups of individuals towards a particular cause or position. In essence, instead of a sense of impartiality propaganda actually presents information in such a way so as to influence an audience through selective dissemination of information in order to create an emotional rather than a rational response to certain issues.
What must be understood is that propaganda utilizes elements such as loaded questions, partial synthesis or even lying by omission in order to gain the desired response. On the other hand, propaganda is also used in various public information campaigns by governments for positive effects such as the Australian governments fight against illegal downloads connoting their use with stealing and its use by the U.S. during the invasion of Afghanistan and Iraq as a supposed “war on terror”.
In essence, the use of propaganda and its effects can be associated with the ethical reasoning behind its usage. It is based on this that a strategy utilizing propaganda can be utilized in order to help generate awareness and action among members of the general public within the U.A.E. in order to help them understand the current problems that the local fish population face and the sacrifices that must be done in order to resolve such an issue.
It is expected that through the proper propaganda campaigns general awareness will increase to such an extent that the government will have no choice but to implement far more stringent measures of control over the fishery industry to appease the clamor from the local population.
Implementing Methods of “Green” (i.e. Sustainable) Construction and Development
The term “green” means the utilization of technologies, ideals or concepts that put environmental stewardship at the forefront of one’s actions. In other words it is an attempt at modifying one’s behavior towards a more environmentally “friendly” course of action.
This means pursuing strategies involving the utilization of recyclable material, conserving resources rather than wasting them through negligent use, and finally advocating the pursuit of methods of environmental stewardship both in technologies used and in social action.
In a way going “green” can be described as a form of ethos, the concept of ethos can be described as a form of guiding beliefs that are an inherent part of a community or nation’s character. It is used as a guide that influences a person’s behavior to such an extent that by examining the ethos behind a culture you can determine how they will react based on a given situation.
It is based on this that it can be assumed that going “green” is an ideology that one attempts to follow due to it possessing characteristics that are appealing to a person’s inherent character and set of ideals. Such an aspect can be implemented in the case of the U.A.E. when it comes to the construction and development of its various coastal projects.
A variety of ecological sustainable practices can be implemented, which help to promote the continued health of the environment rather than destroy it. It is expected that should such “green” project developments occur, it can help to reduce the damage done by the recklessly destructive coastline construction that had occurred previously.
Reference List Abbasi, Maisam, and Fredrik Nilsson. 2012. “Themes and challenges in making supply chains environmentally sustainable.” Supply Chain Management 17, no. 5, pages 517-530. Business Source Premier, EBSCOhost .
Al-Qaydi, Saif S. 2008. “Tradition, Change, and Government Policy in the United Arab Emirates East Coast Fishing Community.” American Geographical Society’s Focus On Geography 51, no. 1: 1-6. Business Source Premier, EBSCOhost .
Fujiwara, Masami. 2012. “Demographic Diversity and Sustainable Fisheries.” Plos ONE 7, no. 5: 1-14. Academic Search Premier, EBSCOhost .
Merriam, S. 2009. Qualitative Research: A Guide to Design and Implementation, John Wiley
Slowdown in U.S housing market Essay college essay help online: college essay help online
Table of Contents Slowdown in U.S housing market
The government’s rent control and rental regulations
The minimum wage laws
Slowdown in U.S housing market During the period between 1998 and 2008, the prices of housing in the United States rose dramatically. In some part of the country, the prices increased by more than fifty percent (Roberts 25). This process can be explained by different factors such as deregulation, tax policies, low interest rates, and the firm conviction of many people that real estate will never depreciate (Roberts 25).
Nevertheless, in 2006 U.S. housing market began to slow down. The prices on housing declined in different regions of the United States. Despite the efforts of the government, the situation has not changed much, and the real estate market of the country remains stagnant even at the beginning of 2013.
This problem will be discussed can be attributed the fact that modern economy has become extremely interconnected, and the failure of one sector can adversely influence other areas of economy.
It is particularly important to speak about the context of this issue because in this way one can better understand its impacts. First of all, before 2006 the value of housing was important for the purchasing power of many people in the country. Furthermore, the sustainability of many banks depended on the price of housing since these institutions used real estate as a form of mortgage or collateral (Roberts 12).
Additionally, the financial performance of stock could be affected by the housing market. Thus, one can argue that different elements of the economy were extremely interdependent. This is the reason why the collapse and subsequent stagnation of the housing market produced far-reaching consequences.
There are several implications of this crisis. In particular, one can speak about the diminishing availability of credit for the population since many banks expect to receive some collateral from the borrowers. The problem is that real estate has long been the most conventional form of collateral, and currently it has become less valuable.
Furthermore, in the U.S housing market, the supply significantly exceeds the demand for real estate. Moreover, a great number of financial institutions and governmental agencies face a significant challenge. In particular, they should avoid numerous foreclosures since this trend increases the supply of the housing. These are the main challenges that should be overcome.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More One can identify several consequences that are very important. For instance, the revenues of many real estate companies dropped dramatically. These organizations have to lay off many of their workers. At this point, the sustainability of these firms is under threat. Furthermore, one should remember about the difficulties faced by homeowners.
At this point, these people do not know whether their real estate can retain its value in the future. This issue is very urgent when the rate of foreclosures increases. Furthermore, one should remember that many communities have been affected by this slowdown. Many of them have become almost abandoned because of many people had to leave their houses. This is another issue that should not be overlooked.
These examples suggest that the recession of the U.S housing market has affected various stakeholders such as homeowners, financial organizations, real estate companies and sometimes even entire communities. The most important challenge is the lack of stimulus that can revitalize this industry. This is the main problem that policy-makers and business leaders should address in order to boost the development of the American economy.
The government’s rent control and rental regulations Another issue that should be discussed is the rent control that is aimed at making housing more affordable (Rowley and Schneider 188). In many cases, governmental regulations are supposed to act as price ceilings that prevent the price of rent from increasing. Furthermore, they are designed to protect the rights of clients who often fall victims of information asymmetry (Rowley and Schneider 188).
Apart from that, these laws are designed to benefit many families since it may be difficult for them to find a new apartment. This is the main rationale for adopting this strategy. It is important to determine the implications of this policy, especially its impact on the market.
One can say that this intrusion into the market can create difficulties for tenants and renters. However, these regulations are vital for people with low levels of income.
First, it should be noted that these regulations have become extremely important at the time, when the price on housing was gradually rising. Some people could not afford to purchase a real estate, and rent was probably the only option available to them. This situation was very widespread among low-income people who could not receive a mortgage from a bank.
We will write a custom Essay on Slowdown in U.S housing market specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Nevertheless, one should also remember about people who choose to rent their houses. These individuals and organizations can be affected by inflation, while price-ceilings do not always reflect the changes in the inflation rate. Moreover, it should be kept in mind that these stakeholders can invest capital in the redevelopment of the housing that they possess (Euchner and McGovern 168).
Nevertheless, they may be unable to recover these costs by increasing rent prices. These are some of some of the main circumstances that should be considered. These factors can explain some effects of governmental intervention in the housing market.
There are several consequences and implications of this issue. First of all, researchers believe that this policy decreases the mobility of people. In other words, they are willing to stay in those cities, where they can find more affordable housing. This means that they can be deprived of many economic opportunities, for instance, when they have to find a new job (Rittenberg 100).
Additionally, economists warn policy-makers about the existence of the so-called shadow market that are hardly regulated by the government (Euchner and McGovern 168). The problem is that in state-controlled markets the demand for housing will eventually exceed supply.
The property owners, who have to work in such an environment, can rely on the backdoor payments while dealing with customers (Rittenberg 100). For example, one can mention the use of large security deposits (Rittenberg 100). This is the main danger that legislator should be aware of while designing their policies.
Yet, one should remember about another effect of price controls. They create more security for many occupants are dependent on the availability housing and the stability of prices. These people cannot be easily evicted from houses. As it has been noted before, for many families it is extremely challenging to find a new accommodation.
The rent control is supposed to uphold the rights of these people. Thus, one should not forget about the possible benefit of this strategy. Economists believe that government can give some tax relief to the property owners who have to operate in state-controlled market (Rittenberg 100). In this way, they can reconcile the interests of different stakeholders.
Therefore, one can argue that the governmental regulations can create many difficulties for people who need to rent an apartment or a house. In particular, this strategy can eventually decrease the supply of accommodation. Nevertheless, it can increase the security of many tenants. Thus, it has both advantages and disadvantages that should be taken into account by policy-makers in the United States.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Slowdown in U.S housing market by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The minimum wage laws The economic development of a country is also influenced by the existence of the minimum wage laws. According to these regulations, private companies and governmental organizations are obliged to pay a certain minimum amount of money for their hourly work (Mathis 371).
Overall, it is possible to argue that these laws are important for protecting the rights of employees in the workplace. Moreover, they are important for increasing the purchasing power of the population. This is why they can be regarded as a positive force. This is the main argument that should be examined in more detail.
It should be noted that minimum wage law has a long history in the United States. For example, they can be traced to 1933. In turn, the most recent piece of legislation is Fair Minimum Wage Act of 2007 (Mathis 372). Overall, these protective measures are particularly important for young and often unskilled people who often lack experience and expertise.
These workers are most likely to become the victims of unscrupulous employers. This danger is the most important rationale for enacting minimum wage laws in the United States. Nevertheless, one should not forget about the interests of companies that are now driven by the need to reduce their operational costs and labor expenses.
This conflict of interest is one of the reasons why these regulations are so often debated. The task of policy makers is to find some form of compromise. It is vital to look at the possible consequences of this strategy and its long-term implications.
Overall, one can say that nowadays the existence of minimum wage laws influences various kinds of businesses. These organizations can be engaged in different economic activities such as construction, hospitality, fishing, retailing, and so forth. The workers, who benefit from the legislation, often lack professional education, and their labor is not very expensive (Mathis 373).
The most important benefit of this policy is that the purchasing power of low-wage employees remains relatively stable. Some critics of this policy believe that minimum wage laws can decrease the demand for the labor of young workers. However, this hypothesis has been fully confirmed (Mathis 373).
Therefore, there are no adverse consequences of this regulation; at they have not demonstrated in an empirical way. This is one of the main points that can be made.
Thus, it is possible to argue that minimum wage laws have already become an inseparable part of the modern economic life. These regulations are important for a great number of workers in the United States.
Although some companies can be reluctant to accept these laws, they remain vital for ensuring the compensation of workers and the purchasing power of American people. This is the main reason why this initiative can be supported by the government.
Works Cited Euchner, Charles and S. McGovern. Urban Policy Reconsidered: Dialogues on the Problems and Prospects of American Cities. Philadelphia: Routledge, 2003. Print.
Mathis, Robert. Human Resource Management, New York: Cengage Learning, 2010. Print.
Rittenberg, Libbie. Principles of Microeconomics, Boston: Flat World Knowledge, 2008. Print.
Roberts, Lawrence. The Great Housing Bubble, New York: Monterey Cypress LLC, 2008. Print.
Rowley, Charles, and F. Schneider. The Encyclopedia of Public Choice, New York: Springer, 2004. Print.
Exploration of Thomas Paine’s theory Essay a level english language essay help
Table of Contents Introduction
Understanding the theory of ‘common sense’
The state of equality of mankind and the government
Introduction Several theories have been advanced by a significant number of theorists, who seek to use these theories to explain the functionality of institutions within political realms of the society. One such theorist is Thomas Paine, who coined the theory of ‘common sense’. Paine is one of the ancient theorists in history.
He developed this theory back in 1776. The theory seeks to criticize the actions of individuals and authorities. Paine’s theory has a number of empirical justifications that can help in inspiring the actions by governments and individuals concerning issues of governance (Larkin 88). This paper explores Paine’s theory of ‘common sense’.
The paper expands on the subject of equality of people in governance as poised by Paine’s theory. The paper also carries a critical evaluation and the worthiness of the arguments that are postulated by Paine.
Understanding the theory of ‘common sense’ As observed in the introductory notes, the concept of ‘common sense’ was developed in the latter years of the 18th century. During this period, the accolades of British imperialism were still prevalent in the United States.
A substantial number of modern political theorists have argued that this concept by Paine posed the first major challenge to Britain’s Authority in the United States by critiquing the actions of the British administrators in the United States. The theory is strongly founded in the development of governance in the society and the implications for which it has on the interaction of people and the government.
Common sense as brought out by Paine entails passages that appertain to natural rights; human rights made humans equal and should, thus, be treated equally. The main argument of the theory, which is the abuse of power by the political authority, is often easily justified. However, the main concern is whether the justification of such abuses warrants to be given attention by the society.
The society is built by the common demands of the citizenry, while governments are often built on the grounds of exploitative thoughts. Therefore, Paine argues that the foundations of the society promote the equality of human beings through the aspect of common needs, while the foundations of governance kill the recognition of human equality through cultivation of wickedness for gains (Paine and Philp n.p.).
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In his exploration of the origin and existence of government in the society, Paine argued that the government is often the source of miseries that befalls man. He makes a comparison of government with the existence of a society in the earth, which does not have any attributes of governance.
He notes that such a population would be quite united and respectful of the rights of each other since human beings are united by their needs under what is known as ‘society’. He made reference to how power is molded in governance, where he noted that people fear power because of its negative attributes. Therefore, the fact that the government is molded along power makes it harder for people to trust the government.
The issue of power and its subsequent exercise is a complex issue altogether and increases the difficulty of embracing the state of equality. Power is molded by both the subjects and the rulers.
While it is claimed that the subjects have a role to play in shaping the exercise of power, the rulers take advantage of the loyalty and the respect accorded to them to abuse the power vested on them. What ought to be asked is whether power can be guarded and utilized for the benefit of enhancing natural equality of human beings (Paine para. 2).
The state of equality of mankind and the government It is critical to note that the subject of equality is one of the most debatable subjects in the philosophy of governance. One thing that comes into the minds of people concerning the argument of the ‘common sense’ theory is whether the argument provides rational ideas about the issue of equality in governance. Can equality of human beings exist in the political setup?
A number of people argue that some of the arguments that are advanced in the theory of common sense can be justified because of the nature and structure of the society. However, other people find the argument to be logical by citing instances that denote the importance of the embrace of human beings by governments (Aldridge 47).
The society is wide and the question of rights and equality of human beings in the society cannot be easily explicated. This is a pointer to the fact that the passages in the common sense that appertain to natural rights are not certain, thus they are subjected to a lot of critics.
We will write a custom Essay on Exploration of Thomas Paine’s theory specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More To begin with, the publication of the theory of ‘common sense’ elicited a debate about the black population in the United States and the status or the level at which the black population had rights over the black population. It comes out that the blacks were considered to be lesser human beings than the whites. This can be blamed on the government (Paine para. 6).
What comes out here is that the issue of equality begins with the manner in which people look at each other and treat each other within the society. Racial discrimination existed in America long before independence and has continued to reign. The only difference today is that it is not done openly as was done before.
The cases of racial discrimination are still rampant and widely reported in a substantial number of states in the United States and other regions of the world. Therefore, it is quite irrational to blame the government for failing to respect the equality of human beings, while the society itself, which is considered to be a neutral entity, does not respect the equality of human beings.
However, what should be asked here is whether the government can shape the society and make it embrace human equality. Based on the foundations on which the government is built, it is doubtful to trust that the government can help the society to embrace equality of human beings (Paine para. 6-7).
Paine sought to understand the most critical thing between independence and reconciliation in the development of a nation. He noted that reconciliation is quite complex and difficult to attain, yet it is most critical in the embrace of the equality of mankind in nations. According to Paine, most nations prefer independence over exercising of independence and reconciliation.
The pursuance of independence by governments is argued to be the leading factor to the growth of dependency of nations. In the pursuance of independence, man remains to be a victim of the channels and steps that are put in place in order to attain the most sought for status by nations in the world. It makes more sense to put this argument in the contemporary political economy.
The question that needs to be asked is whether countries in the contemporary political economy pursue the doctrine of independence of the doctrine of reconciliation, and how each course promotes the equality of human beings.
Most analysts seem to be of the opinion that both doctrines are being practiced by countries, though on totally varying scales. Each country prefers to pursue dependency, which is the reason why there is a lot of competition between nations in the world today.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Exploration of Thomas Paine’s theory by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Under such intense competition, the respect of equality of all human beings is often ignored. Reconciliation often comes out as an alternative doctrine after the interests to attain dependence have resulted in actions that raise an alarm on the respect of the rights of human beings (Paine 57-60).
The other thing that comes out in Paine’s theory is the issue of absolutism in governments. Paine opines that governments lack moral virtue. This resonates from the manner in which governments are formed. The lack of moral virtue in governments is a hindrance to the respect of human nature and the equality of human beings.
Pain applauds absolute governments by arguing that the citizens in these countries are often aware of the source of disgrace to human equality. The implication of this statement is that even the governments that claim to embrace the rights and equality of human beings are found committing atrocities, which questions their commitment to enhance the doctrine of human equality (Paine 11).
Conclusion According to the argument in this paper, the theory of common sense by Paine has been subjected to criticisms by a substantial number of people. As postulated in the paper, it is quite daunting for governments to embrace natural equality because of the foundations on which government is built. The exercise of power by governments is cited as the main impediment to the embrace of natural equality.
Works Cited Aldridge, Alfred O. Thomas Paine’s American Ideology. Newark: University of Delaware Press, 1984. Print.
Larkin, Edward. Thomas Paine and the literature of revolution. Cambridge University Press: New York, 2005. Print.
Paine, Thomas, and Philp Mark. Rights of Man, Common Sense, and other Political Writings. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1995. Print.
Paine, Thomas, Common Sense: Introduction. n.d. Web. https://www.varsitytutors.com/ebooks/earlyamerica/CommonSense/3755.txt
The Natural Resource Curse Essay college admissions essay help: college admissions essay help
The natural resource curse affects countries with abundant natural resources. Studies done to investigate this phenomenon reveal several paradoxical issues relating the presence of natural resources in a country.
For instance, countries that rely on natural resources for budgetary financing seem to have an inverse economic growth in relation to the percentage of the national budget financed using natural wealth. This paper looks at the issue of the natural resource curse with a view of uncovering why some countries suffer from it, while others do not.
Natural resources refer to endowments in mineral wealth, or naturally occurring plant and animal life. Mineral wealth in this case refers to mined substances such as precious metals, gemstones, or oil wealth. Some of these resources occur near the surface of the earth. In this case, the resource may not require mining in the conventional sense.
Timber is one of the most valuable natural resources extracted from naturally occurring forests. The worldwide demand for timber is growing mainly because of increasing control and restriction on logging by authorities concerned with the conservation of nature.
To a certain extent, the presence of animals such as elephants and rhinos makes a country vulnerable to natural resource issues related to the ivory trade. However, the significance of animal related natural wealth is reducing because of greater enforcement of animal protection legislation.
The natural resource curse refers to the paradoxical situation where countries endowed with natural resources tend to suffer from poor economic growth, war, and poverty, more than countries not endowed with these resources. This is counter intuitive because the presence of natural resources should mean the availability of finances to bankroll development projects in a country.
However, many countries that have vast amounts of natural resources tend to suffer from slow economic growth, resource wars, and disproportionate levels of corruption. Scholars present various reasons for this situation that range from corruption, to weak governance.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Why Some Countries Suffer From the Natural Resource Curse There are many reasons why many countries suffer from the natural resource curse. This section examines the role of corruption, resource dependence, weak central governments, and the international business environment surrounding trade in natural resources.
The nature of natural wealth is such that it is difficult to track the exact quantities produced and then delivered to markets. In addition, after the sale of the resources, it is difficult to track with accuracy the exact amount of money that eventually ends up in projects that are for the benefit of the country. Many times, governments do not control the actual mining or extraction operations of the natural resources in their territory.
For instance, oil companies such as BP control mining operations in many territories around the world. This means that the governments cannot know with complete accuracy whether the quantities of oil mined by oil companies are the actual ones. It is also possible for a minister in charge of mining to collude with the company to defraud the country.
Since the government trusts the minister to control and report on the operations of the company, the country ends up losing revenue. On the other end, after the mining companies extract and sell minerals in the international market, the money may not reach development projects in the country because of corruption within government.
The second cause of the oil curse is resource dependence of countries endowed with natural resources. This especially affects oil-producing nations. A good example is Nigeria where the country relies on oil and gas exports to fund more than eighty percent of its recurrent expenses. This overreliance on mineral wealth makes it difficult for the government to develop a sustainable tax base.
Studies show that countries that do not have an effective tax net also tend to lack the capacity to address social issues in the country. Nigeria’s reliance on its oil wealth is part of the causative factors of the social challenges espoused by the conflict in the Niger Delta.
In addition, Nigeria is in no position to challenge the activities of oil companies when they fail to meet environmental stipulations simply because the government relies on these companies to generate its operating revenues.
We will write a custom Essay on The Natural Resource Curse specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More This situation, compared to the America for instance is appalling. America took strong action against BP after the Deep Water horizon oil spill. America does not rely on oil in the same terms as Nigeria. Therefore, it had the liberty to enforce its laws after the spill.
Thirdly, weak governments amplify the negative effects of the resource curse. A weak government does not have the capacity to address the social ills in the country. This usually comes from ineffective planning, or inconsistent implementation. Any government that cannot guarantee the territorial integrity of the country, or does not have the power to manage social order, is weak.
Countries with mineral wealth also tend to have rebel groups seeking to control mineral rich areas. For instance, rebellion in the Democratic Republic of Congo (DRC) takes place around mineral centers. No government in the DRC has gained control over the entire territory of the country. The fact that natural resources tend to occur in one region makes the resource rich areas easy targets of armed groups since they are easy to seize and control.
Finally, the resource curse is a product of tilted international trading terms. For instance, OECD countries encourage the importation of raw material such as crude oil, but it discourages the importation of processed products. Importing processed products to the OECD is difficult because of a raft of tariff and non-tariff barriers.
The net effect is that any country that wants to sell its natural resources to the OECD countries cannot establish a strong local manufacturing sector. The result is that the country remains dependent on the export of natural resources, while it imports equipment and finished products from its natural resource export destinations.
How Countries Avoid the Natural Resource Curse Despite the strong indication that natural resources tend to bring more problems for some countries that solutions, there are examples of countries that seem to have avoided the curse. In this section, we look at three factors that contribute to avoiding the natural resource curse. These factors are the presence of a strong central government, diversified economies, and diversified markets.
Saudi Arabia is one of the largest oil producers in the world. Oil accounts for about fifty percent of its national budget, and is responsible for about ninety percent of its export revenues. As such, Saudi Arabia should be suffering from the oil curse. This is not the case. The country has one of the most stable governments in the Middle East.
It did not suffer during the Arab spring and it does not have any formidable rebel groups operating within its territory. Its only exposure is from terrorists who loath the presence of American bases in the country. This is an ideological issue, rather than a resource one. The case of Saudi Arabia shows that a strong central government can avert the resource curse.
Not sure if you can write a paper on The Natural Resource Curse by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The ability of the government to maintain territorial integrity is a key part of the process of avoiding the natural resource curse. It is also instructive to note that Saudi Arabia is not a western democracy. Rather it is a monarchy. Its laws are some of the harshest in the world especially in regards to issues of social harmony.
The point here is that avoiding the resource curse is not a question of the type of government in place. Rather it is a factor of how strong the government is in the management of the country.
The second way in which countries can avert the natural resource curse is by diversifying their economies. A good case in point is Dubai, which is part of the UAE. Dubai struck oil in the mid twentieth century. The rulers of the city-state soon recognized that while the oil wealth was a great resource for the country, reliance on oil was not sustainable.
This led to the development of economic plans that sought to transfer the oil wealth to other sectors of the economy. The goal of this move was to diversify the economic base of the country. The result of this is that Dubai is now an international trade hub, known more for its free port that for its oil. Oil is still an important part of the economic mix of the country, but even if the oil sector collapsed, the country will still be operational.
Apart from its famous free port, Dubai is becoming a financial capital, a tourism hub, and a transport hub. Emirates Airlines, which is currently one of the largest airlines in the world operates from the United Arab Emirates (UAE). Apart from the diversification of the economic base of the country, the UAE makes efforts to maintain social stability by ensuring all the citizens have access to quality education and healthcare.
The third pillar in the effort to avoid the natural resource curse is diversifying the markets for the primary natural wealth. Diversifying the market for a country’s natural wealth makes it possible for the country to develop other sectors of the economy, and to control the prices of the natural wealth.
Instead of relying on exports to regions with many tariff and non-tariff barriers, it is better to develop new markets for finished products to create jobs locally. Kenya exports processed oil to its neighbors after importing crude from the Middle East. If Kenya had its own oil, then it would have the full benefits of oil extraction.
In conclusion, the natural resource curse is not impossible to deal with. However, it takes strong leadership on the part of the country endowed with natural wealth to deal with the associated issues. In this sense, the natural resource curse is really the product of bad leadership in the midst of abundance.
Works Cited Bannon, Ian and Paul Collier. “Natural Resources and Conflict: What We Can Do.” Bannon, Ian and Paul Collier. Natural Resources and Violent Conflict: Options and Actions. Washington DC: The World Bank, 2003. 1-16. Print.
Chapin, Rosemary. Social Policy for Effective Practice: A Strengths Approach. New York: Francis
Does it matter what business the firm is in; and does it matter for China? Essay writing essay help: writing essay help
Table of Contents Introduction
Analysis of Chinese economy and businesses
Introduction One of the long-standing questions amongst economists relates to whether management practices adopted by firms explain the difference in the level of their productivity especially in emerging economies (Bloom, Eifert, Mahajan, McKenzie, and Roberts 1). According to Green (8), every industry and economic sector is subject to external changes, which are in most cases uncontrollable and unpredictable.
However, the expertise and quality of management developed by a firm determines its ability to develop sustainable competencies and sufficient internal dynamic capabilities, thus enhancing its ability to cope with the external factors. International corporations are increasingly facing macro-environmental changes, which have profound and long lasting effects on their internationalisation processes.
Moreover, environmental changes also affect the management of international operations. The international aspect of business and management has changed significantly due to globalisation. Consequently, international management has become an important consideration in firms’ operations (Faria and Guedes 1).
As one of the emerging economies, China has notably been incorporated into the global economy. Most investors are considering the country as one of the optimal investment destinations. Consequently, the country has experienced a substantial increment in the volume of foreign direct investments over the past few years compared to Japan, Germany, and the US (Faria and Guedes 1).
In an effort to attain high economic growth rate, it is fundamental for the Chinese government to be concerned with how firms are implementing international management concepts. Thus, stakeholders should appreciate the significance of international management.
Various international management theories have been developed and they apply to different economic sectors. In light of this insight, this essay evaluates whether the economic sector within which a firm operates matters with reference to international management theory and its impact on China’s catch-up prospects.
Analysis of Chinese economy and businesses Following the strategic transformation undertaken by China during the 1970s, the country’s economy has undergone rapid economic growth. Its average Gross Domestic Product [GDP] for the period ranging between 1978 and 2010 was 9.8 per cent, which was the highest during that period (Fung and Peng 5).
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Over the past three decades, China has changed from being a planned economy to one of the most dynamic world economies. Some of the factors explaining the country’s high rate of economic growth include economic globalisation, adoptions of economic division of labour, adherence to market rules, and its active pursuit for a market economy (Fung and Peng 5).
Most Chinese firms are a new force within the world economy. Consequently, a significant proportion of firms are in their growth phase. However, they are experiencing innate deficiencies such as human resource management difficulties. Considering the fact that the country is in its growth stage of economic growth, most firms in China are copying and imitating their production processes.
A high rate of imitation and copying of products and services cuts across firms in diverse economic sectors in China. One of the factors promoting product imitation in the country is lack of adequate implementation of Intellectual Property Rights (IPR) mechanisms by the government.
Abraham, Konings, and Shootmaekers (8) assert that imitation of foreign products in China is widespread in all sectors such as the car, music, health care, luxury products, and the fashion sectors. However, imitation is prominent with regard to innovation and technology.
The ascent of the country to the World Trade Organisation has forced China to amend its legal framework with regard to IPR in order to promote foreign direct investment. However, this aspect has not deterred counterfeiters and pirates due to ineffective enforcement of the measures instituted to prevent massive violation of property rights (Abraham, Konings, and Shootmaekers 8).
One of the major limitations in the country’s effort to fight counterfeiters arises from the fact that the country relies significantly on administrative mechanisms rather than judicial mechanisms.
The manufacturing sector is one of the largest economic sectors in China. Most Chinese firms are investing in low-cost manufacturing in an effort to attain sufficient market leadership and stimulate the country’s economic growth (Fung and Peng 4). The manufacturing sector contributes a significant proportion to the country’s economic growth by creating employment and enhancing productivity.
We will write a custom Essay on Does it matter what business the firm is in; and does it matter for China? specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The adoption of low-cost manufacturing by most firms is necessitated by the fact that the country is experiencing high savings rates, high exports, and a low rate of consumption. On the other hand, developed economies such as the US are characterised by a high rate of consumption and imports and a low savings rate.
Due to its over-reliance on low-cost manufacturing, China has been in a position to promote its exports hence leading to accumulation of a substantial volume of foreign exchange.
In a bid to stimulate the country’s catch-up prospects, firms in the manufacturing sector should consider undertaking their own innovation rather than imitate foreign technologies. This move will culminate in the creation of a substantial competitive advantage. One of the aspects that the firm’s management team should consider in its planning relates to investing in research and development.
This move will create an opportunity for the firm to exploit optimally the opportunities presented within and without the Chinese business environment. Despite their economic sector, Chinese enterprises should consider investing in new technology in order to be competitive and catch-up and surpass their competitors.
Some of the technologies that the firm should invest in include information technology such as cloud computing, investment in sustainable and green energy technologies. Over the past decade, the technology industry has become intensely competitive. This case highlights the need for firms to institute optimal competitive strategies.
To remain competitive, TCL, which specialises in development of consumer electronics such as television has been consistent in undertaking research and development thus enabling the firm to sustain its competitiveness over the past 30 years.
In addition to research and development, the Chinese enterprises should consider investing in development of a domestic ecosystem that fosters innovation and increased productivity. This aspect will aid firms in diverse economic sectors to cope with the competitive nature of the business environment.
International management International management has undergone significant transformation over the past decade. Its development reflects the divergent context within which firms operate within the global business environment (Kriek, Beaty, and Nkomo 126). Currently, most Chinese firms have not been adequately globalised.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Does it matter what business the firm is in; and does it matter for China? by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Fung and Peng (7) are of the opinion that globalisation of most Chinese firms is directly influenced by their respective goals, intensity of competition in their respective industry and the organisational capability developed. Consequently, businesses in different economic sectors have incorporated diverse globalisation strategies in line with their needs and strengths.
However, one of the major challenges that the firms will face relates to the fact that they will have to develop a strong network in order maximise their sales. The firm’s management team will be required to formulate strategies that will contribute towards optimal exploitation of their low-cost advantage (Fung and Peng 8).
In a bid to stimulate the country’s catch-up prospects, it is paramount for the firm’s management team to consider the option of incorporating international management (IM) theories. This element will enhance the country’s competitiveness in the global market. One of the IM theories that the firm should consider in its operations relates internationalisation (Zhou and Li 456).
Considering the role of information technology in improving firms’ productivity, it is fundamental for both large and small enterprises in China to consider investing in IT. However, one of the greatest hurdles that will be faced relates to the existence of sufficient knowledge and skills with regard to IT.
Thus, Chinese firms do not have sufficient comparative advantage with regard to technology, which explains why most firms in China imitate technologies from developed countries in an effort to develop their own products.
Imitation of products and services is not only limited to the technology sector but has also spilled over to the fashion industry such as the fashion shoe and apparel sectors. Currently, China leads with regard to textile and shoe exportation. Additionally, it hosts dynamic fashion weeks in Shanghai and Beijing annually.
However, the textile and shoe sectors face a major challenge from foreign high-end firms such as Nike and Addidas, which are venturing the industry. This case has presented a major threat with regard to the promotion of creativity amongst Chinese fashion designers.
Lack of creativity has adversely affected the competition of Chinese fashion products such as shoes due to imitation thus leading to the development of a perception that poor quality fashion products are made in China (Girod 2).
In the attempt to deal with this challenge, Chinese firms should consider incorporating the concept of outsourcing. Outsourcing entails the process through which a firm seeks the services of another fir to undertake a certain task on its behalf. The outsourcing process will provide the firm with an opportunity to develop sufficient skills and knowledge regarding utilisation of the identified technology in their production process.
As a result, firms will be able to ensure that the produce competitive products and services. The concept of outsourcing should not only be limited to manufacturing services, but should also extend to service firms. In their internationalisation effort, firms’ management teams should consider
In the attempt to improve their productivity and catch-up prospects, Chinese firms should adjust their operational models by incorporating the most effective internationalisation model. Through internationalisation, the Chinese firms will be capable of creating an avenue for positioning themselves as globalised entities hence enhancing their contribution to the country’s economic growth.
Some of the strategic options that the firms’ management teams should consider in their internationalisation management practices include exportation, licensing, franchising, adoption of contract manufacturing, and foreign direct investment. Exportation will provide the firms in various economic sectors such as the manufacturing and services sector with an opportunity to venture into the identified foreign market and sell their products or services.
However, it is paramount for firms to possess a comprehensive understanding of the foreign market prior to entry. This aspect will provide the firm with sufficient knowledge to avert possible challenges that might hinder their success.
Alternatively, Chinese firms in the manufacturing sector such as Semi conductor manufacturing companies should incorporate the concept of licensing in their effort to venture the international market. One of the ways through which the firms can achieve this goal is by leasing their IPR to a firm operating in the same industry in the host country.
Licensing will enable Chinese firms to incur minimal risk in the international market while at the same time create a sufficient platform for its products to be manufactured. Consequently, the Chinese firms will be in a position to pursue their low-cost manufacturing strategy and at the same time increase profitability via increased sales.
However, prior to licensing, the Chinese firms should ensure that the host country has an effective legal framework that ensures protection of IPR (Ireland, Hoskisson, and Hitt 159).
Franchising is another option that Chinese firms should incorporate in their internationalisation efforts. Firms especially in the services sector such as hospitality should consider incorporating the concept of franchising in their internationalisation efforts.
A comprehensive market research should be conducted in order to identify and select the most favourable partner to undertake franchising with for business continuity and prosperity. Franchising will provide Chinese service firms such as hotels and restaurants with an opportunity to maximise their profitability.
Chinese firms in various sectors such as the fashion industry, semi conductor manufacturing, and services sector should enter cooperative agreements with other partners. The incorporation of cooperative strategies will provide the firms’ management team with an opportunity to deal with the technology gap that the firms might be experiencing.
This assertion emanates from the fact that the firm will be in a position to gain access to sophisticated technology possessed by the partner. As a result, the firms will be capable of dealing with the challenge of having to copy or imitate another technology, which is a major hindrance to the firms’ competitiveness in the international market (Ireland, Hoskisson, and Hitt 159).
In addition to the above international management practices, it is fundamental for Chinese firms to consider investing in a green venture. The green venture will provide the Chinese firms to exploit the opportunities presented in the international market effectively. Green venture will entail the firms establishing subsidiary firms into the international markets.
This move will provide the firm with an opportunity to undertake full control of all the activities that the subsidiary firm is involved in during its operations. In their foreign direct investment efforts, the firms will be required to ensure that operational responsibility of the subsidiary firm rests upon experienced expatriates.
The expatriates deployed to the foreign market should possess sufficient knowledge and skills to ensure that the firms gain competitive advantage in the foreign market. This aspect highlights the importance of the Chinese firms conducting a comprehensive market research in order to indentify the prevailing market trends.
The incorporation of international acquisition is another strategy that management teams of Chinese firms should take into account. The Chinese firms should incorporate a comprehensive market research of the host country in order to identify potential firms to enter a merger and acquisition partnership.
However, the Chinese firms should incorporate formation of mergers and acquisition when venturing a foreign market whereby the countries have significant cultural differences (Ireland, Hoskisson, and Hitt 159).
By incorporating the above strategies, there is a high probability of the firms in different economic sectors enhancing the country’s economic growth prospects. However, the success of Chinese firms in their internationalisation effort will not only be dependent on the choice of the internationalisation strategy, but also on its implementation.
Additionally, business executives of Chinese firms in different economic sectors should be concerned on how effectively the model selected will contribute towards the firm attaining effective business operation considering the specific industry dynamics. In a bid to improve the probability of survival, effective international management models should be incorporated.
Some of these models relate to leadership, ensuring that the firm has quality personnel, and integration of effective organisational processes, technology, and organisational structure. Additionally, an effective mechanism to determine the effectiveness and performance of the strategy should also be incorporated (Fung and Peng 7).
According to Ireland, Hoskisson, and Hitt (159), monitoring the internationalisation strategy incorporated is essential in identifying challenges that the firm might be experiencing hence creating an opportunity for improvement (Bloom, Eifert, Mahajan, McKenzie, and Roberts 7).
Conclusion The analysis conducted shows that China has undergone a significant economic growth over the past three decades. Some of the factors that have contributed to the high rate of economic growth include economic liberalisation adopted by the firm during the 1970s and the political reforms in the country. Consequently, China has become incorporated within the global economy.
Despite the high rate of economic growth, the country continues to lag behind in its economic development compared to other developed economies such as the US , Japan, Britain, and Germany. One of the factors hindering the country’s rate of economic growth arises from the fact most economic sectors especially the manufacturing sector have not developed sufficient competitiveness.
Therefore, the contribution of a majority of the economic sector to the country’s economic growth is through imitation and copying. This aspect illustrates the fact that the country has not developed sufficient comparative advantage to attract foreign investors. Additionally, the country does not have an effective legal framework to enhance innovation and creativity.
This trend is replicated across all the economic sectors. In a bid to break up from this trend, it is fundamental for the Chinese government and firms’ executives to invest in strategies that will contribute towards the development of the country’s competitiveness. Firstly, the Chinese government should ensure sufficient enforcement of the intellectual property rights.
On the other hand, business executives should consider incorporating strategies that contribute towards development of their enterprises competitive and comparative advantage. This move will contribute towards improvement in the survival rate of respective firm.
The analysis has also shown that competition due to the high rate of globalisation is one of the biggest challenges that Chinese firms are facing in their effort to contribute towards their country’s catch-up prospects. In a bid to deal with these challenges, Chinese firms irrespective of the economic sector should consider incorporating international management practices.
One of the strategies that they should incorporate in their management practices relates to internationalisation. Some of the internationalisations strategies that firms should consider while planning include the formation of strategic alliances such as joint ventures, mergers, and acquisition. Other strategies include franchising, exportation and licensing.
The success of Chinese firms in the international market is paramount in promoting the country’s catch-up prospects. The profitability of the firms will determine the country’s capability to develop a strong foreign exchange reserve base. In summary, one can assert that the economic sector within which a firm is does not matter, but what matters is its contribution to the country’s economic growth.
Works Cited Abraham, Filip, Jozef Konings, and Veerle Shootmaekers. FDI spillovers in the Chinese manufacturing sector: evidence of firm heterogeneity? Leuven: Catholic University of Leuven, 2008. Print.
Bloom, Nicholas, Benn Eifert, Aprajit Mahajan, David McKenzie, and John Roberts. “Does management matter? Evidence from India.” The Quarterly Journal of Economics 128.1 (2013): 1-51. Print.
Faria, Alex, and Ana Guedes. What is international management? A critical analysis, Rio de Jeneiro: Pria de Botafogo, 2009. Print.
Fung, Edwin, and Yali Peng. Forces driving Chinas economic growth in 2012: New thoughts, new strategies, new initiatives, New York: KPMG, 2012. Print.
Girod, Stephane 2012. Five lessons for the Chinese fashion industry from the French. PDF file. 23 Feb. 2013. https://www.accenture.com/us-en
Green, Roy. Management matters in Australia, Sydney: Department of Innovation, Industry, Science, and Research, 2009. Print.
Ireland, Duane, Robert Hoskisson, and Michael Hitt. Understanding business strategy: concepts and cases, New York: Cengage, 2010. Print.
Kriek, Harun, Dave Beaty, and Stella Nkomo. Theory building in international management research: an archival review of preferred methods, Cape Town: University of Pretoria, 2009. Print.
Zhou, Kevin, and Caroline Li. “How does strategic orientation matter in Chinese firms?” Asia Pacific Journal of Management. 2. 24 (2007): 447-466. Print.
Debate about Real ID in the New Media Essay (Critical Writing) essay help online
Certainly, the urgency of the debate of anonymity versus real ID is on the current agenda because, on the one hand, introducing real names online makes users more responsible for posting comments and photos. On the other hand, disclosing real names can threaten the privacy of the user, causing problems in a real life.
Therefore, in order to understand the shortcomings of placing real names and define the benefits of anonymous communication online, specific emphasis should be placed on reconsidering the concept of online behavior and responsibility, defining the situation when placing real names are irrelevant, and developing arguments against real ID names during online transactions.
Online behavior and responsibility for the information placed online does not actually depends on validity and credibility of user’s personal data. There is no guarantee that placing real name enhances the users’ responsibility for the comments, videos, and photos posted online. In fact, most of the users are not confident enough about the security of the private information.
Therefore, concealing their real names does not influence the responsibility users take while uploading new information. Besides, there are many other means for detecting the ID of the person, in case cyber crime is committed (Good, 2005).
Besides, while surfing various websites and databases, most of the users prefer staying anonymous because it might negatively affect their reputation. Hence, there is no actual connection between online behavior and person’s ID on the Internet.
On the one hand, placing real names increases the chances to find friend sall over the world in case a person has lost his/her close friend’s number. Nevertheless, there are many other ways to find the person, especially if this person is the one you really know. Apart from this case, there are no obstacles for user’s intent to communicate online and expand the level of involvement in the social media.
As a proof, the studies conducted by Lee (2011) have discovered that anonymity can be regarded “…as a measure to promote the viewpoint diversity in cyberspace” (p. 2). The right of anonymity is available to everyone because it is considered the main mechanism for sustaining online community. Although placing real ID seeks to alleviate such cyber crimes as copyright infringement and defamation, anonymity must still be used for secure purposes.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More While carrying out online transactions, there is a threat of fraud because clients with concealed IDs could rescue from payment. One the other hand, the information about clients’ real IDs can have serious consequences for them. The point is that financial establishment could unveil their clients’ private information to use for their own purposes.
Under these circumstances, anonymous communication online can enhance user’s safety, as well as reduce the frequency of illegal invasions to user’s accounts. To support the argument, Papacharissi (2002) states, “anonymity online assist one to overcome identity boundaries and community more freely and openly, thus promoting a more enlightened exchange of idea” (p. 16). Thus, carrying out transaction does not always involve the presence of real IDs.
In conclusion, the benefits of concealing real names are more persuading in the light of the currently increased rates of cyber crimes. Communicating online anonymously provides individuals with stronger confidence in their security and privacy. It also makes their behavior more open and friendly. Besides, anonymity can be used to search for databases and websites where name identification function is presented.
References Good, R. (2005). Anonymous Surfing: What the Benefits and Issues of Making Yourself Invisible Online? Web.
Lee, J.-Y. (2011). An Old Regime for Viewpoint Diversity of the New Media: Protecting Anonymity for a Functioning ‘Masterplace of Ideas’ in Cyberspace. Performance and Participation. 10(13), 1-20. Web.
Papacharissi, Z. (2002). The Virtual Sphere: The Internet as a Public Sphere. New Media and Society. 4(9), 9-27. Web.
Total Spending on Medicare and Medicaid Report (Assessment) essay help site:edu: essay help site:edu
Trend of total spending on Medicare and Medicaid Spending on Medicare and Medicaid has been on an upward trend since 1962. In 1962, the spending on Medicaid was $103billion. This increased to $272,771 billion in 2010. Similarly, total spending increased from $2,525 billion in 1967 to $446,477 in 2010. The spending on Medicare and Medicaid has been on an upward trend.
This can be attributed to the fact that spending on Medicare and Medicaid is a mandatory spending in the US government. These are part of entitlements given to people who meet certain eligibility requirements. These spendings form a major component of the federal budget. They account for about 52% of the total budget. The Medicare and Medicaid is directly proportional to GDP and population.
As population increases and GDP increases, the spending on Medicare and Medicaid also increases. Further, an increase in the number of unemployed citizens and retirees also contributes to the increase in total spending on Medicaid and Medicare because they receive substantial amount of the mandatory spending.
Further, increase in pricing of medical services necessitates the state to increase the allocation on Medicaid and Medicare that can match the increases in pricing. The graph below shows the trend of spending on Medicare and Medicaid.
From the graph is is evident that spending on Medicare and Medicaid had an upward trend since 1962 to 2016. The values have increased gradually from 1962 to 1986. Thereafter it started increasing rapidly over the year.
The trend after 1986 is characterized by the steep upward slope. Also, it is evident that spending on Medicare is greater than spending on Medicaid over the period under review. The graph below shows the trend of total spending on Medicare and Medicaid.
From the graph, the spending on Medicaid and Medicare put together took a similar trend as the individual spending. There was slow growth from 1962 until 1977 thereafter it experienced a steep increase. The graph below shows the trend of the percentage change of total spending on Medicaid and Medicare.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More From the graph it is evident that the percentage change in total spending from year to year has been erratic since 1962 to 2016 (estimates). This can be attributed to the dynamics in the economy ranging to from changes in GDP, changes in population structure, changes in the unemployment rate among others.
The total spending on Medicare and Medicaid can also be analyzed as a percentage of total spending on mandatory programs in the economy. In 1962 the percentage of total spending on Medicare and Medicaid as a percentage of total spending was 0.37%. The percentage increased to 37.6% in 2010.
The value has been gradually increasing over the years. The graph below shows trend of increase in total spending on Medicare and Medicaid as a percentage of total spending on mandatory programs.
In the graph, it is evident that the total spending on Medicare and Medicaid as a percentage of total spending on mandatory programs has been increasing steeply over the years. It is mainly attributed to increase in cost of medical services in the country and many more factors. As at 2015, the state estimates that it will be spending more than 40% of the total allocation for mandatory programs on Medicare and Medicaid.
Finally spending on Medicare and Medicaid can be compared with current and constant prices. The total amount of spending on Medicare and Medicaid in constant dollars is less than $1,000billion for all the year. When plotted together with total spending in current dollar, the values are negligible as shown below.
When total spending on Medicare and Medicaid in constant dollars shows an upward trend as plotted in the graph below.
Apple Inc Market Entry Audit: The Entry of Apple Inc into a New Market with an Existing Product or Service Essay best college essay help
Executive summary Apple Inc. is a publicly listed American company specializing in the production of high technological electronic products, computer hardware, and software (Apple Inc, 2010). The company products include personal computers, media devices, mobile communication, and portable-digital music players. However, during its international market operations, Apple faces various challenges and opportunities.
The company is nonetheless committed towards bringing the best user experience to all clients around the world through its innovative hardware and software. The peripherals and services have driven the company to open up its operations in the major emerging markets.
Thus, this report analyses Apple Inc market entry using frameworks such as Porters five forces, PESTEL, and SWOT. It concludes recommendation on what Apple should do to remain competitive.
Apple Inc Market Entry Strategy. Company overview Apple Inc. is a publicly listed American multinational company specializing in the production of high technological electronic products, computer hardware, and software (Apple Inc. 2010). Under the electronic hardware category, the company products include personal computers, media devices, mobile communication, and portable-digital music players.
In addition to high tech hardware devises, the company produces a variety of software applications including third-party digital content applications and networking solutions. Within the mobile communications category, the company has launched into the market a variety of Smartphones including iPhone and other android Smartphones that have significantly hit the world Smartphones market.
The company is currently the market leader in the android smart phones and computer technology market. The company operations are based on geographical locations. In fact, the operations of the company are segmented based on the nature and location of its customers. The research report analyzes the external and internal environment where Apple Inc operates using various frameworks.
Main Findings Current Market Situation: External marketing environment. PESTEL analysis
Apple Inc. is a multinational company operating in many countries especially in North America, Europe and Asia. Thus, its products are sold in a wide spectrum of political environments. Moreover, its Smartphones consumers are spread across the political divide found in all parts of the world.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Therefore, political consideration is very important factor especially when introducing a particular product in the foreign country market. Thus the company marketing strategies must be in line with the country policy in which its products are sold (Herzog, 2010).
The current economic situation around the world has a profound effect not only on the company products but also on the general production capacity. The recent economic downturn experienced in America and Europe has a considerable consequence on the Smartphones domestic market. Sales for the Smartphones reduced as majority of consumers switched to other essential products as their income reduced.
Reduction in sales was also experienced in many parts of Europe as well as in many countries around the world. However, this presented an opportunity for the company to introduce cheaper Smartphones in the market (Wernerfelt 172).
Social and cultural factors
The company Smartphones is sold in an open cultural environment. Moreover, its target market of younger generation pursue vogue and like cultures. Their lifestyles are similar in almost all parts of the world. Moreover, the company Smartphone’s process designs are simplified to meet the needs of all cultures.
The company Smartphone’s designs combine simplicity and beauty, the logic that is praised highly in all parts of the world. All the Smartphones that the company has launched into the market has been popular among the younger generation, which has revolutionized the generation cultures (Blomstermo, Sharma
The World’s Most Ethical Companies: a Case of PepsiCo Research Paper college application essay help
Introduction Corporate concern about ethics has grown in prominence in recent times as business entities strive to incorporate moral values and principles into their operations. Companies no longer focus singly on profit maximisation and expansion of their businesses, but they also explore ways of treating the consumers, employees, and the environment in a morally praiseworthy manner (Shaw, 2011).
It is a common practise in the contemporary organisations to find special departments that are exclusively established to cater for the ethical needs of the organisations. As a matter of fact, various independent bodies evaluate the extent to which organisations employ ethical management and practise with the view of recognising their efforts and influencing improved services.
Companies are also realising the connection between their ethical practices and management, on the one hand, and the profit margins they register each financial period, on the other hand (Shaw, 2011). This paper seeks to discuss the ethics concept in business by specifically analysing PepsiCo’s practise in the same area.
Pepsi’s Morally Responsible Actions Environmental management
PepsiCo has an established elaborate policy on the environment, health, as well as safety management. The policy seeks to ensure that the company caters for its immediate business environment effectively. The policy comprises of eight critical points that include ownership culture, business integration, regulation compliance, as well as resource allocation (PEPSICO, n.d.).
It additionally entails the aspects of performance measurement, continual improvement, together with stakeholder collaboration and annual review.
In terms of ownership culture, for instance, the company’s policy identifies the need to build and sustain a proactive culture through driving environmental ownership, individuals’ health and safety, and managing the overall environmental aspect at the organisational level. The company engages, consults, as well as trains its people to influence active participation to enable these plans achieve realistic goals.
Another important aspect of the environmental management programme is the issue of stakeholder collaboration. PepsiCo works in collaboration with its business partners, such as the contractors, suppliers, licensed bottlers, along with the local communities and customers to limit the health, environmental, and safety outcome related to its daily operations (PEPSICO, n.d.).
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More PepsiCo also works with a different group of stakeholders that comprises of governments, academia, other interested stakeholders, in addition to business associations and non-governmental organisations for purposes of striving to widen effective and sustainable resolutions with regard to health, environmental, and safety confrontations or challenges, all of which face the company’s operations.
Ethical Consumer Treatment
PepsiCo also strives to ensure that it treats its customers in morally acceptable ways without allowing inhumane practices to penetrate through its corporate human resource practises. The beverage and food company definitely deals with a large number of consumers that may prove too tricky to handle or manage effectively because it is a large multinational firm with a presence in almost all the continents in the world.
The firm has established a global code of conduct that generally identifies the main objective of conducting business in the right way as a part of its corporate mechanism aimed at ensuring that customers of the firm are treated in a moral way (PEPSICO, n.d.).
Employees are expected to adhere to these codes of conduct and embrace the underlying principles as a way of ensuring that the company achieves and sustains its objectives for long (PEPSICO, n.d.).
The code includes a requirement to show total respect at the workplace, an obligation to always act with integrity within the marketplace, as well as the expectation that all workers ensure ethics in the business activities that they undertake.
Additionally, and more importantly, workers are required to perform their respective tasks in more responsible ways for the purpose of fulfilling the shareholders’ expectations effectively (PEPSICO, n.d.). The company revises its acceptable practises more often to incorporate changing laws that may, in one way or the other, affect on its corporate operations as a way of making the corporate code of conduct more effective.
Moral Action towards Employees
PepsiCo fully supports and expresses a commitment to its entire workforce. The company encourages a diverse corporate culture where any qualified individual from whatever race, tribe, nationality, or gender can apply for job positions in the firm and be considered for employment without any discrimination.
We will write a custom Research Paper on The World’s Most Ethical Companies: a Case of PepsiCo specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The company looks at this goal as an important one that encourages creativity amongst the workers, while also offering a chance for benefitting from new and unique perspectives (PEPSICO, n.d.).
Pepsi realises the key role that its employees play towards ensuring that the company attains its objective towards the customers. In particular, its corporate philosophy identifies the importance of the firm maintaining mutual respect, workplace safety, and integrity.
Pepsi’s inspiration of a collaborative culture focuses on recruiting, as well as retaining world-class talent by ensuring that its workers achieve employment satisfaction or what the company refers to as “Talent Sustainability” (PEPSICO, n.d.).
A perfect example of actions employed by the firm in encouraging employees to speak out entails the provision of an Organisational Health Survey that is conducted every two years with a view of obtaining opinions concerning the organisation and the general workplace.
Effects of the Morally Conscious Decisions on the Company’s Bottom line Customers. Trust
The morally acceptable practices and decisions of the company are likely to enhance customer trust and confidence towards the company.
Because the employees are showing greater dedication in serving the customers, the latter feel comfortable to conduct business with the firm than would be the case had the workers not been considering ethical and moral practises.
As this trust is developed and maintained by many potential customers, the company eventually succeeds in enlarging its profit margins because of high sales that translate into higher revenues.
The moral actions directed towards the workers by the firm enhance the level of their motivation. The workers feel they are highly valued and consider themselves as owners of the firm. They are willing to increase their output because they are aware that their collective hard work will, in turn, mean that they will receive more benefits from the employer.
Not sure if you can write a paper on The World’s Most Ethical Companies: a Case of PepsiCo by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More As the employees’ motivation increases and they express their willingness to work even harder for the firm, they enhance the chances of profitability because more consumers get served satisfactorily. This increases their trust towards PepsiCo.
PepsiCo is likely to achieve a workforce that is highly satisfied with its mandate due to its continued employee moral programmes. Workers who are fully aware that their needs, both material and emotional, are well taken care of are less likely to consider changing employers. Instead, a huge percentage of them would prefer working with the same satisfying employer until they attain their retirement ages.
This is critical for PepsiCo because it will no longer face the need for undertaking employee recruitments after every short while. As a matter of fact, high employee turnover rates disrupt the overall planning and operation of the firm because the management has to keep training new employees who only last for a short while before quitting in search for better employers.
The firm is likely to receive greater support and positive collaboration from the societies because PepsiCo is expressing a willingness to support the local communities through numerous environmental management programmes.
For instance, foreign governments will be willing to issue the firm with operation licences in their respective territories because they realise the benefits that the society will achieve in the long run. This kind of goodwill from the communities allows the company to expand its market and improve its revenue capabilities.
Critical Review of PepsiCo’s Ethical Policies
PepsiCo identifies six critical guiding principles that form the basis of its ethical policies and management. They include care for customers, the sale of products that attract pride, speaking the truth, and balancing the short-term plans with the long-term ones (PEPSICO, n.d.). Additionally, the firm emphasizes diversity and inclusion, while highlighting the need to respect others as a way of achieving success as a whole.
The company has divided these six critical guiding principles to address all its significant areas of business. In particular, the principles address issues about customers, products, verbal communication with the shareholders, and overall future ethical plan of the organisation (PEPSICO, n.d.).
It also addresses the issue of employment with regard to a diverse workforce and the employee conduct and behaviour not only towards the customers, but also towards the employees (PEPSICO, n.d.).
Ethical Areas Needing Improvement
Given its wide array of products, PepsiCo also uses a lot of packaging materials that end up impacting negatively on the general environment (Wilburn
Food Ethics Essay college essay help online: college essay help online
Table of Contents Introduction
The Responsibilities of the Government in Food Ethics
The Responsibilities of Producers in Food Ethics
The Responsibilities of Consumer in Food Ethics
Introduction Food ethics has gained relevance in the recent past, especially following the increase in food-related health problems. We have a responsibility to various stakeholders, other than ourselves, to be healthy. Government spends a lot of money in the health sector, especially due to the rise in lifestyle diseases. Cardiovascular diseases and diabetes account for the highest expenditure for the government in the health sector.
We have a responsibility to the government to be healthy. This is so because by being healthy, we will reduce the expenditure in the health sector, and this finance can be channeled to other sectors of the economy. Government depends on its healthy working population to earn its revenues. When we remain healthy, we will be able to work, and government will earn its revenues by taxing our income.
When we get sick and unable to work, we will not earn any taxable income, and this would deny the government opportunity to earn its revenue from us. It is also important to note that we work for the government in various positions, especially those of us working in public institutions. When we do not remain healthy, it means we may not be able to carry out some of the activities for the government.
This may paralyze its operations. We have a duty to remain healthy for the sake of our family members. When we get sick, a lot of money is always spent by the family in treating us. We should remain healthy in order to eliminate the need for this expenditure.
If we are healthy, we will be in a position to work and provide for these families. It is therefore, a fact that we have a responsibility to the society to remain healthy in order to play various roles assigns to us.
The Responsibilities of the Government in Food Ethics The government has the biggest responsibility in safeguarding the health of the food industry. According to Gottwald (92), consumers are not always able to determine the ingredients of food that is presented to them. Most of the food manufacturers would always want to avoid revealing the true contents of their products once they realize that they could be containing some forms of contaminated substances.
For this reason, they would give a false list of the ingredients in their products. Consumers do not have specialized instruments that they can use to determine the quality of foods presented to them. Pojman (45) notes that the government has enough resources and manpower to monitor operations of various food processors and determine the health conditions of the food they present to the public.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More It is therefore, their responsibility to ensure that they safeguard the health of food industry. As was explained in the introduction above, government is always affected when its citizens fall sick after eating unhealthy foods.
It would be forced to treat them, besides losing the income that would have been generated if the population were to remain healthy. Given that it has all the instruments that can enable it monitor food industry, it should do all that is within its powers to ensure that food industry is responsible enough to provide healthy foods.
The Responsibilities of Producers in Food Ethics For a long time, there has been an argument that the corporate responsibility of business units is to make profits in order to give shareholders good returns. This may be true to some extent because firms can only exist if they remain profitable.
However, taking this as the central or the only corporate responsibility is an act that is not only unethical, but also illegal in case the process of gaining the profits affects other parties negatively. According to Burgan (31), corporate institutions in the food industry are in the best position to understand the ingredients that are put in the foods they produce.
These institutions know the types of ingredients that pose health problems when consumed. They also understand the quantities of specific ingredients that may pose health problems to people when taken. For this reason, they have the responsibility of ensuring that products they deliver to the public is safe enough for consumption. According to Vandamme (118), consumers love tasty foods.
They will therefore, go for such food items that have been prepared with a lot of calories or sugar. They enjoy eating such junk foods just because of the sweetness or their good taste. However, they fail to appreciate some of the health consequences they expose themselves to by eating such foods. It is the responsibility of the corporates to inform consumers of the contents of what they eat.
They can issue warnings as appropriate to the consumers, especially in relation to the volume that each product should be consumed per given period. As Farnworth (72) notes, the business units should develop a clear labeling systems that specifies the quantities of every ingredient they use. This will ensure that consumers understand the kind of elements they expose their body to when they consume such food items.
We will write a custom Essay on Food Ethics specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Alcoholic companies have accepted the responsibility of warning their consumers against excessive drinking. These institutions should also warn their customers against excessive consumption of some types of food. They should explain to the consumers the most appropriate amounts that should be taken and inform them why it is important to take these amount. This should be done through labeling.
As part of their corporate social responsibilities, these institutions should use media and other channels of communication to educate consumers on healthy eating. This way, they shall have met their obligation to the consumers and to the government. They will not be held liable when a section of their consumers decides to ignore the warnings.
The Responsibilities of Consumer in Food Ethics Consumers have a major role to play in food ethics. According to Pence (46), illiteracy levels have gone down in various countries around the world, and most of the consumers are always aware that the type of food they eat poses serious health consequences to them.
Hamburger is one of the most popular snacks, especially among the youth. Grilled chicken and red meat are also very popular. These consumers know, from their learning experience or the articles they read, that these are some of the most dangerous foods because of their levels of cholesterol.
However, they still go ahead to consume these products because of the sheer pleasure they generate from them. This is not only being irresponsible to their own health, but also exposing their families and the government into unnecessary expenditures when they fall sick. For this reason, consumers have a major responsibility in ensuring that they maintain healthy eating.
The responsibility of the consumers’ lies in understanding the type of food they eat in order to avoid what is considered unsafe. As mentioned above, many people around the world are literate. This means that they have the capacity to analyze the type of food they eat in order to ensure that they are safe.
They can take the initiative of analyzing all types of food they eat in order to determine their safety levels. Time and resources taken in such analysis are always much less as compared to the resources that are spent when one falls sick. Through this initiative, they will be able to plan their diets in order to ensure that they eat safe foods.
Consumers also have the responsibility to demand to know the true ingredient of every food they take. Food processors have ignored the request that all their products should be labeled because their consumers are always willing to buy the unlabeled foods. Consumers should reject any food that lacks proper labeling of the ingredients used to prepare them.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Food Ethics by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Conclusion Food industry is one of the most important industries in a country’s economy. It is important for all the players in this industry to ensure that they maintain high levels of ethics in order to avoid cases where unhealthy foods are presented to consumers.
Government has the regulatory responsibility to ensure that producers use safe ingredients and label all their products. The producers have the responsibility of using safe ingredients and labeling their products. Consumers have the responsibility of questioning the products presented to them, and ensuring that they only take safe products.
Works Cited Burgan, Michael. Ethics of Food. London: Raintree, 2012. Print.
Farnworth, Cathy. Creating Food Futures: Trade, Ethics and the Environment. Aldershot, England: Gower, 2008. Print.
Gottwald, Franz-Theo. Food Ethics. New York: Springer, 2010. Print.
Pence, Gregory. The Ethics of Food: A Reader for the 21st Century. Lanham: Rowman
American Television History Research Paper essay help site:edu
Table of Contents Understanding the Origins of the Shift
Integration into Television Programming
Mass Media and Commercialism
Advertising and the Depiction of Ethnic Minorities
Understanding the Origins of the Shift Entertainment programming, as we know it today has undergone numerous iterations over the past 70 years ever since its inception during the early days of radio. In this instance, what will be focused on are the transitions in programming brought about through the influence of advertisers and sponsors.
What must be understood is that radio and television programming is “free” only from the perspective of the viewer/listener. Behind the programs is an assortment of contractual obligations that beholden a network to a series of brands and corporate sponsorships that pay to have their brand or company at the forefront of the public consciousness.
Schwoch (1990) explains that unlike the early years of radio broadcasting, which were characterized by little to no thought being placed on advertising sponsorship or commercialism, television programming from its very inception focused on the use of commercial support from the very start (Schwoch, 56).
This was one of the early signs of the transition where commercialism would dictate entertainment programming given the level of control that was developed into television network culture at its very onset.
On the other end of the spectrum, the culture of radio broadcasting advertising was far different wherein the approach was less “aggressive and bombastic” and instead focused on a softer and more cautious approach (Schwoch, 57).
Instead of the desire to control, what was present was a form of careful “reverence” involving advertising through radio as a medium wherein it was thought that an overly aggressive attitude would have resulted in a negative reaction not only from the audience itself but from the broadcasters.
Not only that, early advertising culture involving radio broadcasts were thought of as not only vehicles for the promotion and sale of products, but actually enabled a certain manner of self-improvement on the part of the listener through the broadcasted message.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Examples of this can be found on classic advertising spiels (i.e., scripts) utilized during the 1920s to the 1930s wherein the brand name of a company was mentioned after which it was followed by some manner of uplifting message (ex: Kellogg’s cereal wishes you a pleasant evening, drive safe and be sure to kiss your children goodnight).
The culture of broadcasting was less “in your face” and more focused on the projection of a positive brand image through association with a respectful and caring company. This changed in the coming years as advertisers transitioned from utilizing uplifting messages to aspects related to the present-day materialistic culture (i.e., utilizing visual mediums to show the use and advantages of products.
Due to the lack of sufficient early network infrastructure for television during the early 1940s (i.e., no major networks, stars, performers, etc.), this necessitated more “drastic” means of wooing advertisers to switch to television.
What you have to understand is that advertising agencies at the time became more accustomed towards having major roles in the production process of radio commercials through with their own sets, equipment, talent, etc. (Schwoch, 58).
When it came to television and the high costs associated with building their own advertising sets with no means of determining whether the ad would be effective or not (i.e., there was no means of measuring the number of television viewers at the time), this created a considerable degree of hesitance among advertisers to utilize television as a medium.
It was only when technological improvements arrived that improved the ability of broadcasts to reach a larger audience range and the fact that broadcasters mentioned to advertisers that television broadcasting was the “wave of the future” and would be thought of as “new, hip and exciting” that advertisers entered into mainstream television broadcasts.
When examining this section, it can be seen that the fundamental infrastructure for commercialism to be the driving force behind American television was laid out at the onset of creating television as a broadcasting medium.
We will write a custom Research Paper on American Television History specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More By making the system more “beholden” to advertisers and ensuring that the advertising culture at the time focused more on product advertisement and less on uplifting messages as seen during the prime years of radio broadcasting, this in effect changed the entire system.
As it will be shown in the succeeding sections, the culture of electronic advertising changed wherein advertisers became increasingly aggressive with their product placements and means of getting the public to be more aware of the company to the extent that they in effect dictated television programming to a certain degree.
Integration into Television Programming In American television history, one of the most pivotal examples of how commercialism became the driving force behind television programming can be seen in the 1950s sitcom “The Goldbergs”.
From its early success a radio sitcom, the series branched out into television programming at which point the style and message of series changed from being a working-class sitcom to being a television series that in effect glorified materialism and focused on “keeping up” with neighbors and friends alike in terms of having a certain lifestyle and being able to purchase particular types of products.
As explained by Brook (1999), while advertising during radio programming was expected by audiences during the 1920s to the late 1940s, it was not as overt as the process utilized in television programming by the 1950s. When it came to radio station programming, advertisements acted more as by-lines or even an afterthought to the main program itself.
While present, it was not at the immediate forefront of the perception of the listener at the time and could be considered as being relatively passive.
However, Brook (1999) explains that during the early iteration of television sitcoms, commercials became more integrated into the very show that was being presented as evidenced by the manner in which Molly, one of the titular characters from the Goldbergs, openly advertised a particular product at the start of every show with various types of product placement being integrated into scenarios as deemed fit by the producer (i.e., coffee cans with brand labels, pictures of the product, etc.) (Brook, 47-48).
Television stars in effect became hawkers of products with the programming often shifting in order to accommodate the type of product that was being hawked at the time.
Not sure if you can write a paper on American Television History by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More For example, when the sponsors of “The Golbergs” shifted from the Sanka coffee company to Rybutol (a division of a vitamin company) the normal opening scene of Molly presenting a product on a window sill immediately shifted to looking at a vitamin bottle that was placed on a window sill with a sudden close-up of the bottle with a line of dialog extolling its virtues.
This type of “in your face” advertising signified a distinct shift in the advertising culture at the time wherein instead of being camouflaged, skillfully integrated into the storyline of the program or hyper-realized in some way, the consumerist aspect of it now became openly embraced and forced directly into the forefront of the viewing experience.
Brook (1999) explains that while standalone commercials did eventually come into being wherein direct product advertisements were not as obvious in television programming, the fact remains that this just gave way to passive advertising in programs wherein the materialistic culture espoused by advertising was integrated into their scripts (Brook, 49 -53).
Brook (1999) points to the episodes of “The Goldbergs” wherein a distinctly materialistic orientation can be seen where the actors extol the virtues of particular consumer goods, present the notion that materialism is a social concept that is normal and should be lived up to and that excess consumption was no longer the domain of the rich and famous, rather, it extended to ordinary people as well (Brook, 51-55).
From a certain perspective, it can be stated that television programs in effect became one long commercial program which employed subversive and indirect means of bringing a particular product or lifestyle to the forefront of the thoughts of the American public that was viewing the program.
Evidence of this can be seen in glorification of certain types of suits and leisurewear, showing characters as having a distinct patronage towards particular types of products as well as showcasing how particular products became symbolic emblems of particular social classes (i.e. fur coats for the rich, petticoats for the middle class, as well as different models of cars, etc.).
This degree of cultural symbolism can be considered a manifestation of influences of advertisers in getting their respective brands and products out there in order to develop greater consumer interest through symbolism (Nelson, 333-340).
What this entailed was that when consumers saw a particular product being utilized and extolled by the social class that they belonged to, this in effect created a reaction wherein the came to associate that product as a symbol of their class and actively attempted to incorporate such a status symbol in their own lives.
This is one of the primary reasons behind the development of particular types of fashion trends over the years wherein items associated with “the working man”, “the hipster” and “the rich” were inspired by their counterparts on television that caused people to believe that they needed such products in order to be associated with their respective social class.
In a rather apt analogy regarding the shift towards commercialism controlled programming, Brook (1999) had stated the following:
“They were no longer a bridge to the white suburban middle class; they had become that class. The American Dream they had so ardently sought-and sold-had enfolded them, The Goldbergs, in its 1955-56 season, was for all intents and purposes a new show.” (Brook, 55-56)
While such a phrase was meant to encapsulate the change in the show “The Goldbergs”, it is also a rather apt way of showing how television programming had in effect “shifted” towards a more “overt” means of direct advertising where, through control of the creative process, advertisers in effect helped to shape television programming towards a method that influenced consumer purchasing decisions by presenting methods of product symbolism, cultural analogy and showcasing how a materialistic culture was perfectly acceptable.
Mass Media and Commercialism From the perspective of MacDonald et al. (1980), mass media whether in the form of radio or television showcased a profound effect on influencing the culture that it was set in (MacDonald et al., 303-14).
This came in the form of cultural predilections, social terminologies, ideas regarding social conditions and even themes associated with politics becoming aspects that could invariably be influenced through mass media and how viewers associated their everyday attitudes with what they heard on the radio or saw on television (MacDonald et al., 303-14).
In effect, their concept of social identity was influenced by what they saw on television and this had a profound impact on the development of American culture at time. Television and radio (to a certain extent) became a source of emulation and it still is as a matter of fact.
Popular culture (pop culture), as it is known today can be considered as a manifestation of mass media that was intentionally created by producers for the sole purpose of selling and advertising particular goods and services.
While on the surface, there may not seem to be any overt forms of advertising being done through pop culture, what you have to understand is that there are usually extensive systems in place meant to monetize nearly every single aspect of it.
For example, one of the classic icons of mass media popular culture is the average music star. Showcasing himself/herself as being hip, trendy and popular on television is a type of pop culture entertainment; however, what you have to understand is that such an individual is for all intents and purposes a product that was meant to be displayed to the general public in order to create a certain desire for emulation among viewers.
As a result, people that view the program are likely to purchase that music star’s records, pay for tickets to go to their concert, buy their merchandise, purchase the products they endorse and an assortment of other activities that puts money into the pockets of television producers and advertising executives.
Mass media has been recognized by advertisers as a perfect tool for creating public interest for whatever product they deem necessary and, based on the popularity of pop culture, showcases how yet again commercialism is one of the driving forces behind the development of American television as we know it today.
Advertising and the Depiction of Ethnic Minorities Lipsitz (1986) states that “Television delivers audiences to advertisers by glorifying consumption, not only during commercial breaks but in the programs themselves “ (Lipsitz, 355).
He attempts to showcase this by showing how despite ethnic working-class households being an inappropriate setting for depicting indulgence in materialism, a program’s producers during the 1950s get around this by showing ethnic families in urban working-class neighborhoods during historical periods where there are rising standards of living and better conditions for the working class and the rich alike (Lipsitz, 356-358).
In effect, the glorification of materialism is justified under the context that the conditions that the ethnic urban working class find themselves in are conducive towards such a means of consumption.
Lipsitz (1986) implies that ordinarily such a depiction would normally be counterintuitive to how ethnic working households at the time were really like given the economic hardships encountered by immigrants during this period. Shows such as “Mama” and “The Goldbergs” exemplified consumerist characteristics that advertisers wanted to depict.
The focus on consumer spending on some episodes, of conforming to the particular ideals of a social class as well as usage of particular types of products were all meant to do one very basic thing: sell products. The shows, while hilarious up to a certain point, were basically cleverly crafted commercialized advertisements meant to sell products and a particular lifestyle choice that advertisers wanted viewers to emulate (Nelson, 333-340).
Works Cited Brook, Vincent. “The Americanization of Molly: How Mid-Fifties TV Homogenized.” Cinema Journal. 38.4 (1999): 45-67. Print.
Lipsitz, George. “The Meaning of Memory: Family, Class, and Ethnicity in Early Network Television Programs.” Cultural Anthropology. 1.4 (1986): 355-387. Print.
MacDonald, Fred, Michael Marsden, and Christoper Geist. “Radio and Television Studies and American Culture.” American Quarterly. 32.3 (1980): 301-317. Print.
Nelson, Richard. “Sources for Archival Research on Film and Television Propaganda in the United States.” Film History. 3.4 (1989): 333-340. Print.
Schwoch, James. “Selling the Sight/Site of Sound: Broadcast Advertising and the Transition from Radio toTelevision.” Cinema Journal. 30.1 (1990): 55-66. Print
Bullying in the Workplace Research Paper college essay help near me: college essay help near me
Table of Contents Abstract
A culture of workplace bullying
Bullying in the workplace and its ethical connection
Laws of leadership and bullying in the workplace
The law of Respect
The Law of Influence
Abstract Bullying in the workplace has been a huge challenge that most organizational leaders have been struggling to contain. A common feature in most organizations is a workforce where members lack mutual respect for each other, fail to cooperate, intimidate each other, and constantly looking down upon weaker members.
Workplace bullying refers an unswerving pattern of bodily, psychological, or collective behavior subjected to an employee, which has the ability to compromise their dignity, cause harm or any form of threat. Promotion of ethical practices is very crucial for success in any organization, as people learn to respect each other, cooperate, and remain faithful to their duties and responsibilities.
Bullying within the workplace has many effects on the overall performance of an organization, such as poor employee retention rates and high cost of operation.
Everyone has the responsibility of stopping this culture of bullying within the workplace. Organizational leaders have an ethical obligation to ensure that they deal with cases of bullying within the workplace in a professional manner that demonstrates equality, honesty, and high sensitivity to the needs of others.
Introduction One of the greatest challenges that organizational leaders have today, is the need to create an ethical and cohesive workforce. The human resource department in an organization plays an important role in promoting ethical behavior within a workforce (Thompson, 2012).
Recruitment and selection is one of the crucial processes in every organization, because it determines the nature and character of people that form the workforce team. A common feature in most organizations is a workforce where members lack mutual respect for each other, fail to cooperate, intimidate each other, and constantly looking down upon weaker members.
One of the unethical practices common in most workplaces is bullying. Bullying refers to the act of intimidating a weaker person to make them do something (Needham, 2003). Bullying is a behavior that many people associate with a playing field. However, the unethical practice is slowly elbowing its way into the comfort of various workplaces.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More This character trait compromises the objective of the ethical principle of the common good. This principle argues that in order to achieve the benefits of the common good, everyone has to play their part and ensure they look out for the welfare of others.
Workplace bullying refers an unswerving pattern of bodily, psychological, or collective behavior subjected to an employee, which has the ability to compromise their dignity, cause harm or any form of threat (Thompson, 2012).
The tactics applied in workplace bullying can be either verbal or non-verbal depending on nature of messages sent, the recipient, the sender, and the environment under which it happens. Bullying in the workplace is unethical and unacceptable.
A culture of workplace bullying Bullying is a culture that has slowly developed among various workplaces, as the organizational leaders struggle to develop effective strategies for human resource planning and management. Bullying within the workplace has a close link to the behavior of culprits during their school days, where such unethical habits develop among many people (Chekwa
Marketing Manager Research Paper best college essay help: best college essay help
Introduction Marketing refers to the “management process through which goods and services are developed and sold to customers”. Marketing activities include product development, setting prices, identification of distribution channels, and implementing promotional strategies. These activities are often executed by marketing managers in most companies.
This paper will highlight the marketing principles that can be used to market Ford F-150 SVT in the United States and China. Ford F-150 SVT is a truck model manufactured by Ford Motor Company in the United States. Ford F-150 SVT can gain market share in China because it provides the four utilities of customer value and the demand for trucks in China is high.
Description of Ford F-150 SVT The four utilities of customer value include “functionality, time, place, and ease of possession”. Functionality refers to the tangible attributes of a product such as its durability, color, and safety.
Ford F-150 SVT has several in-built safety mechanisms such as front and rear cameras to ease navigation and hill descent control to prevent accidents when driving on steep terrain (Ford Motor Company, 2013). The truck is also available in several colors to satisfy the tastes and preferences of different customers. Similarly, the truck has manual and automatic gearbox options to ease its use.
Time utility refers to customers’ ability to access a product whenever they need it. Ford Motor Company has established a global distribution network to ensure that Ford F-150 SVT gets to the market at the right time.
The company also focuses on mass production of trucks to avoid delays in fulfilling orders (Ford Motor Company, 2013). Ford Motor Company has also partnered with independent distributors in countries where it does not operate to sell Ford F-150 SVT.
Place utility “includes where and how the product or service is delivered”. Ford F-150 SVT is sold through the company’s website and show rooms. Once the truck is purchased, the company arranges for shipment to the customer.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The ease of possession utility refers to the procedures that lead to acquisition of a product. In order to ease possession, Ford Motor Company allows its customers to acquire the truck in several ways. These include leasing, cash purchase, and hire purchase. Moreover, the truck has a warranty to encourage customers to purchase it.
Ford F-150 SVT’s Target Market In the United States, the target market for the truck includes construction companies, security companies, and individuals. Construction and security companies use the truck to transport equipment and materials to various sites (Ford Motor Company, 2013).
The truck’s off-road capabilities enhance travelling to construction sites in remote areas that have poor road network. Since Ford F-150 SVT is a low cost model, its target market among individuals includes middle-income earners who are interested in both comfort and extra space to carry their luggage when travelling.
The truck is also popular among individuals with large families, as well as, people who prefer to travel to remote areas such as wild parks and forests during their holidays.
In China, Ford F-150 SVT’s target market includes companies in the construction and manufacturing industries. Moreover, the truck can be used by farmers and medium-sized businesses that are not able to purchase large trucks. Farmers are likely to prefer the truck because of its ability to travel in the country’s rough terrain (Ford Motor Company, 2013).
Competition in Ford F-150 SVT Truck Category Ford F-150 SVT competes with several truck models in the United States and China. In the United States, the truck’s main competitors include Toyota Hilux, Isuzu Dmax, and Nissan Navara. Toyota Hilux and Isuzu Dmax are competing based on price. Their manufacturers are low cost producers who are able to charge competitive prices.
Besides, Toyota Hilux has a strong brand image that is known for durability and reliability. Isuzu Dmax is known for both comfort and low prices in the United States. Nissan Navara competes with other models based on quality and price. In this regard, Ford F-150 SVT faces high competition in the United States since most producers of medium-sized trucks are focusing on product differentiation.
We will write a custom Research Paper on Marketing Manager specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The competition faced by Ford F-150 SVT in China is very high. The Chinese car market has several medium-sized truck models whose prices are very low. This reduces customers’ switching costs since they can easily shift from one model to another.
The Chinese market is also characterized with price sensitive customers. This makes local models more competitive than Ford F-150 SVT. In this regard, Ford F-150 SVT competes based on its qualities that are superior to those of the Chinese truck models.
Segmentation, Targeting and Positioning Segmentation is the process of using shared attributes to classify or categorize customers in a given market. Demographic and psychographic segmentation are relevant to the Chinese market since the customers’ purchasing behavior is mainly influenced by their income levels and perception of products.
Demographic segmentation involves categorizing customers according to attributes such as sex, age, income, and occupation. In this context, the Chinese market can be segmented according to customers’ income and their occupation in order to identify the group that is likely to purchase Ford F-150 SVT.
Psychographic segmentation involves categorizing customers according to their interests, activities, lifestyles, perceptions, and opinions. In this case, the Chinese market can be segmented based on customers’ lifestyles and perceptions.
Targeting refers to the process of selecting the right market segment. In demographic segmentation, the right group to target includes the high and middle-income earners in China. This choice is justified by the fact that high and middle-income earners are not likely to be sensitive to price changes. Consequently, they are likely to consider the non-price attributes of Ford F-150 SVT in their purchase decisions.
In addition, occupation is a relevant factor for choosing the right market segment. In this case, the segment that should be targeted includes owners of small and medium-sized businesses who are able to afford high quality trucks. In psychographic segmentation, the right group includes the customers who believe that American trucks such as Ford F-150 SVT are superior to local trucks.
Additionally, individuals who are interested in outdoor recreational activities such as visiting tourist attractions are likely to purchase Ford F-150 SVT because it offers comfort, style, durability, and off-road capabilities.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Marketing Manager by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Positioning refers to the process of “identifying the most appropriate marketing mix for a given target market”. Customers in the Chinese market are interested in product quality and price. Thus, the most appropriate elements of the marketing mix for the segments identified in the foregoing paragraph are product and price.
In this regard, Ford F-150 SVT will be positioned as a high quality, luxurious, versatile, and durable medium-sized truck. Given the high competition in the industry, it will be important to position Ford F-150 SVT as a truck that offers superior qualities at affordable prices.
Environmental Facts and Trends in the Chinese Market In the microenvironment, the factors that are likely to influence the sales of Ford F-150 SVT are high competitive rivalry and high bargaining power of the buyers (customers). The competition in the market is very high because there are very many sellers of medium sized trucks. The competition is also high because firms are focusing on product differentiation and cost leadership.
The high competition is likely to affect the sales of Ford F-150 SVT negatively. Customers have high bargaining power because their switching costs are low. Specifically, the customers can easily change from one truck model to another in order to enjoy benefits such as low prices and high quality. Thus, Ford F-150 SVT might not penetrate the market if its qualities fail to satisfy the needs of the market.
In the macro environment, the factors that are likely to affect the sales of Ford F-150 include social, political, and economic variables. China has experienced rapid economic growth in the last two decades.
This has resulted into an increase in business activities, emergence of a large middle-class, and improved purchasing power among citizens. This can be illustrated by the fact that China is the largest market for cars in the world. Thus, high economic growth in China is likely to boost the sales of Ford F-150 SVT.
High regulation is the most important political factor that is likely to affect the sales of Ford F-150 SVT in China. The government of China has imposed high import duties on imported vehicles in order to protect its automotive industry. In addition, foreign car manufacturers that intend to produce vehicles in China must partner with local producers in order to be licensed to operate.
Thus, exporting Ford F-150 to China will reduce its competitiveness due to the high import duties. Although collaborating with a local producer seems appropriate, the partnership can lead to a brand war that will ultimately reduce the competitiveness of Ford F-150 SVT.
The social factors that are likely to influence the sales of Ford F-150 SVT include customers’ perception of imported cars and customers’ lifestyles. The low-income earners believe that foreign trucks are more expensive than local brands.
This perception is likely to discourage the purchase of Ford F-150 among the low-income earners. By contrast, the middle and high-income earners believe that imported trucks have superior qualities.
Thus, they are likely to purchase foreign brands even if they are sold at a premium price. This will boost the sales of Ford F-150 SVT in China. The rising demand for tourism products such as park visits is also likely to boost the sales of Ford F-150.
Marketing Campaign for Ford F-150 in China Marketing promotion refers to the “coordinated series of steps that are taken to promote a product”. The four elements of marketing mix can be used to promote Ford F-150 SVT in China in the following ways. Ford F-150 SVT will be positioned as a high quality brand.
In order to keep this brand promise, the design and production team will take into account the needs of the Chinese market such as fuel efficiency. In addition, the sales team will organize free test drives to enable customers to verify the qualities of the truck.
Penetration pricing will be employed to enable the truck to gain market share in China. This will involve setting relatively low prices in order to attract customers. Discounts will be provided to encourage cash and bulk purchases. These strategies are important because customers in China are price sensitive. Thus, charging low prices will help in overcoming competition.
Selecting the most appropriate distribution channel (place) will be integral in the process of marketing Ford F-150 SVT in China. In this regard, the truck will be distributed through Ford Motor Company’s retail outlets and independent distributors. The rationale of this strategy is that China has a vast geographical area.
Thus, partnering with local distributors will help in reducing distribution costs. Moreover, local distributors have a good knowledge of the market, which will enable them to sell the truck easily. Ford Motor Company’s retail outlets will also be used to train local distributors on the truck’s qualities and capabilities. Undoubtedly, having adequate product knowledge will improve local distributors’ ability to sell the truck.
Promotional activities will also help in marketing Ford F-150 SVT. The promotional activities that will be used include advertising, public relations, and providing free after-sales services such as repairs for a limited period. The objective of the promotions will be to increase product awareness and sales.
The effectiveness of the marketing campaign will be measured by predefined sales metrics. These include the generated sales leads, sales volume, and market share.
Ethical Marketing Considerations The ethical concerns that will be addressed in the marketing plan for Ford F-150 SVT will help in promoting fair competition and protecting the truck’s brand image. Unethical marketing activities such as price fixing, price collusion, and predatory pricing will be avoided since they are illegal and discourage competition.
Moreover, marketing promotion will focus on the use of adverts with appropriate content. Thus, inappropriate content such as sex messages will be avoided in the truck’s adverts.
Conclusion Ford F-150 SVT can gain market share in China since it provides the utilities of customer value. In addition, robust economic growth will boost its sales in China. However, an effective marketing plan must be developed in order to take advantage of the opportunities in the Chinese market.
In this regard, Ford F-150 SVT should be positioned as a truck that provides superior qualities at low costs. This will help in overcoming competition, thereby enabling the truck to gain market share. Moreover, the marketing campaign should focus on creating brand awareness in order to increase sales in China.
References Cant, M., Strydom, J.,
The Taxi Driver and the Dance with Wolves films Essay argumentative essay help
Table of Contents Introduction
Introduction A movie is a visual medium and normally attempts to portray certain parts of written piece of thoughts of characters not explicitly expressed. The film Taxi Driver by Martin Scorsese displays the frustrations of an ex-marine officer in New York City who becomes a taxi driver to contain his chronic insomnia condition. The customs in the city are too much for this driver who served in the just concluded Second World War.
Produced in 1976, this movie was met with criticism and support in equal measure. On the other hand, the film Dances with Wolves by Kevin Costner is often described as a classical masterpiece of the early 1990s due to its unique theme.
The unique cinematography and performances have perfectly fused to express the main theme especially when the characters interact showing emotions and mood in every scene. This analytical treatise attempts to explicitly compare and contrast the cinematic themes creates by the two directors.
The themes Recognizing the themes of loyalty and moral crisis, Scorsese brings this movie to life. He creates a very human action thriller that combines stories of both self-discovery and love for the taxi driver called Travis. Scorsese convincingly mingles the ‘futuristic’ and the ‘realistic’ imaginations to create a world of exotic reality in the busy city life.
There is a lot of violence and prostitution in the New York City. Travis has to adopt very radical actions to try and restore order. He shots the little Irish ‘pimp’ and his friends for encouraging the young lady into prostitution.
On the other hand, Costner in the film Dance with Wolves revises roles as defined by traditions of the Indians and Cowboys. As depicted in the film, tradition and religion control the lives of characters. Specifically, the Sioux tribe is depicted as a unique and traditional society. The American soldiers are portrayed as imperfect, genuine, viciously brutal, and semi thoughtless.
Traditions control the mourning of Elgin who is a lieutenant and Stone. Despite attempting to quantify historical events into context, the film has little on reversal aspect. The movie commences with a civil war featuring antagonists and protagonists of tradition as both teams attempt to create a diversion.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In addition, the Native Americans are painted as traditionally united group who appreciate peace, with strong family bonds and are desperate for opportunity of survival in the strife.
Unlike the film Taxi Driver, the film Dance with Wolves misses the truly poetic orchestrations of actions and heroic displays of bravado. The film Taxi Driver has an intriguing premise: heroism after dejection.
In the film Dance with Wolves, the director seems to be unable to convey the poetry and philosophical inclinations of the colonial masters and the natives of India. At the end, the underlying fear and destabilizations of the imaginative explorations mere summarized the plot rather giving it a poetic identity.
The Plots The film Taxi Driver has the urban plot and the story revolves around a single actor. The actions of the taxi driver affect other actors directly in this action packed piece. Reflectively, this creates a feeling of imaginative casting. Scorsese even goes ahead to include slow motion pictures, yet the film is a high speed genre.
Travis is a character in the movie and always is worried of what will happen next. His character is associated with the unfortunate events when he loses his ‘girlfriend’ after his strategy to take her to a sex movie fires back.
In comparison, the film Dance with Wolves revolves around ‘the kicking bird’ and ‘Wind in His Hair’ that come to the society of the Sioux. The new society’s of the Sioux philosophy is to “take without asking”. During the film, characters display a clear caricature hint which defies traditional stereotyping. At the climax, Dunbar defects from traditional culture to new culture.
To align to the traditional setting aspects on production design and the society, this film heightens hyper-real palate of emotional expression. Moreover, this choice of setting was essential in the need for a proper balance of production aural, sound accordion, and scenes characterized by traditional practices such as sharing of pipe. Subsequently, this balance has facilitated the addition of decadent love and hatred feelings in the film.
We will write a custom Essay on The Taxi Driver and the Dance with Wolves films specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Conclusion The endings of the two genres are quite different. The taxi driver realizes that the item that he never valued turns about to be a necessity for his survival. After being arrested and interrogated by the police, he walks out a hero. On the other hand, the ending of the film Dance with Wolves paints the indigenous Sioux community as people united by shamanism religion and tradition.
The film ends with these people still in the bondage of neocolonialism. The two directors adopt totally different approaches and settings in the two films. Scorsese adopts the urban setting and modern way of life, while Costner adopts the traditional setting and the traditional way of life.
Marketing Plan; Southwest Airlines Report college essay help: college essay help
Executive summary Southwest Airlines was established in 1967 and incorporated in 1971 in Dallas, Texas as a low cost airline company. The firm has developed an optimal market position over the past decades. By the end of 2012, Southwest Airlines had a fleet of 576 aircrafts and operated in 89 destinations. The firm is committed in providing customers with unique experience.
One of the ways through which it achieves this is by nurturing a warm and friendly working environment. Furthermore, the firm ensures that its customers are provided with high quality services. This has played a critical role in developing a high level of customer loyalty.
In an effort to maximize its level of profitability, the firm intends to launch a new service which will entail establishing a new route. The new route will entail travelling between Atlanta, GA to New York LaGuardia.
The firm intends to dominate the new route by offering high quality services. The route will be characterized by short turnaround duration. This will ensure that consumers achieve a high level of flexibility with regard to air travel.
Southwest Airlines intend to achieve the following objectives by launching the new route.
To offer competitive low cost carrier services to consumers in the US airline industry.
To increase the firm’s sales revenue by 20% within one year after launching the new route.
To increase the firm’s market share by 15% within one year after launching the new route.
Situational analysis According to Hitt, Ireland and Hoskisson (65), it is critical of firms to analyze the environment in which it operates by taking into account the internal, customer and the external environments. Therefore, firms should consider conducting a comprehensive environmental analysis by integrating the Porters five forces, PESTLE analysis and the SWOT models.
The Porters’ five forces
The US airline industry is experiencing an increment in the intensity of competition. This has made the industry very volatile. The firm faces intense competition from a number of low-cost carriers such as JetBlue, Easyjet, United Airlines and the American Airlines. These firms have adopted similar operational strategies to those of Southwest Airlines.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Threat of entry
The low- cost carrier airline market in the US is experiencing an increment in the number of new entrants as a result of its high profitability potential. New firms are venturing the industry in an effort to exploit the prevailing market potential.
Consequently, the degree of industry concentration is increasing at an alarming rate. Moreover, the Deregulation Act of 1978 has made it easier for foreign low-cost carriers to enter the industry.
The threat of new entrant has made it difficult for Southwest Airlines to successfully differentiate its services. This arises from the fact that most of the entrants are focusing on price as their market competitive variable. As a result of the high threat of new entrant, the industry is experiencing a decline in its profitability.
However, the threat of new entrant is likely to decline as a result of the high cost of operation and high start-up cost (Hawkins, Misra
Erik Erickson. Trust versus Mistrust Essay (Critical Writing) writing essay help
Table of Contents Biophysical Dimension
This paper explores the life of a 15 months old child using the biophysical, psychological and the social dimensions of child development. This is done using examples of scenarios where the child might experience Erik Erickson’s trust versus mistrust using these three dimensions.
According to Erik Erickson’s theory of psychosocial development, human beings undergo through eight key developmental stages in their life from infancy to old age. All these stages occur in a gradual process, meaning that one stage is succeeded by another (Ashford